Skip to main content

Full text of "Illustrated catalogue of textile machinery made by John Hetherington & Sons, Limited"

See other formats


MitJStR ATtti  •  CA:i^^  OF 

CgjTpN    SPINNING 
'■'^''^'mCHINERY 


John.  HetheriEigton 


-ons 


MANCHESTER 


5^t*fc  Agent  for  u.  s.  a,  and  Canada 
Herbert 


LIBRARY 


^NSSACtft;^^^ 


3895 


•"— ■™^'""" 


#^/m: 


Illustrated  Catalogue 


OF 


Textile    Machinery 


MADE   BY 


John  Hetherington  &  Sons, 


LIMITED 


VULCAN  AND   ANCOATS  WORKS. 

(Established   1830.) 

POLLARD   STREET, 

MANCHESTER. 

John  Hetherinp+'^^  ^^ 


Telephone  No.  3745  City.  Telegraphic  Address: 

(5  lines.)  "HETH,"  MANCHESTER. 


Also  proprietors  of 

CURTIS,  SONS  &  CO., 

(Established   1804.) 


Phoenix  Works,  Manchester. 


23Q91 


'1  ^ 


Preface. 


We^have  pleasure  in  submitting  to  your  notice 
our  new  Catalogue  of  Textile  Machinery. 

Our  endeavour  has  been  to  produce  a  book 
which,  while  useful  generally,  may  also  be  instructive 
to  those  desirous  of  closely  examining  particular 
points  of  practice,  and  we  trust  the  present  edition, 
which  has  been  brought  up  to  date,  and  gives 
information  respecting  new  Machines  and  Improve- 
ments made  by  us  since  the  issue  of  our  last 
Catalogue  in  1911,  will  meet  with  your  appreciation, 

John  Hetherington  &  Sons,  Ltd. 

February,   1921. 


SMTl  LIBRARY 


CONTENTS, 


Automatic. Hopper  Feeder 

Bale  Opener  

Balling;  Machine...  

Bundling  Press       

Cable  Cord  Machine        

Camless  Winding  Frame  

Carding  Engine       

Combined  Vertical  Opener  and  Scutcher     

Cr;eeper  Feed  Table  or  Porcupine  Opener 

Crighton  or  Vertical  Opener      

Derby  Doublers     

Drawing  Frames 

Draw  Frame  and  Lap  Machine  Combined 

Exhaust  Opener  and  Scutcher  

Flyer  Doublers       

Hard  Waste  Machinery 

"  Knowles  "  Winding  Frame 

Large  Cylinder  Opener  

Mule,  Hetherington  Pattern      ..  

Curtis'  Pattern        

,,     Turns  per  inch  for  Counts  lO's-132's  T  and  W 
*'  Nasmith  "  Combing  Machines  for  Counts 
Combing  Machines  with  "  Roth's  "  Aspirator 

Percentage  Balance  for  Comber  Waste        

Reels  for  Cops  or  Bobbins         

Ribbon  Lap  Machines      

Ring  Doubling  Frame      

..    Spinning  Frame       

.,    Travellers      

Roller  Truing  Machine 

Roving  Waste  Opener     

.Scutcher       

Sliver  or  Comber  Lap  Machine  

Soft  Waste  Machinery     

Speed  Frames         

Spindle  Banding  Machine  

Square  Roots  

Twine  Laying  Machines  

Twiners,  Yorkshire  and  P'rench  System       

Views  of  Works     

Winding  Frames 

Worsted  Mule         


Page 

14,21 

2, 

,  10 

269 

...  264, 

265 

267 

...  254, 

258 

60 

,75 

33 

.  37 

22 

.  24 

25 

.  32 

76 

,  77 

...  119, 

134 

87 

38 

,42 

...  248, 

249 

■...  270 

27i 

...  250. 

253 

43 

.49 

...  162, 

209 

179 

205 

...   88, 

110 

...  Ill, 

116 

...  117, 

118 

...  259, 

263 

82 

:,  86 

...  233, 

247 

...  214. 

232 

...  228, 

246 

110 

11 

,  12 

50,  59 

78,  81 

...  271, 

272 

..  135, 

161 

268 

150  and  229 

267 

...  210. 

213 

ront  of  Book 

250,  256, 

266 

...  192, 

193 

INDEX  TO   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


Bale 

Page 
Opener        2 

Page 
Combing  Machine,  Egyptian  Sliver  ...     93 

Lattice         

4 

.\merican  Sliver  ... 

94 

Section        

6 

Nipper  Crank 

97 

..       Plan      

8 

Piecing     ... 

98 

Roving  Waste  Opener     

11 

Combing... 

99 

.Automatic  Hopper  Feeder    

13 

Top  Comb      

101 

Section  and 

Action  of  Nipper  .. 

103 

Feeding  arrangements        ...          17 

19 

Gearing        107,  lOS 

109 

Automatic  Plan 

20 

Plan          

110 

Porcupine  or  Creeper  Feed 

23 

with  Roths  .As- 

Plans     ... 

24 

pirator     

112 

Crighton  or  Vertical  Opener  Footstep 

26 

Waste  Lattice       ... 

114 

..        Grid     ... 

Elevation 
„       Plan      .. 

Section 

29 
30 

31 

..  in  con- 
junction with  Roth's  Aspirators  ... 

Pecentage  Scale  for  Comber  Waste  ... 

Drawing  Frame      119 

Section        

116 

118 

124 
121 

Combined  with  Scutcher   ... 

34 

Stop  Motions  122,123 

125 

Plan 

35 

Single  Preventer 

126 

Gearing      

37 

Plans     

129 

Exhaust  Opener  and  Scutcher     ...      39 

41 

Gearing        

132 

Plan  ... 

40 

Speed  Frames 135 

146 

Large  Cylinder  Opener 

43 

Roller  Stand        

136 

Sections 

45 

Tapering  Motion 

140 

„       Plans       

47 

Differential  Motion   ... 

143 

Scutcher      50 

55 

Gearings      ...    152.  154 

155 

Regulator 

53 

Bobbins  and 

Plan  showing  Fan  Holes     ... 

Gearing      

Carding  Engines       60 

56 
58 
69 

Mu 

Skewers  158 
le,  Heth  Pattern     162 

,,      Headstock       164 

Rim  Band  Tightening     ... 

160 
176 

168 

166 

..       Flats       62 

63 

,,      Cam  Shaft 

167 

Grinding  Motion  65,  66 

67 

Nosing  Motion 

169 

Plan  of  Gearing 

73 

Stretching  Motion   

172 

Derby  Doubler 

76 

,     Curtis  Pattern       

178 

Comber  or  Sliver  Lap  Machine 

78 

Change  Motion       

180 

Stop  Motion    

79 

Tension  Motion      

182 

Single  Preventer    ... 

80 

Headstock         

185 

Ribbon  Lap  Machine      

82 

,     Metal  Carriage      

171 

Gearing      

84 

,     Patent  Draft  Gearing         

174 

Plan     

85 

,     Double  Speed  Driving       

175 

Combing  Machine  ^Xasmith's)    ...      88 

96 

Patent  Loose  Spindle  Bolster  .. 

177 

Section    

91 

,     Guards     186.  187, 

188 

, 

„        Sea  Island  Sliver... 

92 

.     Creels       190. 

191 

INDEX  TO  ILLUSTRATIONS.- Continued. 


Paf^e 

Page 

Mule  for  Worsted     

...    192 

Ring  Doubling  Frame,  English  System 

..     Gearinji.  Hetii  Mule     

.199,201 

Wet     236 

Curtis      .. 

...  202 

Scotch  System...  237 

..     Plans         

..  208 

.   .,            ,,       Spindles     238 

Twiner.  Yorkshire  System    

..  210 

Knee  Brake       ...  239 

Rint^  Spinninji  Frame     

..  214 

,,       Gearing      244 

Roller  Stand 

..  216 

Winding  Frames      250,  254,- 266 

Spindles   ... 

..  218 

Camless  Motion      ...  257 

Separators 

..  220 

Reels,  Double     259 

Creels 

..   222 

,,       Single      261,262 

Creel  for  W 

aste  223 

Bundling  Press 264 

Gearint<     ... 

...  225 

Spindle  Banding  Machine      268 

Ring  Doubling  Frame     ...         233. 

240,  242 

Balling  Machine        269 

English  System 

Dry     

..  235 

IX 


XI 


Xll 


XV 


xvu 


H 

w 

< 

W 

Q 

O 
O 

w 
w 

Q 


XIX 


XX 


XXI 


XXll 


XXIU 


^s 


^m 


,5-o;,42-a 

z 


SUIVER   L-AP 
MACHINE. 


tHt^-os    »Oa  w-AP  =  JO'- >1 
■    •  »a-  t' 

S  •  •  lA-  3' 


Q 


DERBY  DOUBLER 
60  CANS  19"  LAP. 


DRAWlNiq  FRKME  WITH    BEAM&  A\_TERNA.TE 


— 

InrJ 

M 

M 

p^ 

l-'G- 

.-a".*-. 

1 

or 

,2r6. 

U 

.5  6-H 

u 
a: 

,2/0' 

*0 

u 

J 

u. 

U 
J 

2 
< 

a: 

z 

2 

z 

Z 
< 
0 

z 
o 

B 

a 

2 

Si 

i 

i 

a 

z 
> 

a. 

z 

E 


jp  ^a 


DOOBUE  -4-0  HANK    BOBBIN 
REE\_. 


Quick  traverse  YriNDiN<j   frame 


BUNDUINq   PRESS 


t! 


Single  -^O  hank  cop 
REEU  . 

1-2 

3* 

STOP   MOTION    DOUBL-iNq 
WlNDlNCj     FRAME. 

U3 

A.TWl 

1 

ME! 

6 

u 

1 

0 

u 

;    .^PINDLCS. 

^                        SPINDI-CS .                                        II 

DIMENSIONS  OFMACHINES 


XXIV 


COTTON  GIN 
^ 91-0"  .. 


.AUTOMATIC  TEEDD? 

L 


© 

16-3 

T 

© 


DOUBLE    CRIGHTON    OPENER 


T 


0 


HOPPER  BALE  OPENER 


SINGLE    CRIGHTON 
OPENER 


COMBINED    CRIGHTON      OPENER     «<     SCUTCHER 
WITH     CREEPER    FEED 


«       ROVING 
WASTE  OPENER 


1,- 

-4 

« 

,1 

^"t       "^^^          1 

SINGLE    LARGE    CYLINDER 
OPENER 


COMBINED  LARGE     CYLINDER 

OPENER  *  SCUTCHER 


Jl 

^^       1 

. 5-^ 

-1        '^^ 

R 

|_23-5:. 

I'l 

i 

■■i 

'        (JRt^ 

■^ 

=^      1 

DOUaUE    BEATER    SCUTCHFR 
-a    LAPS    UP 


REVOLVING      FLAT 
CARDING  ENGINE 


^-1^ '^       1 



-g-i-17-5: 

11 

P 

H 

^^       * 

^    J 

SINGLE    BEATER    SCUTCHER 
4  LAPS     UP 

—  DIMENSIONS  OF  MACHINES 


RIBBON   LAP  machine: 


[7     IS-IVOR   SHtADS   84"la-   ?     ~ 

"rt   ii-ll4         8       -         8i'   -     ■O "  ^ 

HEILMANN    COMBER 


HOPPER     BALE     OPENER 


Hopper  Bale  Opener. 


Advantages  of  the  bale  opener. — The  advantage 
of  this  machine  in  the  mill  cannot  well  be  over-estimated, 
particularly  in  large  mills.  The  cotton  is  opened  up  better 
and  more  evenly  than  by  hand,  and  with  much  less  labour 
on  the  part  of  the  operatives,  while  a  considerable  saving  in 
wages  is  effected.  In  addition  to  this,  the  wear  and  tear 
of  the  machines  following  is  considerably  reduced,  as  the 
cotton  has  already  lost  some  of  the  heavy  dirt,  and  is  pre- 
sented to  them  in  a  much  more  open  state  than  it  is  possible 
to  get  from  hand  mixing. 

Description  of  machine.  -Our  new  machine,  repre- 
sented in  the  accompanying  illustrations,  is  arranged  to  take 
the  cotton  direct  from  the  bale,  fed  either  by  hand  in  large 
quantities,  or  by  a  slow-moving  lattice.  The  working  parts 
are  so  arranged  that  the  cotton  is  treated  to  a  combing,  in 
place  of  a  tearing  or  pulling  action,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
majority  of  the  old  roller  bale  breakers.  The  receiver  floor 
of  this  machine  when  not  supplied  with  a  slow-moving  feed 
lattice  is  composed  of  inclined  grids  or  bars,  through  which 
the  loose  dirt  falls,  and  arrangements  are  made  at  the  end 
of  the  machine  so  that  the  waste  can  easily  be  removed 
without  stopping  the  machine.  These  grids  are  placed  at 
such  an  angle  that  the  cotton  slides  down  to  the  foot  of  the 
spiked  lattice. 

Improved  spiked  lattice. — In  the  construction  of 
this  machine  we  have  devoted  particular  attention  to  the 
formation  of  the  spiked  lattice,  which  will  be  seen  by  re- 
ferring to  the  sketch,  Fi^^  1  giving  a  section  of  same.  The 
laths  A,  carrying  the  spikes  or  teeth,  are  secured  to  an 
endless  canvas  B  by  fixing  them  to  a  strip  of  wood  C  on  the 
other  side  of  the  canvas  sheet  B.  The  whole  combination  is 
then  fastened  to  endless  leather  bands  D  in  such  a  manner 
that  the  canvas  sheet  B  hangs  slack  between  each  lath. 

Advantages  of  the  new  lattice. — The  object  in 
making  the  lattice  in  the  manner  described  is  to  prevent  the 
trouble  resulting  from  bits  of  cotton,  grit,  dirt,  &c.,  getting 
between  the  laths  and  the  canvas,  as  the  sheet,  in  turning 
round  the  drums  in  the  old  system,  slightly  separates  from 


the  edges  of  the  laths,  and  allows  this  matter  to  get  be- 
tween the  laths  and  canvas.      These  bits  are  compressed 

when  the  band  straightens 

A.  LA-K      CARRriNO     SPIKES  !\  -^^^jf^     ^^^^      ^|^|^      ^j^-^      ^^^ 

B.  Canvas  \ 

C.  Thin  met*i  or  wood  lath 


D.  Leather   belt     ^ 


stant  accumulation  of  hard 
pressed  matter  between  the 
laths  and  canvas  it  fincilly 
results  in  a  breakage  of  the 
lath  or  splitting  of  the 
canvas.  With  this  new 
arrangement  this  trouble 
is  impossible.  The  bending 
takes  place  on  the  leather 
band  D,  and  the  slackness 
of  the  canvas  B  prevents  it 
ever  becoming  too  tight  on 
going  round  the  drums,  or 
the  laths  becoming  sep- 
arated at  the  edges  any  more 
at  this  stage  than  when  the 
lattice  is  travelling  in  a 
straight  line;  and  it  will  be 
readily  seen  that  it  is  im- 
possible for  dirt  to  gather 
and  in  time  break  off  the 
laths.  With  the  canvas 
never  requiring  tightening 
up,  there  is  nothing  to  cause 
breaking  or  splitting  of  the 
sheet — a  fault  in  the  old 
arrangement  which  allows 
dirt,  &c.,  to  get  on  to  the  rollers,  causing  great  wear  to  the 
same,  and  preventing  a  positive  drive  for  the  lattice.  This 
lattice  as  a  whole,  only  requires  to  be  tight  enough  to  get 
a  sufficient  grip  on  the  rollers  for  driving. 

This  method  of  building  up  the  lattice  makes  it  much 
stronger,  and  effectually  prevents  the  spikes  from  being 
forced  through  the  laths  from  the  front. 

The  cotton  is  taken  up  the  spiked  lattice,  and  operated 
upon  by  the  "  ewener''  roller,  revolving  in  the  opposite 
direction  to  the  lattice,  its  action  being  to  take  off  the  sur- 
plus cotton  from  the  lattice,  and  throw  it  back  into  the  hopper. 
This  roller  is  made  adjustable  so  that  it  can  be  easily  set  at  any 


Fig.  1 


required  distance  from  the  lattice,  suitable  for  the  different 
kinds  of  cotton  being  worked.  To  prevent  any  cotton  being 
carried  round  the  "  evener  "  roller,  it  is  in  turn  stripped  by  a 
winged  beater  also  made  adjustable.  This  treatment  has 
opened  the  cotton  to  a  considerable  degree,  and. loosened  a 
large  amount  of  dirt,  sand,  &c.  To  prevent  this  from  being 
carried  along  with  the  cotton,  we  introduce  an  exhaust  fan 
over  the  hopper,  with  the  mouth  placed  over  the  centre  of  the 
receiver  or  bin  of  the  machine;  this  mouth  or  entrance  to  the 
fan  we  cover  with  a  perforated  sheet,  through  which  the  dust, 
&c.,  is  drawn,  and  carried  away  by  a  pipe  in  the  usual  manner 
to  the  dust  chamber  or  any  convenient  place.  To  keep  this 
perforated  sheet  clear  of  fluff  or  any  accumulation  whatever, 
we  employ  a  mechanical  stripper  or  cleaner,  consisting 
of  a  light  brush,  which  is  slowly  passed  to  and  fro  over  the 
surface  of  the  perforated  sheet  at  the  mouth  of  the  exhaust 
fan  (Fig  2).  This  device  is  driven  from  the  lattice  shaft,  on 
which  we  place  a  worm,  working  into  a  worm  wheel  on  a 
side  shaft,  with  connections  and  levers  as  shown,  which 
oscillates  the  brush  on  the  stud  or  pivot  at  its  lower  extremity, 
thus  keeping  the  entrance  to  the  exhaust  pipe  always  clear, 
without  any  attention  from  the  attendant. 

The  cotton  from  the  upright  lattice,  after  passing  the 
"evener"  roller,  is  beaten  off  by  means  of  a  flap  roller  on  to 
a  set  of  grid  bars.  These  grids  are  so  arranged  that  it  is 
impossible  for  the  cotton  to  miss  them  before  leaving 
the  machine,  and  they  take  all  the  heavy  dirt,  &c.,  which 
has  been  loosened  from  the  cotton  after  leaving  the  front 
portion  of  the  machine.  Underneath  the  grids  we  place  a 
box  to  receive  these  droppings,  which  can  easily  be  removed 
and  emptied  at  any  time. 

Self  adjusting  bearings  are  supplied  to  spiked 
lattice  and  rollers  to  reduce  the  wear  of  the  shafts  and  bear- 
ings, and  power  required  for  driving  the  machine. 

The  arrangement  shown  in  Fig.  2  shows  the  machine 
delivering  on  to  a  lattice  for  making  mixings,  but  they  can 
be  made  to  feed  direct  into  Crighton  Openers,  &c.,  if 
required. 

The  best  arrangement  when  mixings  are  not  required 
is  the  combination  of  the  Bale  Opener  feeding  direct  to  an 
Automatic  Feeder  supplied  with  a  filling  arrangement, 
which  automatically  regulates  the  supply  of  cotton  from  the 
Bale  Opener. 


Position  of  the  machine. — The  machine  may  be 
placed  in  the  mixing  room  or  in  an  adjoining  room  above  or 
below,  as  may  be  most  suitable,  as  the  lattices  can  be  made 
in  almost  any  combination.  Where  a  vertical  lattice  is 
necessary  it  is  usually  connected  directly  with  the  machine, 
and  driven  from  it  by  a  fin.  rope.  The  distributing  lattices 
are  also  usually  driven  from  the  machine,  but  in  extensive 
installations  they  may  be  driven  separately  by  strap. 

Bale  opener  combined  with  Crighton  opener*. — 
Where  low  classes  of  dirty  cotton  are  used,  the  Bale  Opener 
can  be  arranged  to  drop  the  cotton  on  to  the  feed  table  of 
a  Creeper  Feed  or  Porcupine  Opener  feeding  a  Crighton 
Opener,  the  delivery  lattice  of  which  is  modified,  and  ex- 
tended to  deliver  the  cotton  on  to  the  distributing  lattice. 
The  cotton  may  be  arranged  to  pass  at  will  either  directly 
to  the  mixing,  or  first  through  the  Opener. 

Distributing  or  mixing  lattices  are  supplied  to  the 
Hopper  Bale  Opener,  and  arranged  to  make  any  number  of 
mixings,  and  carried  in  any  manner  most  suitable  to  the 
shape  of  the  room.  They  can  also  be  arranged  to  feed 
direct  into  an  Automatic  Feeder  supplied  with  a  device, 
which  stops  the  Bale  Opener  when  a  given  quantity  of 
cotton  is  delivered,  and  so  continually  regulating  the  supply 
of  the  cotton  to  the  various  machines  to  follow.  When 
using  lattices  in  connection  with  the  bale  opener  the  cotton 
is  delivered  on  to  a  short  lattice  placed  as  low  as  possible, 
and  is  in  turn  taken  up  by  a  double  elevating  lattice  usually 
2ft.  wide,  with  deep  sides,  well  stayed  together.  From  this 
double  lattice  the  cotton  is  delivered  on  to  the  distributing 
or  cross  lattice  making  the  various  mixings. 

Lattices  are  usually  driven  from  the  Bale  Opener  by 
either  rope  or  belt  driving,  so  that  the  whole  combination  is 
self-contained.  Special  arrangements  of  lattices  for  feeding 
two  or  three  Automatic  Feeders  automatically,  or  for  any 
number  of  machines,  either  direct  from  Bale  Opener  or 
Crighton  Opener,  are  made  as  desired. 

Formerly  the  lattice  sides  were  made  of  cast-iron,  but 
we  now  make  them  in  a  special  manner  in  sheet-iron,  suit- 
ably stiffened,  the  object  being  to  make  them  as  light  as 
possible,  and  unbreakable. 

Means  of  fixing  lattices. — The  lattice  hangers  are 
made  with  feet  to  fit  on  to  small  iron  beams  (of  section  as 
below),  which   must   be  placed   in   the   proper   position   in 


5-5  FOR  36  yjJOE 


advance.  The  hangers  and  lattices  are  then  easily  attached 
by  hook-bolts.  All  the  reversing  bevels  are  covered,  and 
the  reversing  arrangements  made  as  perfect  as  possible. 

Power. — Two  h.p.  for  machine  without  lattice. 

Pulleys  and  speeds.— Spiked  lattice  pulley,  16in.  to 
24in.  dia.,  160  revs.;  Beater  pulley,  14in.  to  22in.  dia.,  180 
revs.;  Distributing  lattice  pulley,  16in.  to  20in.  dia.,  100  revs, 
for  fin.  dia.  rope  requiring  25  ft. 

Floor  space.— 9ft.  by  5ft.  5in.  for  36in.  wide  machine; 
9ft.  by  6ft.  Sin.  for  44iin.  wide  machine.  Width  of  delivery 
lattices,  2ft. 


Weights  of  Machines 

without  lattice 

Cubic  feet 

Gross 
41^  cwts. 

44 

Net 
34  cwts. 

36     ,, 

164  for  36in.  wide  machine 
167  for  44*in.   ,, 

r  9'/2" 


Weight  of  12ft.  of  double  vertical  lattice  and  attach- 
ments, gross  13  cwts.,  net  Hi  cwts.  Weight  of  30  feet  of 
distributing  lattice,  gross  15f  cwts.,  net  13^  cwts. 

Strapping,  &c. — Main  driving  belt,  3in.  wide.  Beater 
belt,  2in.  wide,  length  according  to  position  of  main  shaft. 
Rope  for  driving  the  vertical  lattice,  25ft.  by  fin.  dia.  Rope 
for  driving  the  distributing  lattice,  25ft.  by  fin.  dia.,  or  belt 
2oin.  wide  if  driven  separately. 

Production.— 2,5001bs.  to  3,0001bs.  per  hour 

Hand  of  machine. — To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
machine  face  dehvery  end,  and  note  if  the  driving  pulley 
must  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side. 


BALE    OPENER    SPECIFICATION. 


[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be  allowed 
to  us.] 


Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  the  Bale  Openers. 

How  many  machines  ? 

To  be  fed  by  hand  or  lattice  ? 

Will  you  require  mixings  ?  How  many  ? 

Do    you    feed    direct    into    Automatic    Feeder   with    Patent    Feeding 
arrangement  or  direct  into  Opener  ? 

What  kind  of  cotton  do  you  work  ? 

Weight  of  cotton  to  be  worked  per  week  ? 

Do  you  require  Fan  t^  extra  Pipes  @  per 

foot? 

When  facing  delivery,  pulley  to  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  ? 

Speed  of  Line  Shaft  ? 

When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 

Observations  and  remarks. 


10 


IMTI  LIBRARY 


11» 


Roving  Waste  Opener. 


A  considerable  economy,  an  important  consideration  in 
modern  mill  management,  is  effected  by  the  installation  of 
this  machine,  inasmuch  as  all  roving  or  soft  waste  may  be 
passed  through  it  and  delivered  in  such  an  open,  fleecy  state 
as  to  permit  of  its  being  mixed  with  the  raw  cotton  and  so 
converted  into  yarn  along  with  the  latter.  The  waste  is 
placed  on  a  lattice  and  carried  to  the  feed  roller,  it  is  then 
treated  to  a  combing  action  by  a  quick-running  spiked 
beater,  and  it  is  finally  delivered  by  the  assistance  of  a  zinc 
cage  on  to  a  delivery  lattice  arranged  to  be  worked  in 
connection  with  the  usual  mixing  or  distributing  lattices  of 
the  mill,  or  to  deposit  the  fleece  into  a  skip  if  desired. 

The  lattice  on  which  the  waste  is  spread  is  usually 
23  inches  wide,  and  may  be  of  any  length  required.  There 
is  also  provided  a  Stopping  and  reversing  motion  to 
prevent  accidents. 

The  feed    roller  revolves  over  self- weighted  pedals. 

The  cylinder  or  beater  of  Beechwood,  24ins.  dia., 
is  furnished  with  flat  steel  pins  of  fine  pitch,  which  treat  the 
material  to  a  combing  action.  The  ends  are  of  sheet-iron 
made  in  halves  and  the  shaft  is  hardened  at  its  bearings. 

A  zinc  cage  assists  the  action  of  delivery  from  the 
cylinder  on  to  a  lattice  arranged  to  supply  other  lattices,  or 
to  deliver  into  skips  as  required. 

A  locking  device  prevents  the  cylinder  cover  from 
being  raised  whilst  the  cylinder  is  running. 

Guards  are  provided  wherever  necessary. 

Space  occupied, — 10ft.  x  5ft.  lin.  with  short  lattice, 
13ft.  7ins.  X  5ft.  lin.  with  long  lattice. 

Pulley. — lOins.  dia.  X  3in.  wide. 

Speed. — 800  to  825  revs,  per  min.     Power. — 4  i.h.p. 

Strapping. — Main  belt  3in.  wide,  length  according  to 
position  of  line  shaft,  beater  to  cross  shaft  8ft.  X  2in.  wide. 

Production, — 30  to  351bs.  per  hour  according  to  kind 
of  waste. 


12 


IMPROVED    AUTOMATIC     HOPPER     FEEDER. 


13 


New 
Automatic  Hopper  Feeder. 


This  machine,  first  introduced  into  this  country  by  us, 
'"and  illustrated  in  the  accompanying  views,  is  designed  to 
^teplace  the  hand  feeding  of  openers  and  scutchers  by  an 
^automatic  process.  It  spreads  the  cotton  on  to  the  feed 
tables  with  much  greater  regularity  than  is  possible  by 
hand,  in  addition  to  opening  it  considerably,  and  completely 
obviates  the  necessity  of  weighing,  the  attendant  having 
only  to  fill  the  hoppers  from  time  to  time,  taking  care  that 
the  supply  does  not  run  low. 

It  may  be  applied  in  several  ways.  In  new  installations 
it  is  usual  to  place  the  feeder  before  the  opener,  both  feeder 
and  porcupine  being  placed  together  in  the  mixing  room. 
The  labour  of  the  attendants  is  greatly  facilitated  and  a 
considerable  saving  in  wages  effected  by  the  use  of  these 
machines,  especially  in  large  mills  where  more  than  one 
opener  is  at  work,  since  one  workman  can  attend  to  three 
machines  when  conveniently  placed.  The  cotton  being 
considerably  opened  in  passing  through  this  machine,  is 
presented  to  the  opener  in  an  open  fleecy  state,  so  that  the 
action  of  the  latter  is  more  effective  and  the  cotton  better 
cleaned  in  its  passage  than  would  otherwise  be  the  case. 

Summary  of  advantages. — Of  our  latest  im- 
proved pattern  machine  is  unequalled  for  sensitive 
regulation,  economising  labour  and  subjecting  the  cotton  to 
a  cleaning  process,  with  the  result  that  a  cleaner  and  more 
regular  yarn  is  made,  owing  to  the  exceptional  regularity 
of  the  feed. 

Improved  framing  with  self-adjusting  bearings  for 
lattices  and  rollers. 

Shrouded  end-plates  for  the  rollers  to  prevent  dust 
and  dirt  from  penetrating  and  so  causing  friction. 

Rope  driving  is  employed  all  through  except  as 
regards  the  two  change  wheels  for  regulating  the  feed  to  a 
nicety,  and  the  fast  and  loose  strap  pulleys  for  the  automatic 
starting  and  stopping  of  the  machine. 

14 


Double  pope  driving  is  employed  for  the  levelling 
roller,  its  stripper,  the  beater  stripper,  and  the  surplus  roller 
over  the  reserve  box. 

Spjked  lifting  lattice  with  driving  blocks  of  lOin. 
diameter,  the  large  size  of  the  blocks  preventing  slipping  of 
the  lattice  and  consequent  irregularities  in  the  feed. 

Adjustments  for  the  le\'elling  or  evener  roller  and  the 
stripper,  in  relation  to  the  vertical  lattice. 

Reserve  box  with  delivery  roller,  together  with 
adjustable  back  plates,  scale,  and  index  finger. 

Surplus  roller  over  the  reserve  box,  with  inspection 
window  to  keep  the  working  of  the  machine  under  control. 

Perforated  grids  under  surplus  roller  and  lifting 
lattice  to  allow  the  loose  dirt  to  fall  away. 

Regulation. — We  advise  the  use  of  a  swing  door  in 
the  hopper  in  conjunction  with  a  feed  lattice. 

This  swing  door  regulates  the  volume  of  cotton  in 
the  hopper  and  therefore  ensures  an  even  feed  to  the 
reserve  box.  It  may  control  the  action  of  a  creeper  lattice 
or  a  spider  for  pipe-feeding  from  above. 

The  regulator  of  the  succeeding  machine  acts  on  the 
delivery  roller  of  the  reserve  box,  hut  not  on  any  other  part 
of  the  hopper  feeder,  thus  relieving  the  strain  on  the  cone 
strap  and  permitting  extremely  sensitive  regulation  at  the 
final  stage. 

The  repeated  regulation  of  the  quantity  of  material 
fed,  also  during  its  treatment  and  again  on  its  delivery  to 
the  succeeding  machine,  together  with  the  ample  facilities 
provided  for  the  variation  of  quantity  fed  and  delivered, 
must  appeal  strongly  to  all  who  possess  any  knowledge  of 
the  spinning  industry,  and  they  will  be  in  a  position  to 
appreciate  our  claim  that  this  machine  is  the  last  ivord  in 
Automatic  Feeders. 

Description. —  Fig,  1  shows  in  elevation  our  new 
machine,  constructed  from  entirely  new  models  with  several 
modifications.  It  consists  of  a  horizontal  bottom  feeding 
lattice  A  on  which  the  cotton  rests,  and  is  thereby  constantly 
urged  against  the  spiked  vertical  lattice  B.  There  is  also 
shown  a  slow  running  feeding  lattice  M  which  can  be  made 
any  length  to  suit  the  requirements  of  the  mill.  In  con- 
junction with  this  lattice  M,  we  usually  employ  a  swing 
door  N,  placed  about  midway  in  the  bin  or  hopper,  and  it 
is  so  arranged  to  act  on  the  fast  and  loose  driving  pulleys 

15 


0,  to  stop  and  start  the  feeding  according  to  the  amount  of 
cotton  in  the,  bin.  The  vertical  lattice  is  now  driven  by 
lOin.  diameter  blocks  to  prevent  any  slipping,  change 
wheels  are  suppHed  for  giving  a  range  of  speeds.  To 
regulate  the  thickness  of  material  on  the  vertical  lattice  B 
and  to  prevent  any  lumps  being  carried  forward,  a  spiked 
evener  roller  C  revolving  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
lattice  is  placed  near  the  top  of  the  machine  its  action  being 
to  comb  off  the  surplus  cotton  from  the  vertical  lattice  and 
throw  it  back  into  the  hopper.  To  prevent  any  cotton 
being  carried  round  this  roller  it  is  in  turn  stripped  by  a 
winged  beater  D.  The  rollers  C  and  D  can  easily  be 
adjusted  to  the  vertical  lattice.  The  vertical  lattice  is  in 
turn  cleared  by  means  of  a  winged  beater  E  the  material 
falling  into  a  reserve  box  F.  This  box  is  provided  with 
adjustable  boards  G  and  H,  the  object  being  to  regulate  the 
space  for  the  cotton;  these,  boards  are  provided  with  an 
index  plate.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  reserve  box  is  a  fluted 
delivery  roller  J  driven  from  the  feed  lattice  of  the  machine 
it  supplies,  by  this  means  the  regulator  of  the  opener  or 
scutcher  controls  the  speed  of  the  delivery  without  altering 
the  speed  of  the  vertical  lattice.  Over  the  reserve  box  is 
placed  a  winged  beater  K,  the  object  of  this  beater  is  to 
regulate  the  height  of  the  cotton  in  the  box,  and  to  throw 
the  surplus  cotton  back  on  to  the  vertical  lattice  to  be 
returned  to  the  hopper.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  latticQ  is 
placed  a  perforated  zinc  grid  to  allow  any  dirt  to  fall  away. 

The  machine  is  supplied  with  fast  and  loose  pulleys 
L  for  direct  driving,  or  to  be  connected  up  to  the  drop  lever 
or  side  shaft  of  the  succeeding  machine  for  automatically 
stopping  and  starting  of  the  machine. 

All  the  beaters  and  stripping  rollers  are  driven  by  an 
endless  rope  from  the  driving  shaft.  These  beaters  and 
rollers  are  supplied  with  swivel  bearings  and  shrouded  ends 
to  prevent  the  cotton  from  winding  round  the  shaft. 

Regulation. — To  facilitate  the  regulation  of  the  supply 
to  the  reserve  box  without  speeding  up  the  vertical  lattice  B, 
the  spiked  evener  roller  C  can  be  moved  within  certain 
limits  so  as  to  vary  the  distance  between  the  spikes  of  the 
roller  and  of  the  lattice.  The  greater  the  distance  between 
them  the  heavier  will  be  the  feed,  and  vice-versa.  This 
distance  depends  also  to  some  extent  on  the  kind  of  cotton 
being  worked. 

16 


17 


stopping  and  knocking  off  arrangements. — The 

machine  is  suppHed  with  fast  and  loose  driving  pulleys,  and 
may  be  driven  independently  from  the  main  shaft  or  from 
the  machine  it  feeds.  When  applied  to  machines  making 
laps  the  strap  fork  is  connected  up  to  the  drop  lever,  which 
stops  the  machine  on  completion  of  the  lap.  It  is  also 
driven  sometimes  from  the  side  shaft  of  the  opener  or 
scutcher.  All  the  necessary  parts  and  connections  are 
delivered  with  the  machine. 

Automatic  filling  of  hoppers. — This  device  is  for 
regulating  and  controlling  the  supply  of  cotton  to  the  hopper 
automatically. 

At  the  receiving  end  of  the  hopper  a  swing  door  N  (see 
fig.  1)  is  placed,  hanging  midw^ay  between  the  back  of  the 
receiver  and  the  vertical  lattice  B.  The  door  is  so  balanced 
that  the  slighest  variation  of  the  volume  of  cotton  in  the  bin 
acts  promptly  upon  it.  The  door  is  connected  up  to  the 
fast  and  loose  pulley  O  of  the  feeding  lattice  M  if  fed  in  the 
same  room,  or  to  the  pulley  driving  a  revolving  spider  (fig.  2) 
placed  at  the  foot  of  a  trunk  if  fed  from  the  room  above. 
Directly  a  given  quantity  has  been  delivered  the  door  is 
moved,  and  by  the  connections  R  and  S  to  the  strap  fork  P 
the  belt  is  shifted  on  to  the  loose  pulley  and  the  feed  stopped. 
When  the  volume  of  cotton  becomes  light  the  door  moves 
in  the  opposite  direction  after  passing  a  given  point,  the 
connections  to  the  strap  fork  again  begins  to  operate  and 
brings  the  belt  on  to  the  fast  pulley  and  the  feed  is  resumed. 
When  connected  up  to  a  bale  opener  this  motion  can  be  so 
arranged  to  stop  and  start  the  delivery  directly  the  required 
amount  has  been  received  in  the  bin  of  the  hopper. 

Application  to  vertical  openers. — In  cases  where 
more  than  one  opener  is  at  work,  delivering  the  cotton  in  an 
open  state  and  not  as  a  lap,  a  saving  of  wages  may  also  be 
effected  by  the  application  of  feeders.  In  such  cases  the 
machines  are  made  in  different  widths  to  suit  feed  tables 
from  ■24in.  upwards,  or  to  feed  directly  into  the  opener 
trumpet. 

Application  to  openers  making  laps. — Under 
these  conditions  we  strongly  recommend  a  machine  having 
a  swing  door,  as  previously  described.  This  could  be  worked 
in  connection  with  a  slow  running  lattice  bringing  the  cotton 
from  the  mixings  and  delivering  it  into  the  hopper,  or  from 
a  bale  opener  if  fed  direct. 

18 


In  cases  where  the  mixing  room  is  above  the  scutching 
room  it  is  necessary  to  introduce  a  pipe  or  trunk  between 
the  lattice  and  the  hopper,  at  the  bottom  of  which  is  a  box 
containing  a  revolving  spider.  In  order  to  regulate  the 
supply  of  cotton  from  the  trunk  to  the  hopper,  the  swing  door 
in  the  bin  is 
connected  to  the 
strap  fork  which 
controls  the  driv- 
ing of  the  spider. 
If  desired,  the 
latticefeedingthe 
trunk  could  be 
dispensed  with, 
and  the  cotton 
put  into  the  trunk 
by   hand.      By   a 

modification    of  Fig  2. 

this  trunk  and  spider  arrangement  two  or  more  openers  could 
be  supplied  from  one  feeding  lattice.      (See  Fig.  2). 

Application  to  scutchers. — In  existing  installations 
where  the  openers  deliver  the  cotton  in  an  open  state,  and 
the  scutchers  are  fed  by  hand,  the  machine  is  placed  before 
the  scutcher  feed  table.  Should  the  opener  be  supplying 
two  scutchers,  a  reversible  lattice  is  arranged  to  receive  the 
•cotton  from  the  opener  and  carry  it  to  the  hoppers,  each  end 
of  the  lattice  being  over  a  hopper,  so  that  the 'cotton  can  be 
dropped  into  either  hopper,  the  operative  being  able  to 
reverse  the  lattice  at  will  by  a  handle  conveniently  placed, 
and  keep  both  hoppers  well  filled. 

Dimensions. — The  floor  space  occupied  by  the 
machine  varies  according  to  the  width  of  the  machine  being 
fed.  The  length  in  all  cases  being  7ft.  9in.  The  gearing 
occupies  1ft.  9in.  on  the  driving  side  and  llin.  on  the  off 
side,  total  2ft.  8in.,  and  to  this  dimension  must  be  added  the 
width  of  the  hopper,  which  is  usually  that  of  the  table  on 
which  the  machine  has  to  feed. 

Pulleys. — These  are  usually  16in.  X22in.,  but  can  go 
up  to  24in.  dia.     Speed. — 120  revs,  per  min. 

Strapping  and  ropes. — Main  driving 
wide,  length  according  to  the  method  of  drive.  From  driving 
shaft  to  spiked  lattice  15ft.  6in.  X  24in.  Rope  for  driving 
the  various  strippers,  beaters,  &c.,  35ft.  X  |in.  dia. 


strap    22in. 


19 


Power. — I.H.P.  for  machine  only,  and  I.H.P.  for  every 
100ft.  of  feeding  lattice  36in.  wide. 


Weignts  of 

Machines 


Gross 


Net 


36|in.  wide 

39in. 

45in. 


34^  cwts. 
36i      .. 
38J      ,, 


27^  cwts. 
29|     ,, 
3U     ,, 


Feeding  Lattices, 

3ft.  wide 

extra. 


Production.— From  30,000  to  60,000  lbs.  per  week 
according  to  the  width  of  feeding  lattice. 

Hand  of  Machine.— To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
machine  face  the  delivery  end,  and  note  if  the  driving  pulley 
must  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side. 


■(H'         'ijij  ORixljisiQ  puLLcrv 


Ife'^a  -  l20RevS. 


20 


AUTOMATIC    FEEDER   SPECIFICATION. 


Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  feeders. 

How  many  Machines  ? 

To  feed  Scutcher.  Opener,  or  Creeper  Feed  whose  make  ? 

Width  of  lattice  to  feed  on  to  ? 

Weight  of  Lap  per  yard  reqtiired  ? 

Time  required  to  make  one  Lap  ? 

Speed  of  main  or  Countershaft  per  minute  ? 

Diameter  of  Main  or  Countershaft  ? 

To  knock  off  from  Side  Shaft  or  Drop  Lever  ? 

Is  Drop  Lever  on  right  hand  or  left  hand  side  when 

facing  Lapping-up  end  ? 

What  class  of  Cotton  ?  Does  it  pass  through  a  Bale  Opener  ? 

Will  you  have  our  Automatic  filling  motion. 

Do  you  require  a  Feeding  Lattice  ? 

What  length  of  Lattice  Width  of  Lattice  ? 

Do  you  require  a  Feeding  Trunk  Supplied  with  a  Revolving 

Spider  ? 

Diameter  of  Driving  Pulleys  (usually  16in.  x22in.) 


[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us.1 


Observations  and  remarks  : 


21 


Porcupine  Opener  or 
Creeper  Feed   Table. 


The  porcupine  opener  prepares  the  cotton  for  the 
Crighton  "Opener  to  which  it  is  connected  by  a  mouthpiece 
either  direct  or  through  piping.  The  machine  is  usually 
placed  in  the  mixing  room  m  combination  with  a  hopper 
feeder,  but  it  may  be  attached  directly  to  the  Crighton 
Opener,  and  the  porcupine  driven  directly  from  the  vertical 
beater.  If  placed  in  the  mixing  room  it  may  be  driven 
either  directly  from  the  vertical  beater  by  rope,  or  from  a 
separate  countershaft.  When  used  in  connection  with  the 
combined  opener  and  scutcher  the  feed  is  stopped  auto- 
matically when  the  lap  is  completed,  or  a  little  before. 

The  machine  consists  of  a  feed  lattice  usually  36in. 
wide,  the  length  depends  largely  on  circumstances.  Two 
pains  of  feed  pollers,  one  pair  22in.  diameter  to  collect 
the  cotton  from  the  lattice,  and  one  pair  2in.  diameter  for 
the  beater  to  strike  from.  A  porcupine  beater,  grid  bars, 
with  special  setting  arrangement,  and  cone  feed  is  also 
applied  if  desired. 

The  porcupine  beater  or  cylinder  is  nlin.  diameter, 
and  built  up  of  a  number  of  discs,  each  carrying  six  steel 
teeth  riveted  on.  The  discs  are  threaded  on  the  shaft  in 
such  a  way  that  the  teeth  fall  in  helical  lines  round  the 
cylinder  formed  by  the  discs,  thus  increasing  the  steadiness 
in  running  and  entirely  doing  away  with  the  noise  and 
diminishing  the  power  required  to  drive  it.  The  complete 
porcupine  is  then  balanced  when  running  at  the  required 
speed,  and  revolves  in  long,  carefully-made  bearings,  of  the 
Mohler  self-lubricating  type. 

The  beater  bars  are  carried  on  circular  ribs  fixed  to 
the  inside  of  the  framing,  and  having  the  same  centre  as  the 
beater.  By  this  arrangement  the  distance  between  each, 
can  be  regulated  at  will  with  the  greatest  facility  to  suit  any 
particular  class  of  cotton  that  may  have  to  be  worked. 

The  greater  impurities  are  thrown  out  through  the  grid 
below  the  porcupine,  and  the  cleaned  and  opened  cotton  is 
ejected  into  the  outlet  pipe. 

22 


PORCUPINE    OPENER     WITH     IMPROVED     LINK     PEDAL 
MOTION     AND     REGULATOR     ATTACHED. 

23 


Cone  feed  combined  with  our  improved  link  pedal 
motion  can  be  supplied  to  this  machine  if  required. 

Safety  motions  applied  to  the  beater  cover  to  prevent 
same  being  opened  when  the  machine  is  in  motion. 

The  lattice  feed  table  may  be  made  any  required 
length.     When  over  3ft.  6in.  long,  charged  extra. 

Dimensions. — The   machine  is  made  in  three  sizes, 

namely,  with  lattice  24in.,  30in.  and  36in.  wide  and  3ft.  long, 

unless  otherwise  ordered. 

24in.  lattice  3ft.  long  =  7ft.  long  X  4ft.  Sin.  wide.)    .,..,,       , 
on-  ^r^  %-  ciV    o-  Without 

30m.       „  „        -7ft.     „     X5tt.  2m.      „     rp.^^i.^oj. 

36in.       „  „        =7ft.     „     X  5ft.  8m.      „     1  Regulator. 

For  machines  with  regulators,  11  ins.  must  be  added  to 
the  width,  and   ISins.  to  the  lengths  given  above. 

Pulley,  speed  and  power. — If  driven  from  line  or 
countershaft,  the  pulley  on  beater  is  lOin.  dia.  X  3in.  wide, 
at  850  to  950  revs.     The  power  is  1'5  l.H.P. 

Strapping,  &c. — If  the  machine  is  driven  by  a  rope 
from  the  opener,  a  20in.  pulley  for  fin.  rope  is  used  and  is 
15ft.  long.  Driving  belt  3in.  wide,  length  according  to 
position  of  main  shaft.  Beater  to  cross  shaft,  8ft.  X  2in-.  wide. 
Cone  belt,  8ft.  X  Uin.  wide. 


24 


Vertical  or  Crighton 
Openers. 


Our  Crighton  or  vertical  opener  has  long  been 
established  as  an  exceedingly  valuable  machine  for  the 
effective  cleaning  of  most  classes  of  cotton  without  damage 
to  the  staple  or  undue  loss  of  serviceable  fibre. 

The  single  opener  is  generally  combined  with  a 
hopper  feeder  placed  before  it  and  the  cotton  is  delivered 
from  the  opener  in  an  open  fleecy  state,  by  a  lattice  into 
suitable  receptacles,  or  to  another  hopper  feeder  coupled  up 
with  a  breaker  scutcher.  In  some  cases  it  is  combined 
with  the  bale  opener  for  treating  lower  grades  of  cotton 
before  it  reaches  the  mixings. 

The  double  opener  is  made  with  two  vertical  beaters 
as  shown  in  the  illustration.  A  trap  door  inside  the  machine 
is  controlled  by  an  external  lever  to  permit  of  the  cotton 
being  passed  through  one  or  both  vertical  beaters  as  required. 
(See  page  31). 

The  vertical  beater  is  built  up  on  a  strong  shaft, 
and  the  upper  bearing  is  1ft.  Ikm.  long,  so  as  to  ensure  great 
steadiness  in  running.  The  beater  is  composed  of  seven 
discs  of  varying  diameter,  each  carrying  steel  arms,  riveted 
on,  and  the  whole,  as  seen  in  the  section  of  the  double 
machine,  presenting  the  aspect  of  an  inverted  cone.  They 
are  carefully  balanced  when  running  at  their  normal  speed. 

The  footsteps. — These  are  made  with  special  care. 
The  lower  end  of  the  shaft-  contains  a  hardened  steel  peg, 
running  on  a  hardened  steel  washer,  at  the  bottom  of  the 
footstep.  The  footstep  itself  is  surrounded  with  a  reservoir 
filled  with  water,  in  which  runs  the  lower  edge  of  an 
inverted  dish,  carried  on  the  shaft,  thus  absolutely  protecting 
the  footstep  against  the  entrance  of  dirt  or  grit,  and  keeping 
it  cool.  The  water  and  oil  are  supplied  to  the  footstep 
through  pipes  having  their  orifices  outside  the  machine,  so 
that  the  height  of  both  the  oil  and  the  water  may  been  seen 
and  maintained  at  the  correct  level. 

The  grids  do  not  lend  themselves  to  a  written  des- 
cription, but  the  construction  may  be  clearly  seen  from  the 

25 


26 


illustration  given.  They  have  been  remarkably  successful, 
and  throw  out  the  maximum  amount  of  dirt  with  the  least 
possible  loss  of  serviceable  fibre  or  damage  to  the  cotton. 
The  distance  of  the  grids  from  the  vertical  may  be  regulated 
within  certain  limits  by  set  screws.  The  openings  at  the 
bottom  of  the  grid  are  larger  than  those  at  the  top,  to  allow 
of  the  seed  and  heavier  dirt  getting  aw^ay  more  easily  ;  and 
as  the   cotton  rises  the  holes  are   reduced   in   size,  to  avoid 


OPENER    GRID. 

27 


undue  loss  of  good  fibre.  The  holes  are  countersunk  from 
the  outside  of  the  grid,  so  that  the  dirt,  having  once  passed 
the  hole,  falls  easily  away  and  cannot  be  drawn  in  again. 
We  can  apply  these  grids  to  existing  machines  on  receipt 
of  accurate  dimensions. 

Delivery.- — The  cotton  passes  from  the  beater  to  the 
perforated  cage,  and  is  taken  from  this  by  a  stripping 
roller,  no  troublesome  damper  being  used,  and  is  delivered 
open  and  fieecy,  either  into  baskets  or  on  to  a  travelling 
lattice,  for  distribution  to  the  mixings  or  to  hoppers  placed 
before  the  succeeding  scutchers. 

Driving. — The  machine  is  usually  built  with  the 
countershaft  on  the  machine  to  drive  the  vertical  beaters 
and  the  fans,  but  these  may  both  be  driven  from  a  separate 
countershaft.  In  this  case  the  underside  of  the  pulley  on 
the  counter  driving  the  beaters  should  be  half  an  inch  higher 
than  the  pulley  on  the  beater  for  every  foot  of  distance. 

We  also  make,  if  desired,  a  special  arrangement  of 
rope  driving  for  the  beaters  with  tightening  arrangement, 
the  object  being  to  do  away  with  the  side  pull  by  passing 
the  rope  twice  round  the  beater  pulley,  so  that  it  pulls  in 
both  directions,  and  the  rope  is  fin.  dia.     (See  page  31). 

Gearing. — All  wheels  are  efficiently  guarded,  so  as  to 
comply  with  the  requirements  of  the  Factory  Inspectors. 
All  pulleys  are  accurately  balanced. 

Dust  trunks  are  sometimes  placed  between  the  Porcu- 
pine Opener  Feed  Table  and  the  Crighton  when  dirty  cotton 
is  being  worked.  These  trunks  are  built  up  of  a  number  of 
grids,  which  allows  the  dirt.  Sec,  to  fall  away  as  the  cotton 
passes  in  its  loosened  state  over  them  on  its  way  to  the 
Crighton  Opener.  Special  attention  has  been  paid  to  the 
formation  of  the  grids  to  get  the  best  results,  and  means  are 
taken  for  the  easy  cleaning  of  same,  and  to  allow  of  great 
space  for  the  collection  of  dirt. 

The   trunks    are    connected    to    the    two    machines    by 
galvanised  pipes. 

Speed  and  Pulleys. — When  the  countershaft  is  de- 
livered with  the  machine  it  carries  a  fast  and  loose  pulley, 
16in.  X  5in.,  which  should  run  at  670  revolutions.  The  other 
pulleys  are  then  supplied  by  us  to  drive  the  fans  at  950  for 
the  single  machine  and  1,200  for  the  double  machine,  and 
the  beaters  at  1,000.  If  the  counter  be  not  delivered  with 
the    machine,    the    pulleys    are : — Vertical    beater    pulley, 

28 


29 


12in.  X5in.,  or  15in.  dia.  for  fin.  rope;  Fan  shaft  pulley, 
10in.X3in.;  and  they  should  run  at  the  above  respective 
speeds,  and  if  driven  by  strap  care  should  be  taken  that  the 
countershaft  is  placed  in  such  a  position  to  come  in  line 
with  the  pulley  on  vertical  beater  shaft,  which  is  7ft.  Soin. 
from  the  floor  to  the  centre  of  the  pulley. 

Strapping  and  popes. — With  countershaft  on  the 
machine : — From  line  shaft  to  counter  42in.  wide,  length 
according  to  distance  of  line  shaft.  From  counter  to  the 
vertical,  16ft.  6in.  X  4in.  wide.  From  counter  to  the  fan, 
22ft.  X  2iin.  wide. 

If  the  counter  be  not  on  the  machine  the  length  of  these 
straps  will  be  according  to  the  distance  of  the  countershaft, 
but  in  all  cases  the  following  are  required  : — Fan  shaft  to 
the  cage  driving  pulley,  5ft.  6in.  X  2in,  From  beater  to 
beater  in  the  double  machine,  16ft.  X  4in. 

Rope  for  driving  the  porcupine,  is  fin.  dia.,  and  15ft. 
long,  if  the  porcupine  is  attached  to  the  opener  direct; 
otherwise,  length  according  to  distance  which  also  applies 
for  the  balanced  rope  drive. 

Power  required. — Single  Crighton  Opener,  4  i.H  p. 
Double  Crighton  Opener,  8  i.H.P. 

Production.— 35,0001bs.  to  45,0001bs.  in  56  hours. 

Tlie  floor  space. 

Single  opener,  10ft.  4m.  X  5ft.  4in. 
Double      „       16ft.  2in.x  5ft.  4in. 

We  also  make  a  small-size 

Opener,   the   floor   space  of 

which     is     9ft.     10in.X4ft.,  .--.-.  -r 

lOin.   for  a  single   machme.      SINGLE  VERTICAL   OPENER. 

WEIGHTS    OF    OPENERS. 


Description  of  Machine 

Gross  Weight 

Nett  Weight 

Cubic 
Feet 

Single  Crighton   Opener, 
with  countershaft 

Double  Crighton  Opener, 
■with  countershaft  

Tons     Cwts.     Qrs. 
3          16         0 

5          10         0 

Tons     Cwts.     Qrs.  ; 

3  2         0        300 

4  10         0        440 

30 


31 


CRIGHTON    OPENER    SPECIFICATION. 


Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  Openers. 

How  many  machines  ? 

How  fed,  by  hand  ?  Creeper  Feeder  or  Automatic  Feeder. 

If  extra  length  of  Lattice  required  ?  (usually  4  feet). 

Patent  Grids  or  Dust  Boxes  ?  How  many  ? 

Galvanized  Iron  Trunks  or  Exhaust  Pipes  ?  What  length  ? 

When   facing   the   Delivery  is  the   Feed   to  be  opposite,   as  usual,   or 
on  the  right  or  left  hand  ? 

Speed  of  Vertical  Beater?  revolutions  per  minute  (usually  1,000 

revolutions  per  minute). 

Diameter  of  Vertical  Beater  Pulley  ?  (usually  12in.) 

Will  you  have  a  Countershaft  on  top  of  Machine  ? 

Is  the  Opener  to  be  a  Single  or  Double  Machine  ? 

Speed  of  Main  Shaft  ? 

Diameter  of  Drum  on  same  ? 

All  Hangers,  Beams,  Pulleys,  &c.,  for  driving  Creeper  Feed  in  room 
adjoining,  extra  over  price  of  Machine. 

When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 

[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us.] 

Shipping  instructions  ; 
Terms  of  payment : 
Observations  and  remarks  : 


32 


Combined  Opener  and 
Scutcher. 


We  make  the  above  machines  either  with  a  single  or 
double  Crighton  opener,  combined  with  a  single  or 
double  scutcher  with  lapping-up  end. 

The  cotton  is  drawn  through  the  opener  by  a  powerful 
fan,  and  after  passing  between  the  cages  is  dehvered  to  feed 
rollers,  which  present  it  to  the  beater,  and  it  is  afterwards 
made  into  a  lap. 

The  beater  is  usually  made  with  two  blades,  but 
three  can  be  put  in  if  specially  asked  for.  It  is  reversible, 
and  runs  in  long  Mohler  bearings  with  special  continuous 
oiling  arrangement. 

The  beater  bars  are  carried  on  circular  ribs  fixed  to 
the  inside  of  the  framing,  and  having  the  same  centre  as  the 
beater.  By  this  arrangement  the  distance  betw^een  each, 
can  be  regulated  at  will  with  the  greatest  facility  to  suit  any 
particular  class  of  cotton  that  may  have  to  be  worked. 

The  cages  are  of  good  size  and  carefully  placed,  so  as 
to  permit  as  much  dirt  as  possible  to  fall  out  of  the  cotton 
in  its  passage  from  the  beater  to  the  cage. 

The  press  rollers  are  four  in  number,  so  as  to  con- 
solidate the  laps  as  much  as  possible,  and  prevent  them 
licking  when  unrolling  on  the  following  machine. 

A  cradle,  conveniently  placed,  is  provided  for  the 
reception  of  the  finished  laps,  and  hollow  lap  rollers  are 
supplied  with  the  machines. 

The  stop  motion  to  regulate  the  length  of  the  lap  is 
extremely  simple,  the  length  can  easily  be  altered  by 
changing  a  single  wheel. 

The  fans  are  of  careful  construction  and  efficient 
power,  and  the  shafts  run  in  Mohler  bearings  with  con- 
tinuous oiling  arrangements. 

Safety  appliances  are  provided  if  specially  asked  for, 
to  prevent  the  covers  being  raised  whilst  the  beater  is  running. 

A  countershaft  is  built  on  the  machine  if  asked  for, 
having  fast  and  loose  pulleys  of  16in.  dia.,  w^hich  should  run 
at  500  revolutions  per  minute. 

33 


34 


We  invariably  recommend  this  machine  with  counter- 
shaft on  the  machine,  as  shown  in  our  illustration,  but  if 
not,  care  should  be  taken  that  the  underside  of  the  driving 
pulley  on  the  countershaft  is  half  an  inch  higher  than  the 
pulley  on  the  upright  beater  for  every  foot  of  distance. 

Gearing. — The  driving  and  gearing  are  shown  in  the 
accompanying  diagrams.  All  wheels  are  efficiently  guarded 
and  all  the  pulleys  are  accurately  balanced. 

Strapping  and  ropes.— Line  shaft  to  counter,  5in. 
wide,  length  according  to  distance  of  the  line  shaft. 
Countershaft  to  vertical  beater,  length  32ft.  6in.X4in.  wide. 
Countershaft  to  horizontal  beater,  length  1 6ft.  6in.  X  4in.  wnde. 
Horizontal  beater  to  opener  fan,  length  12ft.  9in.  X  3in.  wide. 
Horizontal  beater  to  scutcher  fan,  length  8ft. 9in.  X  2iin.wide. 
Beater  to  lapping-up  pulley,  16ft.  X24in.  wide. 

Rope  from  the  vertical  beater  shaft  to  the  porcupine 
pulley,  length  20ft.  6in.  for  fin.  rope. 

(if  the  porcupine  is  not  attached  to  the  opener  directly, 
length  of  rope  according  to  distance,  and  fin.  rope  required 
to  drive  the  feed  rollers  of  the  porcupine  from  the  side  shaft 
of  the  scutcher). 

Power  required  for  the  single  combination  without  the 
porcupine,  9  I.H.P. 

Production.— 25, OOOlbs.  to  32,0001bs.  m  60  hours. 

Floor  space. — Combined  Single  Crighton  Opener  and 
single  scutcher,  length  20ft  Sin.  X  6ft.  lOin.  for  38in.  lap,  and 
7ft.  5in.  for  45in.  lap.  If  with  double  Crighton  Opener  the 
length  will  be  6ft.  2in.  extra. 


COMBINED    SINGLE    OPENER    AND    SCUTCHER 
WITH    AUTOMATIC    AND    CREEPER    FEED. 

Speeds. — Vertical  beater,  1,000  revolutions.  Two- 
bladed  horizontal  or  scutcher  beater,  1,500  revolutions  for 
38in.  and  41in.  laps.  Three-bladed  beater,  1,000  revolutions 
for  45in.  lap. 

35 


Pulleys. — Scutcher  beater  pulley,  lOin.  dia.  X  4in.  wide. 
Vertical  beater  pulley,  12in.  dia.  X  6in.  wide  or  if  rope  driven, 
usually  15in.  dia.  for  fin.  dia.  rope. 

Weights.— A  combined  single  opener  and  single 
scutcher  for  38in.  lap,  and  with  self-contained  countershaft, 
weighs  8  tons  6  cwt.  gross,  and  6  tons  16  cwt.  net. 


COMBINED   CRIGHTON    OPENER  AND    SCUTCHING 
MACHINE   SPECIFICATION. 

Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  Combined  Opener  and  Scutcher. 
How  many  Machines  ? 

What  width  of  lap  are  they  to  make  ?  inches. 

How  fed — by  hand  ?  or  with  Creeper  Feed  Table  36in.  wide, 

and  Porcupine  Beater  ?  at  per  Feeder. 

If  extra  length  required  ?  at  per  foot. 

Is  Creeper  Feed  Table  attached  to  Machine  or  in  an  adjoining  room  ? 
Patent  Grids  or  Dust  Boxes  ?  at  per  box.  How 

many  ? 
Galvanized  iron  Trunks  or  Exhaust  Pipes  ?  at  per  foot, 

What  length  ? 
When  facing  the  Delivery  is  the  Feed  to  be  opposite,  as  usual,  or  on 

the  right  or  left  hand  ? 
Speed  of  Vertical  Beater  ?  revolutions  per  minute  (usually  1,000 

revolutions  per  minute). 
Diameter  of  Vertical  Beater  Pulleys  12  inches. 
Will  you  have  a  Countershaft  on  Top  of  Machine  ?  at  per 

Machine. 
Is  the  Opener  to  be  with  a  Single  or  Double  Vertical  Beater  ? 
How  many  Scutcher  Beaters  in  each  Machine  ? 
Speed  of  Scutcher  Beaters  in  each  Machine  ?  revolutions  per 

minute   (usually   with  two  blades  about  1,500  revolutions  per 

minute). 
Diameter  of  Scutcher  Beater  Pulleys?  inches  (usually  lOin. 

diameter) . 
When  you  face  the  Delivery  end  of  the  Machine,   must  the  Scutcher 

Beater  Pulleys  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side  of  it  ? 
Will  you  have  an  up  or  down  draft  ? 
Speed  of  INIain  Shaft  ? 
Diameter  of  Drum  on  same  ? 
All  Hangers,  Beams,  Pulleys,  &c.,  for  driving  Creeper  Feed  in  room 

adjoining,  extra  over  price  of  Machine. 
When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 

[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us.] 

Shipping  instructions  : 
Terms  of  payment : 
Observations  and  remarks : 

36 


Exhaust  Openers  Combined 
with  Scutcher. 


These  machines  are  employed  when  a  cleaned  grade  of 
cotton  is  being  worked ;  yet  they  are  sometimes  used  in 
conjunction  with  Single  Crighton  Openers  when  dirty  Indian 
cotton  is  being  treated.  They  are  fed  through  pipes  con- 
nected up  to  a  Creeper  Feed  Table,  supplied  with  a  Cone 
feed  pedal  motion  to  ensure  a  regular  supply  of  cotton.  In 
treating  the  dirty  cottons  the  feed  pipes  are  coupled  up  to 
one  or  two  Crighton  Openers,  and  the  pipes  are  then 
supplied  with  dampers  or  valves  so  that  the  cotton  may  pass 
through  or  miss  these  latter  machines  as  required  in  its 
passage  to  the  Exhaust  Opener.  Between  the  Creeper 
Feed  and  the  Exhaust  Opener  dust  trunks  are  supplied 
if  desired. 

The  exhaust  consists  of  two  fans,  30in  diameter,  and 
a  24in.  diameter  cylinder  placed  on  one  shaft.  The  fans 
pla:ced  on  each  side  of  the  cylinder  draw  the  cotton  through 
the  pipes  and  present  it  to  the  cylinder,  which  is  composed 
of  discs  carrying  strikers  of  hardened  steel.  Grid  bars  are 
provided  under  the  cylinder  through  which  the  impurities 
fall  into  a  box  below  provided  for  their  reception,  which 
can  be  easily  removed  and  emptied  at  any  time.  From  the 
cylinder  the  cotton  is  drawn  by  an  underneath  fan  to  a  pair 
of  dust  cages  supplied  with  the  usual  pair  of  stripping 
rollers,  and  is  in  turn  presented  to  the  two  or  three-bladed 
beater  through  two  pairs  of  feed  rollers.  The  beater  is 
18in.  diameter  and  reversible,  and  runs  in  long  Mohler  self- 
oiling  bearings.  The  beater  bars  are  so  arranged  that 
they  can  be  regulated  at  will  to  suit  any  class  of  cotton. 
Dust  cages  with  stripping  rollers  instead  of  the  trouble- 
some dampers.  Fans  extra  large  in  order  to  prevent 
choking  of  the  cotton  between  the  cylinder  or  'beater  and 
the  cages,  the  fan  shaft  runs  in  self-lubricating  Mohler 
bearings. 

Four  heavy  press  rollers  with  clearers  to  prevent 
licking,  and  the  lapping-up  apparatus  has  the  lap  roller 
bored  out  to  take  headed  lap  rods. 

38 


The  measuring  and  stop  motion  to  regulate  the 
length  of  the  lap  is  extremely  simple,  yet  effective,  and  any 
length  of  lap  can  be  altered  by  changing  one  wheel. 

Safety  locking  motion  for  automatically  locking 
beater  cover  and  glass  door  over  cages  when  the  machine  is 
running,  and  all  gearing  is  efficiently  guarded. 

Pulleys  and  speeds. —  Exhaust  cylinder  pulley  12in. 
to  15in.  dia.  X  4in.  wide,  at  950  to  980  revs.  Scutcher 
beater  pulleys  8in.  to  llin.  dia  (usually  lOin.)  Speed  for 
two-bladed  beater  1,500  revs.,  and  for  three-bladed  beater 
1,000  revs.,  usual  for  45in.  wnde  machines. 

Power — Opener  and  single  scutcher  8  to  9  I.H.P. 

Strapping. — Line  shaft  to  countershaft,  5in.  wide  belt, 
length  according  to  position  of  line  shaft.  Countershaft  to 
exhaust  and  horizontal  beaters,  4in.  wide,  length  according 
to  distance.  With  self-contained  countershaft,  the  lengths 
are  31ft.  for  the  exhaust  beater  and  16ft.  6in.  for  horizontal 
beater.  Exhaust  beater  to  fan,  9ft.  Gin.  X  22in.  wide. 
Horizontal  beater  to  fan,  8ft.  9in.  X  2Tin.  wide.  Beater  to 
lapping-up  pulley,  16ft.  X24in.  wide. 

Floor  space. — For  opener  and  single  scutcher  com- 
bined, 17ft.  lOin.  long;  width  for  38in.  lap,  6ft.  lOin.and  for 
45in.  lap,  7ft.  5in.  wide. 


<   - 


I 


lOIio- 


lAi'^-'^ 


1 


jL-jfJL. 

AT^Q.' 


I;^=^E?iPt 


PLAN  or  CXHAUST  OPLtSLP  J(  SCUTCHffi 

Weights. — Exhaust  opener  and  Scutcher,  41in.  wide, 
tons,  5  cwt.,  1  qr.,  gross.     5  tons,  12  cwt.,  14  lb.,  net. 


40 


41 


EXHAUST    OPENER    and    LAP    MACHINE 
SPECIFICATION. 


Details  required  when  ordering  Exhaust  Openers. 

How  many  Machines?  ' 

Width  of  lap  to  be  made?  inches. 

Class  of  Cotton  to  be  worked  ? 

How  fed — by  Creeper  Feed  Table  ?  and  Hopper  Feeder  ? 

l€  a  Crighton  Opener  employed  between  Creeper  Feed  and  Exhaust  ? 

Do  you  require  Dust  Boxes  ?  how-  many  ?  at         per  box. 

Shall  we  supply  Exhaust  Trunks  or  Pipes?  at  per  foot. 

Speed  of  Cylinder  ?  revolutions  per  minute. 

Diameter  of  Pulley  on  Cylinder?  (usually  13in.) 

Speed  of  Scutcher  Beater    2  blades  ?  '       revolutions  (usually 

1,500  revolutions). 

Speed  of  Scutcher  Beater,  3  blades  ?  revolutions  (usually 

1,000  revolutions). 

Diameter  of  Scutcher  Beater  Pulley  ?  inches         (usually  lOin. 

diameter). 

Will  you  have  a  Countershaft  on  Machine  i*  at  per 

Machine. 

Speed  of  Main  Shaft  ? 

Diameter  of  Drum  on  same  1' 

All  Hangers,  T3eams,  Pulleys,  Sec,  for  driving  Creeper  Feed  in  room 
adjoining,  extra  over  price  of  Machine. 

When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 

[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us] 

Shipping  instructions  : 
Terms  of  payment : 
Observations  and  remarks  : 

42 


1x1     o 


o  ^ 


a:    CO 
< 

00 


Large  Cylinder  Openers. 


These  machines  for  many  years  have  been  recognised 
as  the  correct  pattern  for  good  American,  Egyptian  and  Sea 
Islands  cotton. 

They  are  made  with  feeding  lattice,  one  cylinder, 
one  set  of  cages,  and  lapping-up  apparatus.  This  is  the 
most  common  machine  for  very  fine  work. 

For  American  and  Egyptian  Cottons  they  are  made 
with  feeding  lattice,  one  cylinder,  one  beater,  two 
sets  of  cages,  and  lapping-up  apparatus. 

The  cylinder,  41in.  dia.,  is  built  up  of  wrought-iron 
discs  to  which  are  fastened  specially-formed  teeth  or  strikers, 
mounted  on  a  steel  shaft  and  carefully  balanced  at  working 
S'peed.  The  blades  or  strikers  of  the  cylinder,  strike  the 
cotton  upwards  against  the  rounded  surface  of  the  roller 
and  not  against  the  pedal  nose.  This  is  done  to  secure  the 
gentle  treatment  of  the  staple  and  to  increase  the  working 
surface,  so  that  about  three-quarters  of  the  circumference 
of  the  large  cylinder  is  utilised  as  an  effective  opening  and 
cleaning  surface,  with  dust  chambers,  suitable  dampers,  &c. 

The  cover  plates  are  made  of  cast-iron,  and  on  the 
underside  are  projections  or  teeth,  their  object  being  to  arrest 
the  progress  of  the  cotton  so  as  to  assist  the  cylinder  in  the 
opening  of  the  cotton  previous  to  shaking  out  the  impurities. 

Cone  feeds  and  pedal  motions  are  usually  supplied 
with  these  machines,  m  connection  with  our  improved  regu- 
lator. The  cone  box  is  vertical,  and  contains  a  pair  of 
cones  of  a  large  diameter,  driven  by  a  long  endless  rope 
with  a  good  tightening  arrangement,  which  gives  a  steady 
and  noiseless  drive.  The  levers  carrying  the  cone  strap- 
fork  have  been  lengthened,  and  the  fulcrums  placed  at  the 
extremities  of  the  box  behind  the  cones.  By  this  means 
the  strap-fork  at  any  point  of  its  movement  is  kept  close  to 
the  cone,  the  strap  is  acted  on  much  more  quickly,  and  the 
•  action  is  much  more  sensitive  than  in  the  old  arrangement 
where  the  levers  were  short  and  the  strap-forks  were 
necessarily  carried  some  distance  from  the  cones. 

Improved  link  regulator. — In  this  arrangement  we 
employ   the   usual   pedal   levers,  to   one   end   of   these   are 

44 


45 


attached  Jinks ;  two  of  these  links  are  coupled  together  by 
a  lever  thus  forming  a  series  of  eight  levers.  The  eight 
levers  are  again  coupled  together  b}'  link  and  lever  and  re- 
duced to  four  levers,  which  are  in  turn  reduced  in  a  like 
manner  to  two.  These  two  levers  are  coupled  up  to  a  larger 
lever  pivoted  m  the  centre;  this  latter  lever  is  connected  to 
a  long  lever  supported  from  the  frame  side  and  the  floor,  it 
is  provided  with  an  adjustable  centre,  and  one  end  is  coupled 
up  to  the  cone  box,  and  the  other  end  carries  a  weight  for 
balancing.  The  link  connecting  these  two  levers  is  made 
adjustable  for  regulating  the  distance  between  them.  The 
whole  arrangement  is  very  simple  and  effective,  with 
practically  no  friction,  and  it  can  be  easily  kept  clean  and 
regulated. 

Formerly  a  slight  variation  in  the  thickness  of  the  lap 
did  not  affect  the  cone  strap,  owing  to  play  or  flexion  in  the 
intermediate  levers,  but  by  the  above  arrangement  this 
defect  is  avoided.  All  friction  is  reduced,  and  the  device  has 
proved  to  be  extremely  sensitive  to  any  variation  of  the  lap. 
The  beater,  ly^in.  dia.,  is  usually  made  with  two 
blades,  but  three  can  be  put  m  if  specially  asked  for.  It  is 
reversible,  and  runs  in  long  Mohler  bearings  with  special 
continuous  oiling  arrangement. 

The  beatep  bars  are  carried  on  circular  ribs  fixed 
to  the  inside  of  the  framing,  and  having  the  same  centre  as 
the  beater.  By  this  arrangement,  the  distance  between  each 
can  be  regulated  at  will  with  the  greatest  facility  to  suit  any 
particular  class  of  cotton  that  may  have  to  be  worked. 

Dust  cages  are  of  good  size,  and  supplied  with 
stripping  rollers,  instead  of  the  troublesome  dampers  which 
are  usually  placed  inside  the  cages. 

The  fan  is  of  careful  construction  and  efficient  power, 
being  made  extra  large  in  order  to  prevent  choking  betw^een 
the  cylinder  and  first  pair  of  cages.  The  shaft  runs  in 
Mohler  bearings  w^ith  continuous  oiling  arrangement. 

Foup  heavy  press  polleps  with  clearerstoprevent  lick- 
ing, and  the  lapping-up  appapatus  has  the  lap  roller  bored 
out  to  take  headed  lap  rods,  with  lap  tray  to  take  full  laps. 
Adjustable  measuring  and  stop  motion. — To 
regulate  the  length  of  the  lap  is  extremely  simple,  and  the 
length  of  lap  can  be  altered  by  changing  one  wheel. 

A  countershaft  is  built  on  the  machine  if  specially 
asked  for,  having  fast  and  loose  pulleys  of  18in.  to  20in.  dia. 

46 


I, uS>^J^  -  -i:^^ yi^ 

J           ,.e-9   =    QC  WOJ 
>"1 ]|         HiQIM 

QN3  dVl 


-.->,• 


"g-.9  « .ec  Hod 

aN3  dvn 


47 


Safety  appliances  are  provided  if  specially  asked 
for,  to  prevent  the  covers  being  raised  whilst  the  beater  is 
running.  Guards. — All  gearing  is  efficiently  guarded  to 
meet  all  the  requirements  of  the  Factory  Act. 

The  openep  is  generally  fed  by  a  hopper  feeder  of 
our  new  type  which  may  be  driven  from  a  separate  line- 
shaft  and  is  quite  independent  of  the  regulator  on  the 
opener.  The  regulator  does  not  require  to  control  the 
hopper  feeder  as  in  the  case  of  other  types  of  this  machine. 
Our  combination  is  therefore  extremely  sensitive  and 
answers  readily  and  instantaneously  to  the  slightest  irregu- 
Jlarities  in  the  feed  so  that  we  obtain  laps  of  great  regu- 
larity in  weight  throughout. 

Speeds,  &c. — Speed  of  cylmder,  450  to  500  revolutions 
for  American  cotton,  350  to  450  revolutions  for  Egyptian, 
and  300  to  350  revolutions  for  Sea  Islands.  The  pulley  on 
the  cylinder  shaft  is  18in.  to  20in.  dia.  and  5in.  wide.  Speed 
of  beater,  1,500  revolutions  for  American  cotton,  1,000 
revolutions  for  Egyptian,  and  850  revolutions  for  Sea  Islands. 
The  pulley  on  the  beater  shaft  is  lOin.  dia.  X  4in.  wide. 

Pulleys. — On  cylinder  ISin.  to  20in.  dia.  for  5in.  belt, 
and  on  beater  lOin.  dia.  for  4in.  belt. 

Straps.— Cylinder  to  cross  shaft,  7ft.  3in.  X  2iin. 
Cross  shaft  to  lap  drum  pulley,  15ft.  3in.  X  24in.      Beater  to 
opener  fan,   13ft.  6in.  X  24in.     Beater  to  scutcher  fan,  7ft. 
9in.X2iin.      For  cones,  8ft.  4in.  X  l^in.      Rope  for  driving 
the  regulator  is  45ft.  long  and  fin.  dia. 

Power. — Single  opener  with  lapping-up  apparatus, 
5  I.H.P.;  combined  single  opener  and  scutcher  with 
lapping-up  apparatus,  9  I.H.P. 

Production. — 1,800  to  4,5001bs.  per  10  hours,  accord- 
ing to  the  weight  of  lap  per  yard  being  produced. 

Floor  space. — Single  opener  with  lapping-up  end, 
18ft.  7in.  X  6ft.  lOin.  for  38in.  lap,  and  7ft.  5in.  for  45in.  lap. 
Single  opener  and  scutcher  combined,  24ft.  lOin.  X  6ft.  lOin. 
for  38in.  lap,  and  7ft.  5in.  for  45in.  lap. 

If  the  machine  is  fed  by  an  automatic  feeder  the  above 
lengths  can  be  reduced  by  31in.,  as  shown  on  the  plans. 

Weights. — A  large  cylinder  opener  and  scutcher, 
with  regulator  for  38in.  laps,  weighs  174  cwt.  gross  and 
142  cwt.  net. 


48 


LARGE    CYLINDER    OPENER. 


How  many  Machines  ? 

What  width  of  lap  are  they  to  make  ? 

How  many  Cyhnders  per  ^vlachine  ? 

How  many  18in.  Beaters  per  Machine  i^ 

How  fed — by  hand  or  Automatic  Feeder? 

Speed  of  Large  Cylinder  ?'  revolutions  per  minute. 

Speed  of  ISin.  Beater?  revolutions  per  minute. 

Size  of  Driving  Pulleys!'  (usually  18in.  to  20in.  diameter). 

Speed  of  Line  Shaft  ?  revolutions  per  minute. 


Drum  on  Line  Shaft 


When  facing  the  Delivery  must  the  Driving  Pulley  be  on  the  right  or 
left  hand  ^ 

Will  you  have  an  up  or  down  draft  ? 

Will  you  have  Lord's  Cone  Feed  Motion  attached  ?  at 

per  Machine. 

Will  you  have  Lord's  Cone  Feed  with  Piano  attached  ?  at 

per  Machine. 

Or  our  Improved  Link  Regulator  '^  at  per  Machine. 

When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 

[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us.] 

Remarks  : 


49 


30 


Improved  Scutcher. 


We  have  completely  remodelled  this  machine,  so  as  to 
-combine  the  best  features  of  both  the  Hetherington  and 
Curtis  machines,  and  we  do  not  hesitate  to  say  thai  the  result 
has  been  an  unqualified  success..  The  machine,  whilst  not 
detrimentally  affecting  the  strength  or  elasticity  of  the  fibre, 
possesses  a  very  high  cleaning  power,  the  laps  have  perfect 
selvedges  and  are  extremely  regular,  both  as  regards  the 
total  weight  and  the  weight  from  yard  to  yard.  Our  illus- 
trations give  a  general  view  of  the  single  beater  machine. 
The  machine  may,  however,  be  made  with  two  beaters 
if  desired. 

The  feeding  lattices  for  machines  fed  by  Automatic 
Feeders  are  about  3ft.  long,  but  in  the  case  of  finishing 
scutchers  they  are  made  to  take  four  laps  up.  The  cotton 
is  delivered  to  the  beater,  when  short  cottons  are  being 
worked  through  a  single  roller  and  pedal  arrangement,  which 
allows  of  a  close  setting.  For  the  longer  grade  cottons  an 
extra  pair  of  feed  rollers  are  employed,  the  cotton  in  this 
case  is  struck  round  the  bottom  feed  roller,  thus  minimising 
any  possible  damage  to  the  fibre. 

Cone  feed  pedal  motions  are  usually  supplied  with 
these  machines  in  connection  with  our  link  regulator 
which  has  been  improved  in  many  ways,  large  cones  running 
at  high  speed  are  employed  and  driven  by  rope  with  special 
tightening  arrangement.  The  levers ,  carrying  the  cone 
strap-fork  have  been  lengthened,  and  the  fulcrums  placed 
at  the  extremities  of  the  box  behind  the  cones.  By  this 
means  the  strap-fork  at  any  point  of  its  movement  is  kept 
close  to  the  cone,  the  strap  is  acted  on  much  more  quickly, 
and  the  action  is  much  more  sensitive  than  in  the  old  arrange- 
ment, where  the  levers  where  short  and  the  strap-forks  were 
necessarily  carried  some  distance  from  the  cones. 

Improved  link  regulator. — In  this  arrangement  we 
employ  the  usual  pedal  levers,  to  one  end  of  these  are 
attached  links,  two  of  these  links  are  coupled  together  by  a 
lever,  thus  forming  a  series  of  eight  levers.  These  eight 
levers  are  again  coupled  together  by  link  and  lever  and 
reduced  to  four  levers,  which  are  in  turn  reduced  in  a  like 

51 


manner  to  two.  These  two  levers  are  coupled  up  to  a  larger 
lever  pivoted  in  the  centre ;  this  latter  lever  is  connected  to 
a  long  lever  supported  from  the  frame  side  and  the  floor. 
This  lever  is  provided  with  an  adjustable  centre,  and  one  end 
is  connected  up  to  the  cone  box,  and  the  other  end  carries  a 
balance  weight.  The  link  connecting  these  latter  levers  is 
made  adjustable  for  regulating  the  distance  between  them. 
The  whole  arrangement  is  very  simple  and  effective  with 
practically  no  friction,  and  it  can  be  easily  kept  clean  and 
regulated. 

Formerly  a  slight  variation  in  the  thickness  of  the  lap 
did  not  affect  the  cone  strap,  owing  to  play  or  flexion  in  the 
intermediate  levers,  but  by  the  above  arrangement  this 
defect  is  avoided.  All  friction  is  reduced,  and  the  device  had 
proved  to  be  extremely  sensitive  to  any  variation  of  the  lap. 

The  beater  17iin.  dia.  is  usually  made  w^ith  two 
blades,  but  three  can  be  put  in  if  specially  asked  for.  It  is 
reversible,  and  runs  in  long  Mohler  bearings  with  special 
continuous  oiling  arrangement. 

The  beateP  bars  are  carried  on  circular  ribs  fixed  to 
the  inside  of  the  framing,  and  having  the  same  centre  as  the 
beater.  By  this  arrangement  the  distance  between  each 
bar  can  be  regulated  at  will,  with  the  greatest  facility  to  suit 
any  particular  class  of  cotton  that  may  have  to  be  worked. 

The  cages  are  of  good  size  and  carefully  placed,  so  as 
to  permit  as  mucli  dirt  as  possible  to  fall  out  of  the  cotton 
in  its  passage  from  the  beater  to  the  cage.  The  cage  is 
stripped  by  a  roller,  and  a  damper  with  its  attendant  evils 
and  collection  of  dirt  is  dispensed  with. 

The  fan  is  of  careful  construction  and  efficient  power 
and  the  shaft  runs  in  Mohler  bearings  and  continuous  oiling 
arrangements. 

The  press  rollers  are  four  in  number,  so  as  to  con- 
solidate the  laps  as  much  as  possible,  and  prevent  them 
licking  when  unrolling  on  the  following  machine.  A  cradle, 
conveniently  placed,  is  provided  for  the  reception  of  the 
finished  laps,  and  hollow  lap  rollers  are  supplied  w^ith  the 
machines. 

Measuring  and  stop  motion  to  regulate  the  length 
of  the  lap  is  extremely  simple,  and  the  length  of  lap  can  be 
altered  by  changing  a  single  wheel. 

Safety  appliances  are  provided  when  required,  to 
prevent  the  covers  being  raised  whilst  the  beater  is  running. 

52 


53 


Gearing. — The  driving  and  gearing  are  shown  in  the 
accompanying  diagrams.  All  wheels  are  efficiently  guarded 
so  as  to  comply  with  the  requirements  of  the  Factory  Act. 
All  pulleys  are  accurately  balanced. 

A  countershaft  is  built  on  the  machine  if  specially 
asked  for,  having  fast  and  loose  pulleys  of  16in.  dia.,  which 
should  run  at  500  revolutions  per  minute. 

Power  required  to  drive  the  machine  is  4  I.H.P.  for 
the  single,  and  8  I.H.P.  for  the  double  machine. 

The  production  varies  from  l,8001bs.  to  2,9001bs.  in 
10  hours,  according  to  the  class  of  work,  and  may  be  altered 
without  affecting  the  draft  by  changing  the  pulley  on  the 
end  of  the  beater  driving  the  cross  shaft. 

Strapping  and  banding. — Main  belt  for  driving  the 
counter,  5in.  wide,  length  according  to  distance  of  the  main 
shaft.  Belt  for  driving  beater  with  countershaft  on  the 
machine,  16ft.  Gin.  X  4in.  (If  driven  from  separate  counter, 
length  according  to  distance).  Beater  to  cross  shaft,  7ft. 
3in.  X  2iin.  Beater  to  fan,  7ft.  9in.  X  2jin.  Cross  shaft  to 
lap  drum  driving  pulley,  15ft.  3in.  X  24in.  Beater  to  beater 
in  the  double  machine,  16ft.  4in.  X  4in.  Second  fan  belt  in 
the  double  machine,  Sft.  9in.  x  2im.  Rope  for  driving  the 
cone,  fin.  dia.,  and  14ft.  9in.  long.  The  cone  strap  is 
Sft.  X  Urn. 

Pulleys. — Sm.  to  llin.  dia.,  usually  lOin.  X  4in.  wide. 
Height  of  beater  shaft,  36in.  from  floor. 

SPEEDS— American  cotton. — Two-bladed  beater 
for  38in.  laps,  1,500  revolutions  per  minute;  three-bladed 
beater  for  45in.  laps,  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 

Egyptian  cotton. — Two-bladed  beater  from  1,000  to 
1,200  revolutions  per  minute. 

Sea  Islands  cotton. — Two-bladed  beater  from  850 
to  1,000  revolutions  per  minute. 

Floor  space. — Single  machine  17ft.  3in.  long  x  6ft. 
lOin.  wide  for  3Sm.  laps,  and  7ft.  5in.  wide  for  45in.  laps. 
Double  machine  23ft.  5in.  x  6ft.  lOin.  wide  for  38in.  laps, 
and  7ft.  5in.  wide  for  45in.  laps.  These  lengths  are  for 
feed  table  to  take  four  laps  up.  If  to  be  fed  by 
automatic  feeder,  the  length  could  be  reduced  3ft.  3in. 

Hand  of  machine,  stand  facing  the  lap  end,  and  note 
if  pulley  must  be  on  right  or  left  hand  side. 


54 


55 


WEIGHTS    OF    MACHINES. 


Width 

SINGLE    MACHINE 

DOUBLE    MACHINE 

Gross 

Nett 

Cubic 
Feet 

Ne..         1  ^^ 

38in. 
41in. 
45in. 

Tons    Cwts. 

4  18 

5  1 
5            4 

Tons    Cwts. 
4            1 
4            4 
4            8 

282. 
3C0 
320 

Tons    Cwis.     Tons    Cwts.  1 

6  17          5            6    !    414 

7  1          5          10        444 
7            6         5          17        466 

These  weights  include  the  regulator.     For  machines  without  regulator, 
deduct  15  cwt.  gross,  13  cwt.  nett,  and  52  cubic  feet. 


*.  1 

U                 •?              .      . 

<D    1    ^ 

o 

o. 

•^ 

BEATER. 

m 

[ 

III!! 

1 

:  *      [^  ■       1 

7  -0 »♦* 

—  6-3 H, 

DOUBLE     BEATER     SCUTCHER. 


^ 


* 

^ ¥ — .            1 

'- 

BB) 

■mm 

:ii 

U 7 

■0         —      * 

1 

1 

SINGLE  BEATER  SCUTCHER. 


DRAFT. 

A  draft  of  four  means  that  one  yard  of  lap  of  given 
weight  fed  to  the  machine  must  be  dehvered  as  four  yards 
having  the  same  weight.  If  the  wheels  and  pulleys  were 
calculated  so  that  the  lap  drums  should  take  up  just  four 
times  the  length  fed  by  the  feed  rollers  in  a  given  time,  the 
laps  would  be  too  light,  owing  to  loss  by  waste  and  slip  in 
the  cone  and  other  straps,  consequently  allowance  must  be 
made  for  this  loss  and  slip.  The  percentage  of  loss  in 
waste  may   be  found  by  multiplymg  the  weight  loss  in  the 

56 


given  time  by  100,  and  di\iding  by  the  weight  of  cotton  fed 
to  the  machine  in  the  same  time.  In  calcidating  the  draft, 
it  is  convenient  to  consider  the  feed  roller  as  driving  the  lap 
drums  through  the  cones.  The  diameters  of  the  latter  may 
be  neglected,  being  approximately  equal  when  the  strap  is 
in  the  middle.  Allowing  12  per  cent,  for  loss,  for  example, 
r>ay  7  per  cent,  for  waste  and  5  per  cent,  for  slip,  the  feed 
roller  may  be  assumed  to  make  I'li  revolutions,  and  the  lap 
drums  then  made  to  take  up  only  foup  times  the  length  fed 
by  the  feed  roller  for  one  turn.  A  very  exact  draft  of 
four  (by  weight)  will  then  be  obtained.  The  calculation  is 
as  follows,  and  will  be  vmderstood  on  reference  to  the 
illustration  showing  the  gearing  in  plan: — 

Dia.  of  the  feed  roller,  3in.      Dia.  of  lap  drums  9in. 

Suppose  D  =  the  draft ;  X  =  the  dia.  of  the  rope  pulley 
on  the  cross  shaft  driving  the  cones  ;  Y  =  the  dia.  of  the 
pullev  driving  the  lap  end. 

\'\2  X  95  X  5  X  Y  X  14  X  13  X  9 

Then  : =  D 

1  X  X  X  30  X  72  X  54  X  3 
Y   X   2'49  D     X 

whence  :     =  D  or  Y  = 

X  2'49 

So  that  the  required  draft  being  known,  it  is  only 
necessary  lo  multiply  it  by  any  convenient  assumed  diameter 
of  X,  and  divide  by  the  constant  2*49  to  obtain  the  suitable 
diameter  of  the  pulley  Y.  The  constant  is  dependent  on  the 
assumed  loss,  and  if  this  were  greater  or  less  than  12  per 
cent,  the  constant  would  be  proportionately  greater  or  less. 
The  suitable  diameters  of  the  pulleys  for  three  different 
drafts  are  given  in  the  following  table: — 

Draft  =  3        Rope  pulley  =  72in.     Strap  pulley  =  9in. 

„      =3i  „  „      =7Mn.  „  „      =10iin. 

,,     =4  ,,  ,,      =7iin.  ,,  ,,      =12in. 

In  our  machine  the  pulleys  on  either  end  of  the  cross 
shaft  may  be  changed  to  alter  the  draft.  A  change  in  the 
rope  pulley  driving  the  cones  alters  both  draft  and  pro- 
duction, but  a  change  in  the  pulley  driving  the  lap  drums 
only  alters  the  draft.  For  any  given  draft  the  pulleys  must 
bear  a  fixed  ratio  to  each  other. 


57 


,irrrgi  r^q 


58 


SCUTCHING   MACHINE   SPECIFICATION. 


Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  Scutchers. 

How  many  machines  ? 

What  width  of  laps  are  they  to  make  ?  inches. 

Will  you  have  them  to  be  fed  by  Automatic  Feeder  or  by  laps  ? 
If  laps,  how  many  ?   (usually  three). 

To  suit  Carding  Engines  inches  on  the  wire  ? 

How  many  beaters  in  each  machine  ? 

Will  you  have  self-contained  driving  ?  Revolutions  per  minute 

(usually  500). 

Speed  of  line  shaft  ? 

Distance  between  line  shaft  and  ceiling  ? 

Largest  size  of  drum  ?  inches  (usually  36in.) 

Speed  of  Beater?  Revolutions  per  minute  (usually  with  two- 

blades  1,500   revolutions  per  minute). 

Diameter  of  Beater  FuUeys?  inches  (usually  lOin.  diameter).    . 

When  vou   face  the  delivery  end    of    the   machine,   must  the   Beater 
Pulleys  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side  of  it  ? 

Will  you  have  Cone  Feed  with  Link  Motion  attached  ? 
at  per  machine. 

When  must  the  above  be  delivered  ? 


[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  break- 
downs, or  other  unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby 
understood  that  a  reasonable  delay  in  the  time  of  delivery  be 
allowed  to  us.] 


Observations  and  remarks 


59 


60 


Improved  Carding  Engine. 


The  accompanying  illustrations  show  two  views  of  our 
new  patent  carding  engine  constructed  from  entirely 
new  Models,  and,  while  retaining  all  the  good  points  of  the 
previous  cards,  several  modifications  have  been  introduced 
which  tend  to  improve  the  working  and  the  accurate  setting 
of  the  machine.  All  the  parts  have  cast  on  them  a  w^ell- 
defined  letter  or  number  to  facilitate  ordering  change  pieces 
or  parts  broken  in  transit.  Each  piece  is  a  duplicate  of  a 
standard  piece,  so  that  all  parts  bearing  the  same  letter  or 
number  are  interchangeable,  and  catalogues  are  supplied 
containing  illustrations  of  each  part  giving  the  corresponding 
letter  or  number,  together  with  the  names  of  same,  so  that 
the  necessary  renewals  can  be  ordered  with  the  assurance 
that  they  will  come  to  order,  and  when  to  hand,  fit  in  place. 

The  frame  sides  are  made  much  stronger,  and  the 
lap  end  is  extended  to  carry  the  lap  plate  and  carrier;  this 
latter  is  arranged  to  carry  two  laps  without  coming  in  con- 
tact with  each  other." 

The  height  of  the  Card  has  not  been  increased  notwith- 
standing that  the  space  between  the  chain  of  flats  has  been 
greatly  increased  to  facilitate  setting  and  cleaning  operations. 

The  feed  roller  weighting  has  been  modified,  and 
arranged  that  after  the  weights  are  removed  the  levers  can 
be  unhooked  and  easily  removed  for  setting  purposes,  &c. 
Otherwise  we  still  retain  the  principle  of  that  used  by  us 
for  many  years. 

In  our  arrangement  the  feed  roller  bearings  are  not 
controlled  by  a  fork,  but  are  quite  free,  and  held  by  a  simple 
system  of  levers  and  weights,  so  that  any  thickness  passing 
under  the  roller  only  serves  to  increase  the  bite  on  the  point 
of  the  plate,  and  entirely  prevents  the  evil  of  snatching. 

The  takers-in  are  clothed  up  to  the  edge  and  fitted 
with  specially  arranged  shirts  to  prevent  the  exit  or 
collection  of  fly. 

Taker-in  pedestal. — This  pedestal  is  capped  and  made 
adjustable  by  means  of  a  tail  pin  which  enables  the  pedestal  to 
control  a  plate  inside  the  card  side  which  carries  the  cylinder 
and  taker-in  undercasings  together  with  the  mote  knives. 

61 


The  mote  knives  are  so  designed  that  they  can  be- 
set independently  of  each  other,  and  when  they  are  at  once 
set  for  any  desired  result,  any  future  movements  are  regu- 
lated from  the  taker-in  pedestal.  When  once  set,  the 
undercasings  and  mote  knives  require  no  further  adjustment,, 
because  the  movement  of  the  taker-in  governs  the  whole 
arrangement. 

The  division  and  feed  plates  have  also  been  modi- 
fied to  prevent  any  good  fibre  being  thrown  down,  and  tO' 
separate  the  heavy  dirt  and  seed  from  the  short  fly  below 
the  taker-in. 

The  bend  is  made  of  a  good  deep  rigid  section,  and 
constructed  with  a  turned  and  polished  section  part.  Seat- 
ings  are  milled  across  the  turned  surface  to  receive  the 
various  brackets,  which  prevents  them  getting  askew  or 
out  of  truth. 

The  flexible  bend  is  supplied  with  five  setting^ 
points  with  the  simplest  possible  tail  pin  adjustment,, 
terminating  at  the  flange  of  the  bend.  The  flexible  is  under 
positive  control,  and  can  be  set  to  the  finest  possible  limits. 
The  flexible  bends  are  milled  when  in  position  on  the  card 
as  before,  thus  ensuring  absolute  concentricity  with  the 
cylinder,  which  by  this  new  method  of  setting  can  be 
retained  at  all  stages  of  wear  on  the  wire.  We  still  retain 
the  flexible  bend  on  the  inside  of  the  fixed  bend  and  next  ta 
the  cylinder,  thus  retaining  the  present  short  flat.  The 
length  of  the  flat  therefore  only  exceeds  the  width  on  the 
wire  by  the  length  of  the  bearing  surfaces,  or  about  twO' 
inches,  and  is  consequently  the  shortest  possible  for  any 
given  width  on  the  wire. 


mzj_ 


Present  Flat  with 
Setting  arrangement. 


Position  of  the  flexible  bends. — We  place  our 
flexible  bends  on  the  inside  of  the  frame  bends,  and  next  to 
the  cylinder,  which  is  clothed  quite  up  to  the  edge.  Two 
important  advantages  result  from  this  arrangement.     Firstly, 


62 


the  cylinder  ends  are  completely  closed  in  and  the  escape  of 
fly  is  prevented,  any  little  that  may  work  out  being  at 
liberty  to  fall  away,  as  may  be  seen  on  examining  the 
illustration  Fig.  1.  In  some  Cards  where  the  short  fiat  is 
sought  after,  this  fly  cannot  freely  get  away,  and  by  collect- 
ing acts  as  a  brake  on  the  cylinder,  thus  greatly  increasing 
the  power  required  to  drive  the  machine.  Secondly,  the 
cylinder  end  being  completely  closed  in,  the  lap  may  be 
worked  the  full  width  of  the  wire,  so  that  the  resulting 
selvedges  are  perfect,  and  there  is  little  or  no  fly  at  the  ends 
of  the  doffing  comb.  In  most  Cards  there  is  a  certain  space 
between  the  cylinder  ends  and  the  flexible,  usually  filled  up 
by  the  framing;  but  by  so  much  must  the  flat  be  longer, 
and  is  usually  left  bare  of  wire  over  this  space.      (Fig  2). 


To  counteract  this  disadvantage  the  cylinder  is  made 
narrower  than  the  lap,  and  the  latter  is  doubled  over  at  the 
edges.  We  do  not,  how^ever,  think  this  advisable,  as  it  puts 
very  heavy  cardmg  on  the  wire  at  the  edges  where  it  is  least 
able  to  bear  it.  By  making  the  cylinder  the  same  width  as 
the  lap  the  selvedges  are  better,  as  the  thinness  of  the  edges 
of  the  lap  is  more  than  compensated  for  by  the  natural 
tendency  to  spread  in  passing  through  the  Card. 

Method  of  trueing  the  flexibles. — If  the  flexible 
bend  had  to  remain  always  in  the  same  position,  it  would 
not  be  difficult  to  make  it  perfectly  concentric  with  the 
cylinder.  Its  diameter  must,  how^ever,  be  reduced  from 
time  to  time,  according  as  the  wire  is  ground  away  on  the 
cylinder  and  flats.  We  have  exhaustively  studied  this 
problem,  and  claim  that  our  flexible  shows  no  measurable 
deflection  until  the  diameter  has  been  reduced  far  beyond 
the  limits  necessary  in  practice.  The  flexibles  are  fastened 
in  their  places  on  the  Card.  While  in  this  position  a 
machine  is  bolted  on  the  cylinder  carrying  a  milling  cutter 
at  each  end,  which  passes  over  the  bends  from  one  end  to 

63 


the  other,  milhng  them  from  the  cyhnder,  so  that  they  are 
absolutely  concentric  with  it.  The  milling  cutters  are  both 
carried  on  the  same  shaft,  which  can  be  easily  set  parallel 
to  the  cylinder  m  the  direction  of  its  width,  so  that  the 
surfaces  of  the  two  bends  are  both  in  the  same  line,  and, 
perfectly  parallel  with  the  surface  of  the  cylinder  in  the 
direction  of  its  width,  and  no  twist  remains  in  the  bends ; 
consequently  the  bearing  surfaces  of  the  fiats  lie  on  the  full 
width  of  the  flexibles  from  end  to  end.  The  wearing  of 
both  the  bends  and  the  flat  ends  is  thus  reduced  to  a  mini- 
mum and  equalised.  A  further  advantage  of  this  system  is 
that  if  rendered  necessary  through  unusual  wear  or  accident, 
the  operation  of  trueing  up  the  bends  may  be  repeated  at 
any  subsequent  time  in  the  mill,  and  this  without  removing 
the  clothing  from  the  cylinder.  The  whole  operation  only 
occupies  a  few  hours,  and  the  bends  are  then  as  good  as  new. 

The  number  of  flats  usually  supplied  with  this 
card  is  106. 

Flat  ends. — In  order  to  set  the  flats  to  the  cylinder 
with  the  greatest  accuracy,  it  is  necessary  after  having  ob- 
tained a  perfectly  concentric  bend,  to  have  each  flat  exactly 
alike,  and  this  we  ensure  by  the  most  elaborate  care  in  their 
manufacture.  It  is  further  necessary  that  the  flat  itself  be 
as  short  as  possible  and  perfectly  rigid,  otherwise  it  deflects 
by  its  own  weight.  Any  deflection  of  the  flat  will  cause  the 
wire  to  touch  the  cylinder  in  the  middle  whilst  still  some 
distance  away  at  the  ends.  We  have  already  shown  that 
our  flat  is  the  shortest  possible.  On  comparing  Figs.  1  and 
2,  it  will  be  seen  that  in  the  one  the  beading  or  rib  on  the 
back  of  the  flat  is  interrupted,  and  this  flat,  which  is  the 
type  of  some  still  made  to-day,  is  inherently  weak.  When 
we  placed  our  flexibles  inside  the  frames,  we  were  also  able 
to  do  away  with  this  break  in  the  back  rib  of  the  flat,  and  to 
carry  the  bead  right  through  to  the  end  without  any  break 
in  its  continuity,  thus  rendering  the  flat  extremely  rigid,  and 
practically  without  deflection.  Another  fertile  cause  of  de- 
flection in  the  flats,  is  the  pull  of  the  chain  w^hen  the  point 
where  it  is  attached  to  the  flat  lies  inside  the  flexible.  Our 
flat  ends  are  so  made  that  this  point  of  attachment  lies 
directly  over  the  centre  of  the  flexibles ;  consequently  the 
pressure  or  pull  of  the  chain  has  no  tendency  to  deflect  the 
flat  in  any  way.  Resummg,  therefore,  we  are  of  opinion 
that  our  flat  is  the  best  that  can  be  made;  it  is  the  shortest 

64 


possible,  it  is  as  rigid  as  possible,  and  finally,  is  not  affected 
by  the  pressure  of  the  chain. 

The  grinding  motion  is  the  one  adopted  by  us  some 
years  ago,  being  simple  and  efftcient  and  capable  of  most 
accurate  work.  It  has  been  lowered  and  is  now  located 
above  the  back  bowl  bracket,  so  as  to  be  more  convenient 
when  putting  in  the  grinding  roller. 


Fiat  grinding  apparatus. — The  result  obtained 
from  the  revolving  iiat  Card  depends  on  the  accuracy  w^ith 
which  the  various  parts,  particularly  the  flats  can  be  set,  not 
only  when  they  are  new,  but  also  when  the  inevitable  wear 
of  the  ends  take  place.  The  object  of  our  grinding  appara- 
tus is  to  grind  the  flats  from  their  working  surfaces,  and 
thus  ensure  that  the  height  of  the  w^ire  from  that  surface  is 
identical  in  every  flat,  no  matter  how  the  working  surface 
may  wear  in  each  flat.  This  would  be  easy  enough  if  the 
surface  of  the  wire  were  parallel  with  the  working  surface, 
but  this  is  not  so,  for  to  ensure  the  necessary  "  heel  "  in  the 
flat,  the  one  side  of  the  working  surface  is  cut  lower  than 
the  other,  and  is  therefore  not  parallel  with  the*  surface  of 

65 


the  wire.  In  order  to  grind  from  the  working  surface  of  the 
fiat  without  destroying  the  "  heel,"  we  employ  the  following 
device,  being  a  combination  of  simplicity  and  efficiency 
when  such  accurate  working  is  demanded. 

The  illustrations  show  the  weighted  lever  A  centred 
at  B  on  the  fixed  plate  D.  When  the  weight  C  is 
placed  in  position  the  finger  A^  is  raised  against  the  rib  of 
the  fiat  to  be  ground,  pressing  it  into  contact  with  the  con- 
trolling plate  F,  which  is  firmly  fixed  in  position.  The  flats 
ride  on  the  upper  surface  of  the  plate  D  until  they  come 
under   the  influence  of   the   finger  A\      Each   half   of   the 


controlling  plate  F  is  in  a  different  plane,  with  a  step  from 
one  to  the  other  in  the  centre,  so  that  when  one  edge  of  the 
working  surface  of  the  flat  end  is  on  the  one  plane,  the 
second  edge  is  on  the  other  plane  (the  position  when  grind- 
ing is  taking  place),  and  the  flat  wire  is  kept  in  the  necessary 
horizontal  position  during  the  grinding  process  to  preserve 
the  "heel." 

The  controlling  plate  is  marked  on  the  edge  to  show 
where  the  grinding  commences,  and  it  will  be  seen  that  this 
is  directly  after  the  first  edge  of  the  flat  end  (moving  back- 
wards) mounts  the  step.  The  process  continues  until  the 
second  edge  of  the  flat  end  approaches  near  to  the  step,  at 
which  point  the  whole  flat  is  clear  of  the  grinding  roller  G. 

In  speaking  of  the  front  and  back  edge  of  the  wire  or 
flat  end,  it  should  be  explained  that  the  former  is  the  one 
towards  which  the  wire  '  points,  and  which  is  first 
approached  by  the  cotton. 

66 


^ 


__ .  ; ^.".ji^OT^-'P* 


67 


The  sprocket  for  driving  the  flat  chain  is  placed 
eccentrically  to  the  flat  bowl.  By  this  means  the  drive  is 
not  affected  by  any  wear  of  the  flat  chain  as  very  few  teeth 
are  in  mesh  at  the  same  time.  The  chain  itself  is  tightened 
at  the  back  bowl  bracket. 

The  flat  stripping  brush  is  now  made  much  larger 
in  diameter  than  hitherto,  and  runs  at  about  one-third  of  the 
former  speed.  It  is  so  arranged  that  it  is  impossible  for  the 
comb  to  injure  the  wire,  and  it  can  be  adjusted  to  any 
required  distance  from  same. 

The  top  bowl  bracket  is  arranged  to  carry  two  tie 
rods  across  the  card,  our  object  being  to  make  the  bends 
very  rigid. 

The  cylinder  pedestal  now  is  provided  with  a 
channel  for  taking  away  all  the  surplus  oil  which  prevents 
it  from  getting  into  the  inside  of  the  card  and  thus  on  to 
the  wire. 

Cylinders  and  doffers  are  trued  up  with  an  emery 
wheel  on  their  own  shafts  to  give  a  perfectly  smooth  and 
even  surface  for  the  clothing  to  rest  on.  They  are  balanced 
when  running  at  a  speed  they  run  at  in  the  mill,  so  that  the 
effect  of  the  centrifugal  force  is  properly  counteracted. 

The  undercasings  have  also  had  special  attention 
with  regard  to  strength  and  stiffness.  They  are  now  made 
in  halves  with  very  strong  sides  and  stiff  cross  bars.  The 
adjustment  for  these  casings  is  done  from  the  outside  by  a 
very  simple  device.  The  back  portion  is  carried  from  the 
taker-in  pedestal,  so  that  when  the  taker-in  is  set  the  casing 
will  follow. 

The  front  stripping  plate  and  doffer  covers  are 
carried  by  V-shaped  brackets  and  provided  with  two  setting 
points,  one  for  the  top  stripping  knife  and  one  for  the 
bottom  stripping  knife  or  filling-up  piece  between  the 
cylinder  and  the  doffer.  The  top  knife  can  be  set  with 
great  accuracy,  so  that  the  strips  are  always  under  proper 
control. 

The  doffer  pedestal  is  now  made  with  a  cap,  but 
still  carries  the  grinding  and  stripping  brackets.  Arranged 
in  this  manner  the  whole  combination  is  moved  whenever 
any  adjustment  of  the  doffer  takes  place,  so  obviating  the 
possibility  of  any  disarrangement  and  rendering  it  impossible 
for  the  grinding  roller  to  get  out  of  line  with  the  doffer  and 
to  grind  hollow. 

68 


69 


The  drop-levep  carrying  the  barrow  change  wheel 
driving  the  doffer  is  now  carried  on  a  much  longer  bearing 
and  is  therefore  very  steady.  It  is  provided  with  a  disen- 
gaging handle  operated  from  the  front  of  the  machine. 

Drive  for  taker-in  and  doffer  can  be  arranged  for 
either  belt  or  rope  drive.  The  rope  drive  as  now  applied 
also  drives  the  flats  in  addition  to  the  doffer  and  taker-in. 
The  rope  is  endless  and  a  convenient  tightening  arrangement 
is  provided.  The  pulleys  are  now  of  a  much  larger  diameter 
than  formerly  and  the  ropes  are  so  arranged  that  there  is  no 
rubbing  or  chafing  at  the  crossings,  and  as  no  shifting  device 
is  now  required,  the  rope  for  this  new  drive  should  last  for 
years  without  replacement.  For  the  purpose  of  disengaging 
the  worm  drive  to  allow  the  flats  to  be  turned  round  by 
hand,  the  flat  driving  pulley  is  mounted  on  an  eccentric 
bush,  and  the  turning  handle  is  in  a  position  easy  of  access 
and  offers  no  obstruction  when  in  use. 

If  desired,  a  patented  double  speed  motion  can  be 
applied  to  the  doffer. 

The  delivery  end  is  now  made  much  stronger  and 
better  in  appearance.  The  shaft  driving  the  calender  rollers 
is  placed  below  the  name  plate  or  front  stretcher,  thus 
leaving  all  clear  on  the  top  and  making  it  much  more  con- 
venient and  safer  for  the  operatives  when  cleaning  or 
piecing  up. 

Top  and  bottom  calender  rollers  are  both  4in. 
diameter.  This  allows  for  a  larger  wheel  at  the  end  of  the 
calender  shaft,  and  therefore  a  finer  change  can  be  obtained- 
for  regulating  the  delivery  of  the  sliver  to  the  coiler. 

The  comb  box  is  made  wnth  the  double  link  and 
eccentric  motion.  All  bearings  being  cast-iron  to  cast-iron, 
the  wear  is  practically  nil.  The  bearings  run  in  an  oil  bath, 
thus  allowing  a  high  speed  to  be  maintained  without  heat, 
and  ensuring  silent  running. 

The  comb  stock  is  of  large  diameter,  wnth  six  arms 
for  the  38in.  wide  machine,  and  seven  for  the  45in.  wide 
machme,  carries  the  comb. 

The  coiler  top  is  of  the  usual  neat  design,  but  the 
can  bottom  and  the  pillar  have  been  entirely  remodelled. 

Guards. — All  moving. parts  are  carefully  guarded  with 
safety  motion  for  the  front  cylinder  cover  when  ordered. 

Clothing. — Unless  otherwise  ordered,  we  put  the 
following  counts  of  wire  on  our  Cards  :— 

70 


Class  of  Cotton. 

Cylinder. 

Doffer. 

Tops. 

Surat.                 Lowest  Class    ... 

80' s 

90's 

70's 

Better         

90's 

lOO's 

80's 

American.         Lowest 

100 's 

llO's 

100 's 

Better         

llO's 

120 's 

llO's 

Egyptian.          Ordinary   ,, 

llO's 

120's 

llO's 

Better  Classes   ... 

120's 

ISO's 

120's 

We  attach  the  clothing  to  the  flats  at  our  works  by 
special  machinery. 

To  find  the  length  of  2in.  fillet  to  cover  a 
card  cylinder. — Diameter  of  cylinder  X  width  of  cylinder 
X  3' 1416 -^- width  of  fillet  x  12in,  =  feet  required. 

The  length  of  fillet  required  to  clothe  the  24in.  doffer 
with  l^in.  fillet,  and  the  50in.  cylinders  with  2in.  fillet  for 
various  widths  of  the  Cards,  is  as  follows: — 


Width  on  the  Wire,    i                Doffers.                 |             Cylinders. 

38in.   (965  »Vm) 
41in.  (1"^  04) 
45in.  (1™  144) 

159ft.  Om.                               248ft. 
171ft.  6in.              '                  268ft. 
188ft.   6in.                                294ft. 

To  these  lengths  must  be  added  about  6ft. 
tail  ends  may  be  properly  stretched  up. 

The  weight  of  clothing  is  as  follows  : — 


so  that  the 


Width  on  the 
Wire. 


Tops. 


Cylinder  and 
Doffer. 


Total. 


Ins. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

38 

291 

81 

104i 

41 

3U 

m 

119 

45 

34^ 

96 

130* 

The  Pulleys  supplied  are  usually  16in.  dia.  x  3in. 
wide.  Other  diameters  are  supplied  if  required.  They 
should  make  160  to  165  revolutions  per  minute.  The  height 
from  the  floor  to  centre  of  driving  shaft  is  31in.  and  the 
dia.  IS  2h^n. 

Power. — The  power  required  is  f  LH.P.  per  card. 

Hands  of  machines. — To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
Card,  stand  facing  the  doffer  and  note  if  the  pulleys  must  be 
on  the  right  or  left  hand  side. 


71 


Pinions,  &C.- — Supplied  with  each  Card  are  two  shaft 
pinions  and  two  barrow  wheels  in  addition  to  those  on  the 
machine. 

Strapping. — The  length  of  the  main  belt  is  determined 
by  the  position  of  shaft  in  relation  to  the  machine,  but  it  is 
usually  about  40ft.  long  by  Sin.  wide. 

Banding. — The  banding  required  per  Card  is  50ft.  of 
iin.  and  12ft.  of  fin. 

Dimensions  and  Weiglits. 


Width  on 
the  Wire. 

Width. 

1 

Length. 

Gross. 

Nett. 

Cubic 
Feet. 

38in. 
41in. 
45in. 

ft.    in. 
5     1^ 
5     44 
5     8| 

ft.    in. 
10     0 
10     0 
10     0 

T.    C. 

3     0 
8     3 

T.     C. 

2     5 
2     8 
2  10 

287 
296 
310 

Calculations. 

Draft  and  counts. — The  draft  that  may  be  required 
in  a  Card  is  determined  by  dividing  the  weight  in  grains 
of  a  yard  of  lap  by  the  weight  in  grains  of  a  yard  of 
sliver,  or  by  dividing  the  counts  of  sliver  by  the  counts  of 
the  lap,  and  to  do  this  as  exactly  as  possible  it  is  well  to 
reduce  the  actual  weight  or  counts  of  the  laps  by  about  5 
per  cent,  for  waste.  Thus,  if  a  yard  of  lap  weigh  a  pound 
(7,000  grains)  or  is  O'OOl  19  hank,  the  weight  should  only  be 
taken  as  6,650  grains,  or  the  counts  as  0'00125,  and  if  a  yard 
of  the  resulting  sliver  had  to  be  55h  grains  or  0T5  hank,  the 
required  draft  would  be  120.  The  draft  is  altered  by 
changing  the  side  shaft  bevel,  and  the  figures  given  below 
will  be  understood  on  reference  to  the  small  plan  of  the 
Card  annexed  : — 

34    ..    96    ^     32    ^  180        ^     4in.    Cal.  R.    ^  draft  of 

Card. 


26 


X  24        26,27,28  2i     Feed  R. 

Two  factors  in  the  above  train  vary  ;  the  wheel  on  the 
end  of  the  calender  which  depends  on  the  kind  of  cotton 
worked,  and  the  diameter  of  the  feed  roller,  which  is 
2jin.  diameter  for  all  widths  of  our  make  of  Card. 

From  the  fixed  elements  constants  may  be  determined 
so  that  the  draft  or  side  shaft  bevel  may  be  immediately 
determined. 

72 


73 


They  are  given 

in  the  following  table  : — 

Wheel  on  the 
end  of  Calender. 

Feed  Roller, 
2^m.  diameter. 

These  are  our  usual 
constants,     but     the 
gearing    can    be    al- 
ftered  to  increase  or 
decrease      them      if 
required. 

26 
27 

1                    28 

2060 
1983 
1913 

These  numbers  divided  by  the  draft  will  give  the 
side  shaft  bevel  to  give  that  draft,  or  divided  by  the 
number  of  teeth  in  the  side  shaft  bevel  will  show  the 
draft  it  gives. 

To  find  the  draft  between  feed  roller  and 
doffer. — Wheel  on  side  shaft  x  wheel  on  feed  roller  endx 
diameter  of  doffer-^ bevel  wheel  on  end  of  doffer  X  change 
pinion  on  end  of  side  shaft  X  by  diameter  of  feed  roller  = 
draft  required. 

Production. — It  is  impossible  to  give  a  standard  list 
of  productions,  as  these  vary  so  very  much  according  to  the 
quality,  weight  of  sliver  per  yard,  and  the  class  of  cotton 
being  worked.  We,  however,  give  a  formula  below  by 
which  this  can  be  approximately  arrived  at  :— 
minutes  revs,  of  doffer  diam.  of  doffer  t..,,  weight  of  sliver 
per  hour.  per  min.  with  wire.  (grs.  per  yd.) 

36in.  X  7,000  grs.  per  yd.  =lbs.  per  hour. 

If  the  result  is  multiplied  by  the  actual  working  hours 
per  week  of  the  Card,  allowing  for  all  stoppages,  cleaning, 
and  grinding,  the  result  will  give  the  weekly  production. 


74 


SPECIFICATION. 


Details  to  be  j^iven  when  ordering  Cards. 

Diameter  of  the  Cylinder  50in. 
Diameter  of  the  Doffer  24in. 
Diameter  of  the  Taker-in  9in. 
No.  of  Flats  106,  of  which  42  are  always  working. 
Speed  of  the  Cylinder  from  160  to  165  revolutions  per  minute. 
How  many  Cards  ? 
Width  of  Lap  from  the  Scutchers  ? 

Diameter  of  the  Driving  Pulleys  ?  Usually  16  inches. 

When  facing  the  Doffer  how  many  Cards  with  Pulleys  on  the  right 

..    left? 
Are  we  to  supply  our  Patent  Flat  Grinding  Apparatus? 
Are  we  to  supply  our  Patent  Double  Speed  for  the  Doffer  ? 
Are  we  to  supply  a  Mote  Knife  below  the  Taker-in  ? 
Are  we  to  supply  an  Undercasing  below  the  Taker-in  ? 

.A.re  we  to  supply  an  Undercasing  below  the  Cylinder  ?  In  one  or  two  parts  ? 

.•\re  we  to  supply  a  Strap  Fork? 

Are  we  to  supply  the  Taker-in  covered  with  saw  tooth  wire  ? 
Are  we  to  supply  the  Clothing? 

.A.re  we  to  supply  the  Flats  with  the  tops  attached  ?  And  by  what  system  ? 

Counts  of  the  Clothing  Cylinder.  Doffer.  Flats. 

What  kind  of  cotton  do  you  intend  to  work? 

DIMENSIONS   OF   THE   CANS. 
Total  height  ?  Inside  diameter  ?  Outside  diameter  at  bottom  ? 

DIMENSIONS   OF   THE   GRINDING   ROLLERS. 
Diameter  of  the  Roller  ?  Length  ?  Diameter  of  the  Shafts  i^ 

Weight  of  one  yard  of  Lap  ? 
Weight  of  six  yards  of  Sliver  ? 

CHANGE   WHEELS. 

With  each  Card  Two  Side  Shaft   Bevels,  and  Two   Barrow  Wheels  are  delivered 
gratis  in  addition  to  the  Wheels  on  the  Machine  itself. 

Are  we  to  deliver  any  extra  Wheels  ? 

Side  Shaft  Bevels  ?  Barrow  Wheels? 

When  must  delivery  commence  ?  and  when  be  completed  ? 

[If  our  works  are  closed  by  reason  of  strikes,  lock-outs,  breakdowns,  or  other 
unforeseen  causes  beyond  our  control,  it  is  hereby  understood  that  a  reasonable  delay 
in  the  time  of  delivery  be  allowed  to  us.] 

Shipping  instructions  : 
Terms  of  payment : 
Observations  and  Remarks  : 

75 


76 


Derby  Doubler. 


The  object  of  this  machine  is  to  unite  into  a  sheet  a 
given  number  of  sUvers  from  the  Breaker  Card  and  make 
them  into  a  lap  for  the  Finisher  Card. 

As  it  is  necessary  that  the  laps  made  on  this  machine 
should  be  uniform,  there  is  a  Stop  motion  to  each  sliver 
which  stops  the  machine  when  an  end  breaks. 

These  machines  are  constructed  with  four  callender 
rollers,  two  iron  bottom  fluted  drums  and  one  iron  top  fluted 
drum,  by  which  means  the  laps  are  made  of  much  greater 
density  and  consequently  of  much  greater  weight  than  was 
possible  formerly. 

A  measuring  motion  is  applied  which  can  easily  be 
adjusted  to  make  any  desired  length  of  lap. 

We  have  patterns  with  V  table  patent  stop  motion  to 
each  sliver  or  can  for- 22  to  140  cans. 


Weights  and  Dimensions  of 

Derby  Do 

ubiers. 

Cans  per 
Machine 

Width  of 
Laps 

Space 
occupied 

Weights 

Gross        1         Nett 

Ft.      In.      Ft.    In. 

22 

lOin.  to  13in. 

9      0X60 

45  cwt. 

40  cwt. 

36 

17in.  to  19in. 

12      0X6      6 

50     .. 

42     ,, 

60 

23-34-37in. 

14      0x7      8 

58     ,. 

48     ,, 

72  to  96 

41in.  to  47^in. 

17      4X8      8 

74     ,, 

61     ,, 

96  to  140 

60in.  to  66in. 

23      1x9      8^ 

Driving   pulleys,  14in.  dia.,  3in.  wide,  making    150  to 
200  revs,  per  min.     Power,  96  cans  1|  i.h.p. 

Production  from  1,500  to  1,600  lbs.  per  day. 


77 


78 


Sliver  Lap  Machine. 


This  machine  when  used  in  conjunction  with  the  Ribbon 
Lap  Machine  is  usually  provided  with  three  pairs  of  drawing 
rollers,  but  when  this  latter  machine  is  not  available  and  the 
laps  are  taken  direct  from  the  Sliver  Lap  Machine  to  the 
Comber  four  pairs  of  drawing  rollers  are  recommended. 

Callender  rollers. — Two  pairs  of  these  are  provided, 
and  they  are  so  arranged  that  the  sheet  of  cotton  is  well 
consolidated  and  so  made  into  a  lap  of  the  greatest  possible 
density. 

The  lap  spindle  is  specially  constructed  to  allow  of 
a  quick  and  easy  removal  of  the  finished  lap  and  replace- 
ment of  a  fresh  bobbin. 

Width  of  lap. — Machines  can  be  supplied  suitable  for 
laps  of  72in.,  Sfin.,  9in.  and  lOoin.  in  width,  composed  of 
any  number  of  slivers  from  14  to  20,  usually  18  for  9in.  laps 
suitable  for  lOoin.  laps  on  the  Ribbon  Lap  Machine  for  the 
Nasmith  Comber, 

Sliver  stop  motion. — Each  sliver  is  provided  with  an 
automatic  stop  niotion  which  brings  the  machine  to  a  stand- 
still before  the  broken  end  enters  the  rollers.  It  is  on  the 
same  principle  as  that  applied  to  the  drawing  frame.  The 
spoons  or  tumblers  F  are  pivoted  on  a  fixed  bar  O  having 
a  knife  edge  ;  below^  this  is  a  shaft  on  which  are  placed  a 


SPIDER   SHAFT 


VIEW    OF   STOP     MOTION. 

number  of  spiders,  or  wings.  This  shaft  is  driven  by  an 
inclined  clutch  A  which,  so  long  as  the  shaft  turns  easily,  is 
kept  in  gear  by  a  counterpoise  B.     When  the  machine  is  at 

79 


work  the  weight  of  the  sliver  keeps  the  upper  end  of  the 
tumbler  down,  but  directly  the  sliver  breaks  the  lower  end 
of  the  tumbler  or  spoon  falls,  and  thus  offers  a  solid  resistance 
to  the  spider  shaft.  This  stops  the  shaft  and  throws  the 
clutch  A  forward,  and  the  counterpoise  B  rising  lifts  the  slide 
bar  C  out  of  a  notch  in  which  it  rests  and  allows  the  spiral 
spring  D  to  throw  the  strap  on  to  the  loose  pulley. 

Lap  Stop  motion. — A  full  lap  stop  or  measuring 
motion  is  also  applied  so  that  the  size  and  weight  of  the  laps 
can  be  regulated  at  will.  The  7iin.  laps  usually  weigh 
10  dwts.  to  the  yard,  and  the  8|in.  laps  ITS  dwts.  to  the 
yard.  In  preparing  laps  for  the  Nasmith  Comber  these  are 
from  21  to  24  dwts.  per  yard,  9in.  wide  for  lO^in.  Combers, 
and  are  usually  12in.  diameter.  The  draft  in  the  machine 
should  not  be  more  than  two. 

Patent  single  preventer.— This  motion  is  a  very 
great  help  both  in  drawing  the  sliver  from  the  cans  in  such 
a  manner  as  not  to  break  or  strain  it,  and  also  in  preventing 
the  breakage  of  the 
sliver  at  any  point 
between  the  guide  and 
back pairof rollers.  It 
also  makes  the  sliver 
stop  motion  more 
positive  in  its  action, 
so  that  in  the  event 
of  a    sliver    breaking  ^^.'^^^ 

^u  -11  u  SHAFT. 

there  will  be  no  possi- 
bility of  a  "  Single  " 
or  thin  sliver  going  forward. 

Formerly  the  laps  from  this  machine  were  put  directly 
on  to  the  comber,  but  we  now  introduce  an  intermediate 
machine,  described  later,  with  a  view  to  making  laps  in 
which  the  fibres  are  drawn  more  parallel  and  of  more  even 
section,  with  the  object  of  getting  better  combing  with  less 
waste. 

Pulleys  12in.  X  2iin.  running  usually  at  250  revs,  per 
min.  The  machine  driving  pulley,  running  at  250  revs,  per 
min.,  will  produce  approximately  2,000  yards  of  lap  per  hour. 
The  height  from  the  floor  to  centre  of  driving  shaft  is  2ft. 
4in.,  and  the  dia.  of  the  shaft  is  liin.  Power. — xA.pprox- 
imately  one-third  horse-power. 

Floor  space,  including  cans,  7ft.  6in.  X  4ft.  6in. 


80 


Weight. — Approximate  gross  weight  (9in.  lap),  21  cwt. 
Nett  weight  (9in.  lap),  18  cwt. 

Production. — One  machine  will  supply  laps  for  six 
8-headed  Heihiiann  or  six  6-headed  Nasmith  Combers. 

Draft.^The  draft  in  this  machine  is  usually  1*95,  and 
the  w^heels  are  as  follows  :  — 

64     24     26     21     72      12     12in.    drum. 

,    — X  — X  —  X — ^x  -X  — X =  r95. 

B.R.W.  33     41      50     21     29     72     liin.  B.R. 
Any  alteration  to  the  draft  may  be  got  by  altering  the  33 
front  roller  wheel. 

We  supply  extra  with  each  machine  one  top  roller  and 
two  change  wheels.  We  strongly  recommend  the  metallic 
rollers  in  this  machine. 

Hand  of  machine. — To  determine  the  hand,  stand 
facing  the  lap  end  of  the  machine,  and  note  if  the  driving 
pulley  must  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side. 

SPECIFICATION    FOR    SLIVER    LAP 
MACHINE. 


JOHN    HETHERINGTON   8c  SONS,   LIMITED,   MANCHESTER. 

Note. — Should  these  works  be  closed,  wholly  or  in  part,  through 
strikes,  lockouts,  breakdowns,  or  any  unforeseen  causes,  a  reasonable 
delay  to  be  granted  to  the  makers. 

SLIVER   LAP   MACHINE. 

How  many  Lap  Machines  ?  Width  of  Lap  to  be  made  ? 

Diameter  of  the  Rollers  ?  First       Second       Third       Fourth 

Are  we  to  supply  Metallic  Rollers  or  ordinary  ones  ? 
Draft  4th  to  3rd  X  x 

„      3rd  to  2nd  x  x 

„      2nd  to  1st  X  X 

„      3rd  to  5in.  Call  x  x 

Are  we  to  cover  the  Top  Rollers  and  Cleavers  ? 
Diameter  of  the  Driving  Pulleys  ?  Speed  per  minute  ? 

No.  of  ends  up  ?  Weight  per  yard  of  Sliver  ? 


One  extra  ordinary  Top  Roller  and  Three  Draft  wheels  are  supplied 
gratis  with  each  machine. 

When  must  the  machine  be  delivered,  and  how  ? 

81 


82 


Ribbon  Lap  Machine. 


The  purpose  of  this  machine  is  to  draw  six  laps  made 
by  the  SHver  Lap  Machine  into  one,  and  a  draft  of  six  is 
therefore  provided  for. 

The  six  laps  placed  in  the  creel  pass  through  four  lines 
of  drawing  rollers,  each  resulting  web  then  being  taken  over 
a  highly  polished  curved  plate  which  conducts  it  on  to  the 
front  table  of  the  machine,  along  which  it  travels  at  right 
angles  to  its  path  through  the  rollers.  This  implies  the  whole 
six  being  laid  one  upon  the  other  before  they  reach  the  end 
of  the  table  on  which  are  arranged  a  number  of  press  rollers 
to  ensure  an  even  contact  of  the  six  component  layers  of  the 
new  lap,  which  is  then  thoroughly  consolidated  by  the  two 
pairs  of  heavily  weighted  callender  rollers  and  re-wound  on 
a  bobbin  by  the  lap  drums. 

Advantages. — The  drawing  process  straightens  the 
fibres,  the  draft  usually  approaching  six,  and  the  super- 
posing of  the  six  webs  gives  laps  of  absolutely  even  section, 
so  that  all  the  fibres  are  firmly  held  by  the  comber  nipper, 
the  two  causes  combining  to  reduce  the  comber  waste  to  a 
minimum,  and  increasing  the  production. 

The  laps  from  the  Sliver  Lap  Machine  are  usually 
made  T|in.  narrower  than  those  to  be  made  by  the  ribbon 
lap  machine  to  allow  for  the  spreading  of  the  cotton  in 
passing  the  draw  rollers  of  the  latter. 

Stop  motions  are  applied  to  each  lap,  so  that  if  one 
runs  off,  the  machine  comes  to  a  standstill  before  the  sliver 
enters  the  rollers. 

A  full  lap  stop  or  measuring  motion  is  also  applied, 
so  that  the  size  of  the  laps  can  be  regulated  at  will  and  all 
the  laps  made  alike,  both  in  size  and  length. 

Rollers. — We  strongly  recommend  metallic  rollers  in 
these  machines.     If  ordinary  rollers  are  used  the  top  rollers, 
should  have  loose  ends. 

The  stands  are  made  on  the  same  principle  as  those 
on  the  drawing  frame,  that  is,  each  slide  can  be  set  separately 
and  is  furnished  with  an  easily  renewable  brass  step. 

Clearer  covers  are  now  made  of  sheet  steel,  and  we 
can  supply  either  the  Stationary  or  the  Ermen's  Clearer. 

83 


84 


The  curved  web  conductors  are  usually  made  of 
sheet  steel  pressed  into  shape  and  nickel  plated.  We  can 
supply  them  in  highly  polished  cast  iron  or  at  an  extra  cost 
■cover  them  with  sheet  brass. 

Our  illustrations  show  the  machine  in  perspective,  and 
a  plan  is  also  appended  giving  the  details  of  the  gearing, 
size  of  pulleys,  speeds,  cScc. 

The  theoretical  production  may  be  obtained  from 
the  following  formula: — 

Speed  of  the  pulleys  X  wei ght  of  yard  of  lap  in  grains 

80 
The  result  will  be  pounds  in  10  hours,  and  should  be  reduced 
by  about   10  per  cent,  to  obtain  the  actual  production,  the 
allowance  being  for  stoppage  and  taking  off  the  laps. 

The  weight  of  the  laps  varies  from  ip  to  14  dwts. 
per  yard  according  to  the  width  and  the  quality  of  combing 
required  for  Heilmann  Combers,  and  from  24  to  27  dwts.  for 
Nasmith  Combers.  They  may  be  made  y^in.,  8f  in.,  or  lO^in. 
wide  for  Heilmann  and  lOoin.  for  Nasmith  Combers. 

Draft. — The  total  draft  in  the  machine  is: — 
56        X        70        X        100X68x20X14x2lxi2in. 
30   X   change  wheel  X  25  X  72  X  40  X  21  X  50  X  275in. 
301*7  i  From    the    wood 

= — *=  Draft  =  -,       lap  roller  to  the 

change  wheel  (       12in.  drum. 

(     70  100  280 

j X = if  both 

(   C.  W.         25       change  wheel 


The  draft  in  the 
fluted  roller  is     


back  and  front  rollers  are  the  same  diameter. 

Weight  of  a  machine  of  six  heads  and  for  lOiin.  laps  : 
Gross  (machine  alone)  46cwt.  3qrs.  (roller  weights)  8cwt.  2qrs. 
Nett  „         „       31        „  „  „         8    „    . 

Cubic  feet  with  weights,  118. 


I 


4^ 


11 


H^-^ 


a 


.l4rJE 


85 


# 


ft 


Floor  space  for  6  heads,  14ft.  4in.   X   4ft.  Sin. 

Production. —  One  machine  to  six  8-headed  Heilmann 
Combers  ;   one  machine  to  six  6-headed  Nasmith  Combers. 

Driving  pulley,  16m.  diameter  X  3in.  The  height  of 
the  driving  shaft  centre  from  the  floor  is  24iin.  and  the 
diameter  of  the  shaft  is  liin. 

Speed,  250  revolutions  per  minute,  for  5  or  6  combers. 

Power  required  approximately,  1  H.P. 

Hand  of  machine. — To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
machine  stand  facing  the  curved  plates,  and  note  if  the 
driving  pulley  must  be  on  the  right  or  left  hand  side. 


SPECIFICATION    FOR    RIBBON    LAP 
MACHINE. 


JOHN    HETHERINGTON    &   SONS   LIMITED,   MANCHESTER. 

NoTE^Should  these  works  be  closed,  wholly  or  in  part,  through 
strikes,  lockouts,  breakdowns,  or  any  unforeseen  causes,  a  reasonable 
delay  to  be  granted  to  the  makers. 

RIBBON    LAP   MACHINE. 

How  many  Ribbon  Lap  Machines  ?  Width  of  Lap  to  be  made  ? 

How  many  Heads  per  Machine  ? 

Diameter  of  the  Rollers  ?  First       Second       Third       I'^ourth 

Are  we  to  supply  Metallic  or  ordinary  Rollers  ? 
If  the  latter,  will  you  have  the  Top  Rollers  with  Loose  Ends  P 
Are  we  to  cover  tJie  Top  Rollers  and  Clearers  ? 
Will  you  have  the  Ctirx'ed  Plates  covered  xvith  Sheet  Brass  ? 
Diameter  of  the  Pulleys  ?  Revolutions  per  minute  ? 

When  facing  the  table  how  many  machines  with  Pulleys  on  the  right  ? 

left? 


One  extra  ordinary  Top  Roller  and  Three  Draft  Wheels  are  supplied 
gratis  with  each  machine. 


When  must  the  machines  be  delivered,  and  how  ? 

86 


Draw  Frame  and  Lap 
Machine  Combined. 


When  the  Ribbon  Lap  Machine  is  not  used  the  sHvers 
from  the  Card  are  usually  put  through  one  head  of  drawing, 
and  afterwards  these  slivers  are  made  into  a  lap  on  the 
ordinary  Sliver  Lap  Machine. 

The  Draw^  Frame  and  Lap  Machine  is  used  in  some 
districts  in  place  of  the  Sliver  and  Ribbon  Lap  machines  for 
making  the  comber  laps  direct  from  the  Card  Sliver. 

These  machines  are  usually  made  3  or  4  deliveries,  with 
about  12  cans  per  delivery.  The  slivers  pass  through  4  pairs 
of  drawing  rollers,  and  are  afterwards  combined  together 
and  made  into  a  lap  of  a  suitable  width  and  weight  for  the 
comber  as  in  the  case  of  the  Ribbon  Lap  Machine. 

FloOP  space. — A  machine  of  three  deliveries,  21oin. 
gauge  and  36  cans,  with  lap  machine  =  12ft.  2in.  X  5ft. 
3in.  wide. 

For  four  deliveries  =   14ft.  Oin.   X   5ft.  3in.  wide. 

Driving  pulley. — 16in.  to  20in.  dia.  x  3in.  wide. 
Speed. — 175  revs,  per  min. 

Power  for  four  deliveries,  t  h.p. 


87 


Nasmith  Comber. 


The  Heilmann  Combing  machine  was  introduced  to  the 
cotton  trade  by  JOHN  Hethekington  &  Sons  in  1850, 
and  it  has  since  that  time  until  recently  remained  without  a 
serious  rival.  All  admit  the  excellence  of  the  work  done  by 
it,  but  it  is  also  acknowledged  that  its  production  is  small, 
that  the  piecing  and  overlap  leave  something  to  be  desired, 
and  that  it  is  only  effective  when  treating  long  cotton.  Its 
use  has  therefore  been  restricted  to  the  finer  branches  of 
cotton  spinning. 

An  intimate  knowledge  of  the  Heilmann  and  of  the 
Hetherington  Lecoeur  Combers  enabled  the  designer  and 
patentee  of  the  Nasmith  Comber  to  retain  all  the  best  points 
of  the  Heilmann  whilst  obviating  its  two  chief  defects, 
namely,  its  low  production  and  defective  piecing  and  overlap, 
greatly  simplifying  the  mechanical  detail  at  the  same  time, 
and  producing  a  machine  applicable  to  all  lengths  of  cotton 
fibre. 

The  advantages  of  the  Nasmith  Comber  may  be 
summarised  as  follows: — 

(a)  Without  increase  of  speed,  twice  the  pro- 
duction of  a  Heilmann  Comber  can  be  obtained 
and  the  quality  maintained,  thus  economising  floor 
space,  power,  wages,  and  repairs. 

(b)  It  will  deal  with  all  lengths  of  staple  from 
i  inch  to  2  inches,  without  abnormal  waste  on  the 
shorter  varieties. 

(c)  It  makes  a  perfect  piecing  with  long  over- 
lap even  on  the  shortest  cotton,  and  the  well- 
known  cloudy  Heilmann  draw-box  sliver  is  entirely 
obviated. 

(d)  The  quantity  of  waste  is  easily  controlled 
and  if  desired  it  will  work  with  very  low  waste, 
even  on  short  staple,  for  semi-combed  yarns. 

(e)  All  its  motions,  except  those  of  the  detach- 
ing rollers,  are  continuous,  so  that  there  is  only  one 
cam  in  the  machine,  which  runs  very  quietly  and 
with  proportionately  reduced  wear  and  tear. 

89 


(f)  Its  mechanism  and  adjustment  are  much 
simpler  than  those  of  any  other  comber;  it  rarely 
requires  resetting,  and  all  its  parts  are  easily 
accessible. 

(g)  There  is  no  leather  covering  required  on 
the  nipper,  which,  once  set,  cannot  be  made  to 
touch  the  cylinder. 

(h)  To  change  from  long  to  short  cotton  takes 
less  than  an  hour. 

In  addition  to  the  foregoing  advantages,  the  following 
details  may  be  noted  : — 

Dimensions. — It  occupies  the  same  space  as  a  Heil- 
mann  Comber  of  the  same  number  of  heads  and  width  of 
lap,  but  stands  4  inches  lower  for  convenience  of  the 
tenter. 

The  headstock  is  made  extra  strong  and  cast  in  a 
solid  piece  to  prevent  vibration. 

The  stands  for  each  head  are  mounted  on  a  beam  of 
a  very  strong  section. 

The  bearings  of  the  cylinder,  nipper  shafts  and  de- 
taching rollers  are  split  bushes  of  standard  size,  easily  and 
cheaply  renewable  when  necessary. 

The  nipper  pivots  are  plain  studs  in  cast-iron  bushes 
renewable  at  a  trifling  cost. 

The  brush  and  doffer  shafts  can  be  lifted  straight 
out  without  disturbing  any  other  part  of  the  machine. 

The  front  plate  extends  backward  to  the  detaching- 
rollers,  completely  covering  the  callender  shaft. 

A  convenient  weight-relieving  motion  obviates  the 
lifting  of  the  detaching  roller  weights  by  hand. 

A  selvage  guide  between  the  detaching  rollers  insures 
perfect  selvages  instead  of  trailing,  ragged  ones. 

The  drawing  head  is  made  with  four  rows  of  rollers 
supphed  with  the  ordinary  stationary  flat  clearer  or  the 
"  Ermen  "  if  desired. 

Stop  motions  can  be  applied  to  each  sliver  as  it 
leaves  the  collecting  tin,  which  stops  the  machine  when  the 
thickness  of  the  sliver  becomes  too  heavy  or  too  light ;  also 
a  coller  stop  motion  for  automatically  stopping  the 
machine  when  an  end  fails  or  is  not  up  to  the  average 
weight  required.  A  full  can  or  measuring  motion  is 
sometimes  applied  which  automatically  stops  the  machine 
when  any  given  length  of  sliver  has  been  delivered. 

90 


91 


Waste  arrangements. — We  supply,  when  ordered,  a. 
waste  shaft  for  receiving  the  waste  and  forming  same  into  a 
lap  in  place  of  allowing  it  to  drop  into  the  ordinary  waste  bin. 
Another  method  is  to  have  movable  bobbins  around  which  the 
lap  is  formed,  each  bobbin  receiving  the  waste  from  two  heads. 

Waste  tins. — We  can,  if  desired,  supply  the  circular- 
waste  tin  for  the  lap-forming  arrangement,  or  the  ordinary 
waste  tin  used  when  the  waste  is  delivered  in  a  loose  state^ 


No.  1 


We  are  also  licensees  for  the  Roth  Patent  Aspirator, 

which,  working  in  conjunction  with  the  brush,  replaces  the 
doffers  and  doffing  combs  by  a  perforated  tube  and  damper, 
acting  on  the  same  principle  as  the  scutcher  cage.     A  small 

92 


fan  placed  under  the  headstock,  driven  from  the  driving- 
shaft,  provides  the  draft,  which  is  only  slight;  see  illustrations 
on  pages  113  and  117. 


No.   2. 

The  advantage  of  this  apparatus  is  that  it  not  only 
collects  the  waste  from  the  brush  but  also  all  the  fly  from  other 
parts  of  the  comber,  and  keeps  the  room  clean.  So  much  is 
this  the  case  that  it  is  never  necessary  to  stop  for  cleaning 

93 


except  at  the  week-end  to  clean  the  machinery  parts.     The 
production  of  the  machine  is  mcreased  about  8  per  cent   bv 

^tra-^n^achrr^  ^'"^^'  ^^^  ^  ^^^^  ^  ^^^  ^^  ^^ - 

mn.t^^^'®""~^^'^   '^"^^   °f  st'-^Ple  that  can   be  combed  is 
much    more    extensive    than    on    the    HeHmann    machine. 


No.    3, 


Owmg  to  the  manner  of  making  the  piecing,  cotton  with  a 
length  of  staple  of  i-inch  can  be  combed  and  a  uniform  fleece 
produced,  so  well  amalgamated  that  it  can  be  lifted  from  the 

94 


detaching  roller  and  laid  over  the  creel  without  rupture. 
Illustrations  taken  from  photographs  are  shown  of  three 
diflferent  staples,  as  the  fleece  leaves  the  front  roller  of  the 
draw  box,  looking  more  like  a  drawing  frame  sliver  than  a 
comber  sliver,  and  this  shows  the  excellent  piecing  which 
characterises  this  machine  and  makes  the  yarn  so  remarkable 
for  evenness  and  strength,  notwithstanding  the  small  per- 
centage of  waste  taken  out. 

The  work  of  the  Nasmith  Comber  may  be  classed  under 
three  heads : — 

1.  Fine  combing  proper,  when  it  does  the  same 
work  as  the  Heilmann.  In  this  case  not  more  than  twice 
the  production  of  the  Heilmann  for  the  same  quality  should 
be  attempted,  and  for  Sea  Island  cotton  not  more  than 
75  per  cent  more. 

2.  Medium  combing  where  high  production  and  low- 
waste  may  be  obtained. 

3.  Coarse  combing  to  take  the  place  of  fine  carded 
yarns  or  ordinary  carded  yarns.  In  this  case  special 
cylinders  and  top  combs  are  used  and  a  high  production 
attained  with  waste  from  5  to  8  per  cent.  The  yarn  must 
not  be  compared  with  real  combed  yarns,  but  is  better  than 
any  carded  yarn,  even  w^hen,  in  preparation  for  this  combing, 
the  card  production  is  pushed  to  its  limit  and  the  card  waste 
reduced  to  2i  per  cent.  For  this  class  of  work  1,000  pounds 
may  be  put  through  both  card  and  comber  weekly.  This 
high  production  and  low^  waste  opens  again  for  spinners  the 
■question  of  combing  for  ordinary  and  medium  yarns. 

The  illustration  shows  a  six-head  Nasmith  Comber, 
and  the  sectional  views  with  the  following  description  w^ill 
make  the  main  details  and  action  of  the  machine  clear  to 
the  reader.  Fig.  1  shows  a  complete  section  through  a  head. 
Fig.  2  shows  the  crank,  M,  on  the  end  of  the  cylinder  shaft, 
A,  for  rocking  the  nipper  shaft,  W.  The  peculiarity  of  this 
motion  is  the  slow  advance  of  the  nipper  tow^ards  the 
detaching  rollers,  allowing  maximum  time  for  the  detaching 
operation  and  the  quick  return.  The  motion  of  the  nipper 
is  continuous,  smooth,  and  quiet. 

Figs.  3  and  4  are  sections  showing  the  parts  at  the  close 
of  the  detacliing  period  and  during  combing  respectively. 
Fig.  5  shows  the  details  of  the  top  comb,  and  Figs.  A,  B, 
and  C  of  Fig.  6  show  the  position  of  the  parts  at  various 
points  of  the  stroke. 

95 


96 


The  combing  cylindep  has  17  rows  of  needles, 
no  fluted  segment  to  wear  the  brushes,  plain  ends 
without  bosses  or  set  screws,  and  is  completely 
enclosed. 

The  nipper,  driven  by  a  crank,  is  silent  and  self- 
contained,  with  fixed  lower  jaw  that  cannot  touch 
the  cylinder.  It  has  no  leather  covering,  closes 
gently  without  hammering,  with  little  tension  on 
the  springs  when  opening,  the  weight  coming  on 
gradually  as  it  closes.  It  swings  on  1-inch  studs 
3  inches  long,  rocking  in  cast-iron  bushes,  and 
never  requires  resetting. 


fOr  Wv^$^' 


'^Ai 


Fig.   2. 


The  nipper  shaft,  W,  Fig.  3,  is  rocked  to  and  fro  by  a 
crank,  Fig.  2,  and  is  connected  to  the  nipper  bridge,  S,  by 
the  arms,  W\  and  connecting  rods,  V  (two  to  each  nipper), 
with  adjusting  nuts,  V\  so  that  the  nipper  jaw^s  may  be  set 
parallel  to  and  at  the  proper  distance  from  the  steel  detaching 
roller,  D.  Once  all  the  nippers  are  correctly  set,  their 
distance  from  the  roller,  D,  may  be  altered  simultaneously 
by  the  screws,  a  and  h,  Fig.  2.  The  nipper  bridge,  S,  is 
bolted  at  each  end  to  an  upright,  N,  secured  to  a  stud,  N\ 
which  rocks   in   a  bush   carried  in  the  framing.     The  top 

97 


98 


nipper  arms  pivot  on  studs,  P\  carried  in  projections  cast 
on  the  bridge,  S.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  arm  a  cross  bar 
carries  a  bowl,  N^,  which  comes  in  contact  with  the  adjust- 
able incline,  J,  and  opens  the  nipper  as  it  moves  forward. 
When  the  nipper  moves  back  for  combing.  Fig.  4,  this  bowl 
leaves  the  incline,  J,  and  the  nipper  closes  under  the  influence 
of  springs  attached  to  the  lower  end  of  the  nipper  arms. 
There  is  little  pressure  on  the  springs  when  the  nipper  is 
opening,  but  a  strong  pressure  when  closed  during  combing. 
The\opening  and  closing  thus  takes  place  gently  and  without 
the  detrimental  hammering  blow  observable  in  the  Heilmann 
and  other  combers.  The  nipper  is  adjustable  to  the  needles 
by  set  screws,  T,  Fig.  4,  and  once  set  is  a  fixture  and  cannot 
be  made  to  touch  the  cylinder,  as  its  path  if  continued  in  both 
directions  never  intersects  the  circumference  of  the  cylinder. 


Fig.  4. 

The  feed  Pollep. — Each  nipper  carries  its  own  feed 
roller,  F,  Fig.  4,  which  is  adjustable  on  the  nipper  plate,  so 
that  its  distance  from  the  jaw  of  the  nipper  is  easily  set  to 
suit  the  length  of  the  fibre  operated  on.  The  roller  receives 
its  rotation  from  the  movement  of  the  nipper  through  a 
ratchet  and  pawl.  The  roller  turns  inside  a  stationary  bush, 
and  the  ratchet  lever  rocks  on  the  outside  of  the  bush,  so 


99 


there  is  no  contact  between  the  roller  and  ratchet  except 
through  the  pawl,  the  whole  being  enclosed  in  a  casing  to 
exclude  fluff  and  dust.  There  are  no  change  wheels,  the 
amount  of  feed  being  altered  by  the  simple  displacement 
of  a  stud. 

The  top  comb. — Fig.  5  shows  the  disposition  of  the 
top  comb,  C,  which  is  bolted  to  the  slot  in  the  arms,  C\ 
This  slot  and  set  screws,  C\  permit  an  adjustment  of  the 
angle  of  the  comb  wnthin  the  required  limits.  The  arms,  C\ 
are  pivoted  on  the  nipper  frame  at  C'\  and  consequently 
participate  exactly  in  the  reciprocating  motion  of  the  nipper. 
During  combing  the  weight  of  the  comb  rests  on  the  set 
screws,  C*,  which  regulate  the  depth  of  penetration  of  the 
comb.  When  the  nipper  goes  back  the  bowl  C^  comes  in 
contact  wMth  the  adjustable  bar,  I,  and  is  gradually  raised  to 
keep  the  comb  clean.  Thus  the  height  at  which  the  bar,  I, 
is  adjusted  determines  the  moment  or  time  when  the  top 
comb  enters  the  fleece,  and  the  set  screws,  C^,  the  depth  of 
penetration. 

It  will  be  noticed  from  the  foregoing  that  the  opening 
and  closing  of  the  nipper,  the  raising  and  lowering  of  the  top 
comb,  and  the  rotation  of  the  feed  roller  all  result  naturally 
and  in  the  simplest  manner  from  the  reciprocating  motion 
of  the  nipper  driven  by  a  simple  crank. 

The  detaching  rollers. — The  position  and  action  of 
the  steel  detaching  roller,  D,  Figs.  3,  4,  and  5,  is  identical 
with  that  of  the  Heilmann  machine,  except  that  the  rotation 
of  the  roller  continues  a  much  greater  time  during  each 
stroke  in  the  Nasmith  than  in  the  Heilmann.  The  surface 
speed  of  the  roller  never  exceeds  that  of  the  Heilmann  roller; 
it  only  takes  a  longer  time  to  perform  its  greater  arc  of 
revolution.  Again,  the  surface  speed  of  the  Helimann  roller 
must  coincide  exactly  with  that  of  the  fluted  cylinder,  and 
after  backing  off  it  nmst  acquire  this  speed  in  the  briefest 
possible  fraction  of  a  stroke.  The  leather  roller  never 
coming  into  contact  with  the  cylinder,  no  such  embarrassing 
restriction  exists  in  the  Nasmith  machine  and  the  rollers 
stop  and  start  gently,  the  cam  being  designed  to  start  and 
stop  the  sector  just  as  a  crank  would. 

The  leather  covered  detaching  roller,  D\  Figs. 
3,  4,  and  5,  never  comes  in  contact  with  the  cylinder,  but 
rests  simply  on  the  bottom  roller,  from 'which  it  receives  its 
rotary  motion,  and   in  addition  to  this  it  receives  a  bodily 

100 


movement  to  and  fro,  from  the  position  of  Fig.  3  to  that 
of  Fig.  4.  This  is  obtained  from  the  lever,  L,  keyed  on  its 
shaft,  and  operated  by  a  simple  eccentric  on  the  cylinder 
shaft  (not  shown).  The  connection  is  made  through  the  rod, 
X,  with  adjusting  screws,  M  M,  to  the  lever,  X\  and  the 
weight  hook,  X*. 


Fig.  5. 

Five  important  advantages  result  from  this  dis- 
position : 

1.  The  time  available  for  detaching  and  draw- 
ing through  the  top  comb  is  greatly  prolonged. 

2.  The  top  roller  is  as  easily  set  as  a  drawing 
head  roller,  doing  away  with  any  delicate  adjust- 
ment. 

3.  No  definite  and  fixed  surface  speed  of  the 
roller  is  imposed  and  a  smooth  cam  takes  the  place 
of  the  abrupt  notch  wheel  cam. 

4.  The  shock  and  deflection  of  the  leather 
roller  dropping  on  the  cylinder  under  the  influence 
of  weights  is  done  away  with,  and  a  25-pound  weight 
easily  works  a  10*-inch  lap  of  600  or  700  grains  per 
yard. 

5.  A  long  overlap  and  perfect  piecing  are 
obtained  even  with  |-inch  staple. 

101 


Action  of  the  machine. — Having  described  the 
details  of  the  machine,  we  may  follow  it  through  one  cycle 
of  operations.  Fig.  6,  A,  B,  C,  shows  the  main  organs  in 
three  positions.  The  first,  Fig.  A,  shows  the  needles  passing 
through  the  end  of  the  lap,  held  down  by  the  closed  nipper, 
which  is  now  in  its  rearward  position  (the  dead  point  of  the 
crank).  Before  the  fine  needles  have  passed  the  nipper  is 
already  moving  forward  in  the  same  direction  as  the  cylinder, 
thus  reducing  the  effective  speed  at  w^hich  the  needles  are 
passing  through  the  cotton  and  easing  the  strain  on  the  fibre. 
In  Fig.  B.  of  Fig.  6  the  needles  have  passed  and  the  nipper 
is  about  the  middle  of  its  path  toward  the  detaching  rollers. 
As  the  last  row  of  needles  passes  under  the  detaching  rollers 
the  latter  turn  backward,  and  owing  to  the  top  roller  leaning 
toward  the  cylinder  the  end  of  the  combed  fleece  thus 
delivered  backward  is  projected  into  the  space  between  the 
last  row  of  needles  and  the  plain  segment,  whose  front  edge 
strokes  the  fleece  close  against  and  under  the  bottom  roller, 
so  as  to  present  a  clean  surface  to  the  advancing  nipper  tuft 
for  piecing.  Meantime,  the  nipper  having  opened,  the  lap 
end  rises  automatically  and  points  directly  towards  the  nip 
of  the  rollers.  It  would  rise  higher,  but  is  met  by  the  falling 
top  comb  and  kept  in  proper  position.  The  detaching  rollers 
now  begin  to  turn  forward  and  seize  the  tips  of  the  fibres 
presented  by  the  advancing  nipper  and  pull  the  lap  end  into 
the  top  comb.  The  nipper  continues  to  advance,  but  with 
diminishing  speed  (approaching  the  dead  point  of  the  crank), 
thrusting  the  end  of  the  lap  gradually  into  the  nip  of  the 
rollers,  which  successively  seize  fresh  fibres  and  draw  them 
off"  through  the  top  comb.  The  top  roller  moves  away 
before  the  advancing  nipper  and  top  comb,  but  is  eventually 
overtaken  by  them  as  both  the  nipper  and  roller  arrive  at 
the  end  of  their  respective  paths;  this  is  best  seen  in  Figs.  5 
and  6.  The  rollers  continue  their  rotary  movement  an 
instant  longer  to  commence  the  separation,  which  is  com- 
pleted by  the  withdrawal  of  the  nipper  and  top  comb,  leaving 
a  short  combed  end  projecting  from  the  rollers,  and  the 
process  recommences. 

The  overlap  of  the  piecing  thus  obtained  is  about 
two  inches  as  compared  with  about  |  inch  on  a  Heilmann 
for  any  staple.  Further,  the  detachment  is  a  comparatively 
slow  and  continuous  operation,  compared  with  a  practically 
instantaneous  snatch  in  the  Heilmann,  as  both  leather  roller 

102 


and  fluted  segment  are  moving  at  full  speed  when  they  fall 
together,  whereas  the  rollers  in  the  Nasmith  are  only  starting 
up  slowly  when  they  seize  the  nipper  tuft.  Again,  the 
Heilmann  roller  drops  on  the  nipper  tuft  about  f  to  2  inch 
from  the  tip,  and,  so  to  speak,  in  the  quick  of  the  lap,  where 
it  draws  with  difficulty,  whereas  the  Nasmith  rollers  seize 
the  lap  by  the  extreme  tip,  where  it  draws  easily  and  with- 


out undue  strain.  The  Heilmann  rollers  have  to  complete 
the  s*eparation  without  assistance  from  the  nipper,  conse- 
quently much  of  their  forward  movement  is  unproductive, 
while  the  forward  motion  in  the  Nasmith  is  almost  entirely 
used  for  producing,  the  separation  being  completed  by  the 
retirement  of  the  nipper, 

103 


Weight  of  laps. — The  lOiin.  laps  may  weigh:  — 
For  superfine  work  from  Sea  Island,  13  to  18  dwts.  per  yard. 
For  medium  work  from  Florida,  18  to  22  dwts.  per  yard. 
Egyptian  and  American,  22  to  32  dwts.  per  yard. 
For  Sea  Island  and  light  laps  a  fine  cylinder  is  recommended, 
with  33  top  combs,  81  needles  to  the  inch.     For  Egyptian 
and  Long  American  the  standard  cylinder,  with  28  top  combs, 
66  needles  to  the  inch  is  used.    In  all  cases  the  top  comb 
needles  should  project  xeln.  from  the  comb  stock. 

Amount  of  feed. — Four  or  five  teeth  of  feed  may  be 
taken,  the  former  for  the  finer  work,  but  six  teeth  are  rarely 
practicable.  It  is  better  to  work  with  a  heavy  lap  and  light 
feed  than  a  light  lap  and  heavy  feed. 

The  waste  for  ordinary  work  may  vary  from  12  to  30 
per  cent.,  and  for  semi-combed  5  to  12  per  cent.,  according 
to  the  quahty  required.  The  quantity  is  under  complete  and 
easy  control,  and  may  be  altered  to  any  extent  in  a  few 
minutes.  The  chief  factor  in  determining  the  length  and 
consequently  the  amount  of  waste  is  the  distance  between 
the  nipper  and  the  steel  detaching  roller  when  the  nipper 
is  at  the  forward  end  of  its  path.  This  distance,  on  all 
the  nippeps,  may  be  simultaneouslv  altered  bv  screws  a  and 
b,  Fig.  2.  _ 

Double  combing  is  cheaply  done  with  this  machine 
owing  to  its  high  production,  and  the  second  combing  may 
take  3  to  8  per  cent,  of  waste. 

The  production  naturally  varies  as  in  other  combers, 

according  to  the  quality  of  work  required,  and  depends  largely 

on  the  nature  of  the  cotton.     Good  work  with  fairly  carded 

Egyptian  cotton  can  be  obtained  by  using  a  25  dwt.  lap  and 

5  teeth  of  feed.     At  100  beats  per  minute,  with  15  percent. 

of  waste,  rather  over  8001bs.  can  be  got  from  a  six-headed 

machine  in  50  hours.     The  general  production  formulae  are 

as  follows  : — 

P  =  The  pounds  produced  per  head  per  hour  continuous  work. 

R  =  The  number  of  teeth  of  the  lap  ratchet  taken  each  stroke. 

W  =  The  weight  in  grains  of  a  yard  of  lap  after  deducting  the 

waste.  * 

X  =  The    teeth    in    the    change   wheel   on    the   lap   ratchet. 

(Usually  42.) 

lOOX  Rx  XX35X2'75X3T4X60XWXRXXX  W 

P  = 

75  X  80  X  47  X  36  X  7000  3918'9 

104 


R  X  W 

or  if  X  is  the  usual  42— =   P 


W 


Then  if  R  is  4  teeth 


23-3 


93"307 


f  R  is  5 


W 


18*66 


THE  GEARING   AND  THE   DRAWING    HEAD. 

Plan  on  page  109. 

To  determine  the  total  draft  between  the  lap 
and  the  sliver, 

If  W  =  the  weight  of  a  yard  of  lap  in  grains,  after  deducting 
the  loss  in  waste, 
N   =  the  number  of  laps  up  or  number  of  heads, 
S  =  the  grains  in  a  yard  of  sliver, 

W  X  N 

Then  the  total  draft,  T  = ■ 

S 
To  determine  the  draft  wheel  to  give  any  re- 
quired total  draft, 
Let  R  —  the  number  of  teeth  of  the  lap  ratchet  taken  every  nip, 

C  =  the  number  of  teeth  in  the  cross  shaft  wheel, 
And  D==  the  number  of  teeth  required  in  the  draft  w^heel. 

In  calculatmg  the  total  draft,  consider  the  lap  roller  as 
driving  through  to  the  coiler  top,  then  for  No.  4  drawing 
heads  we  have 


draft ; 


47  X  80  X   75   X  C  X   88  X   2T^6m._  ^  The  total 
35   X  42  X   K   X   D  X   63   X  2fin. 
201  X  C 

thus =  D    (The  draft  wheel). 

RT 


From  this  a  constant  is  determined  for  all  values  of  C 
and  R.     The  former  is  60,  66  or  77,  and  the  latter  4  or  5. 


Teeth  of 
Feed. 

Cross  Shaft  Wheels. 

60 

66                             77 

4 

3015 

3318 

3870 

5 

2412 

2652 

3095 

The  numbers  given  above  divided  by  the  total  draft 
gives  the  draft  wheel. 


105 


Example  :  With  six  laps  up  weighing  25  dwts.  per 
yard  and  deducting  15  per  cent,  for  waste  with  50  grains 
per  yard  in  the  sliver,  the  total  draft  would  be 

510  X   6 

T  = -6r2 

50 

Then,  if  66  be  on  the  cross  shaft  and  5  teeth  of  feed  are 
taken  each  stroke  on  the  feed  ratchet,  the  constant  from  the 
table  is  2652,  and  the  draft  wheel  is 

2652 

=  43  nearly. 

61.2 

In  smarting  a  machine  put  the  proper  draft  wheel  on, 
calculated  as  above,  then  get  the  draft  on  the  table  as' low  as 
possible  by  the  wheel  A.  The  callender,  being  fluted,  causes 
this  wheel  to  vary  according  to  the  Aveight  of  sliver,  a  lighter 
sliver  requiring  a  larger  wheel.  Then  adjust  the  tension  in 
the  tin  between  the  detaching  roller  and  the  callender  by 
changing  the  speed  wheel  B  if  necessary.  At  index  8  the 
fleece  should  be  just  tight  without  stretching.  There  should 
be  as  little  draft  as  possible  between  the  detaching  roller 
and  the  draw  box. 

In  No.  3  drawing  head  the  cross  shaft  wheel  is  always 
77,  and  in  altering  the  draft  both  the  coiler  wheel  C  and  the 
draft  wheel  D  must  be  changed.  Both  must  have  the  same 
number  of  teeth.  The  constants  are : — With  4  teeth  of 
feed,  3234;  5  teeth  of  feed,  2585. 

They  are  determined  as  follows  for  liin.  front  roller, 
and  42  on  the  feed  ratchet : — 

47  X  80  X   75  X  48  X   B  X   70  X   2in. 


-T 


3617  X  B 
thus 


R  X  T 
and  the  draft  wheel  is  half  the  coiler  wheel. 

Conclusion. — The  life  of  every  machine  depends  on 
systematic  attention  to  the  cleaning,  oiling,  and  adjustment 
of  its  parts.  All  the  pivots  about  the  nipper,  the  steel  detach- 
ing rollers,  the  gearing,  the  cylinder  and  brush  shafts  should 
be  systematically  oiled  weekly.  The  pivots  of  the  leather 
covered  detaching  rollers  should  be  wiped  daily  and  oiled  a 

106 


COMBER    GEARING    PLANS. 

3    No.  1  DRAWING  HEAD 


l4     FRONT     HOllER      wmE 
^      ?-0 


Mo.  2    DRAWING   HEAD. 


•  1  tnjM   ROwi.t'' 


lUUUliiUJ 


Full  plans  of  Nos  3  and  4  drawing  heads  and  plans  of 
Nos  1  and  2  drawing  heads  are  given,  but  the  constants  for 
the  two  latter  are  not  so  simple  as  above,  owing  to  the 
variable  wheel  B  entering  as  a  factor 


107 


108 


109 


very  little  by  the  finger  dipped  in  oil.  These  rollers  have  not 
a  higher  speed  than  those  of  the  Heilmann  machine,  but  con- 
tinue turning  as  long  again  each  nip. 

Keep  the  top  combs  and  detaching  rollers  in 
good  condition  and  exactly  adjusted  and  good  work 
will  invariably  result. 

Pulleys. — lOin.  X  3in.  dia.  are  usually  supplied  with 
the  machine  unless  ordered  larger.  Height  of  driving  shaft 
from  floor  is  25in.  and  the  dia.  is  liin. 

[  335  Revs.  =  (86  nips)  for  Finest  Sea  Island. 


Speeds 


Weight. 

4   Heads  lO^in 


350 

370 
390 


Florida  Cottons. 

Egyptian  and  Best  American. 

Coarse  Work. 


(90     ,,   ) 

(95     ,.   ) 

(100     ,.   ) 

Power. — Six-head  machine,  |  H.P.  without  aspirator 
Dimensions  and 

Length  Width 

10ft.   llin.  3ft.  6in. 

12ft.      7in.  3ft.   6in. 

14ft.     3in.  3ft.   6in. 


(Approximate  Weight) 
Gross  Net 


lap 


lO^in. 
lOjin. 


37  cwts.     28  cwts. 
42  cwts.     32^  cwts. 
47  cwts.     37  cwts. 


(& 


1 


1 


Automatic  Roller  Truing  Machine. 

This  machine  was  specially  designed  for  the  truing-up 
of  all  kinds  of  damaged,  uneven,  or  worn  leather  coverings 
on  top  rollers,  and  to  produce  a  perfectly  level  surface 
where  combing  machines  are  employed  this  machine  is  in- 
dispensable as  it  is  imperative  that  the  leather  covered 
detaching  rollers  should  be  absolutely  true  from  end  to  end 
otherwise  the  piecing  of  the  sliver  is  bad  and  much  waste 
is  made.  This  machine  produces  a  perfectly  true  roller  and 
prolongs  the  life  of  the  leather  covering. 


110 


Collecting  and  Drawing  Waste  from 
Combing  Machines. 

ROTH'S  SYSTEM. 

Consists  in  substituting  a  perforated  drum  for  the 
dofifers,  the  waste  drawn  from  the  revolving  brush  by  suction. 
A  fan  placed  underneath  the  comber  carries  the  waste  from 
the  revolving  brush  to  the  perforated  drum.  The  drum 
revolves  slowly,  and  the  waste  is  led  in  the  form  of  a  fleece 
into  boxes  or  may  be  deposited  on  to  a  conveyor  and 
delivered  into  a  coiler. 

Advantages. — Increased  production,  because  the  com- 
ber is  kept  running  all  the  time.  The  cleaning  of  the  comber 
only  requires  to  be  done  about  once  a  week  instead  of  four 
or  five  times  per  day  without  this  apparatus.  The  circular 
combs  and  brushes  are  always  clean  and  never  get  filled  up. 
The  waste  is  of  more  value  as  it  is  not  knotty.  No  dust  can 
fly  about  the  machine  nor  in  the  room. 


Ill 


112 


JOHN   HETHERINGTON  &   SON*S 

Patent  System  of  Collecting  and  Drawing 
Comber  Waste. 

The  waste  is  stripped  from  the  doffers  in  the  ordinary 
Avay  and  is  deposited  in  the  form  of  a  fleece  on  to  a  travelhng 
conveyor,  and  after  being  drawn  through  a  series  of  rollers 
is  deposited  in  the  form  of  a  sliver  into  a  can  through  a 
coiling  arrangement. 

The  sliver  thus  produced  may  be  used  for  mixing  one 
or  more  cans  with  other  cotton  at  the  Drawing  Frames,  or 
it  may  be  used  as  a  special  preparation. 

Advantages. — Saving  of  wages  by  using  the  waste  as 
it  comes  direct  from  this  apparatus. 

The  waste  can  be  used  without  having  to  pass  a  second 
time  through  Openers,  Scutchers,  and  Cards,  which  process 
entails  a  loss  of  about  15  per  cent. 

With  this  apparatus  the  fibres  are  not  weakened,  and 
can  be  spun  up  to  16's,  or  higher,  according  to  the  class 
of  cotton. 

No  waste  boxes  nor  waste  lapping  arrangement  required, 
and  therefore  greater  cleanliness  is  obtained. 


113 


^^s*****^^^ 
^»' 


u 

H 
CO 

< 
cr 

UJ 

O 
O 

o 

z 

< 

Q 
Q 

z 
< 

a 

z 

H 
O 

u 


114 


JOHN   HETHERINGTON   &   SON'S 

Patent  Waste  Conveyor  in  conjunction  with 
Roth's   Aspirator. 

The  waste  delivered  by  the  rotatino^  cyHnder  of  the 
Aspirator  is  carried  by  a  travelling  conveyor  to  a  series  of 
consolidating  and  drawing  rollers,  where  it  is  condensed  into 
any  given  weight  of  sliver  and  delivered  into  a  can  through 
a  coiling  arrangement. 

Advantages. — Saving  of  wages  by  using  the  waste 
as  it  comes  direct  from  this  apparatus. 

The  waste  can  be  used  without  having  to  pass  a  second 
time  through  Openers,  Scutchers  and  Cards,  ^vhich  process 
entails  a  loss  of  about  15  per  cent. 

With  this  apparatus  the  fibre  is  not  weakened,  and  can 
be  spun  up  to  16's,  or  higher,  according  to  the  class  of  cotton. 

No  waste  boxes  nor  waste  lapping  arrangement  required, 
and  therefore  greater  cleanliness  is  obtained. 


113 


116 


Percentage  Balance  for  Comber  Waste, 


THIS    USEFUL    APPLIANCE    IS    THE    ESSENCE    OF 
SIMPLICITY    AND    ACCURACY. 


Any  unmeasured  length  of  combed  sliver,  within  the  limit 
that  can  be  accommodated,  is  placed  on  the  left-hand  side 
of  the  balance,  and  the  waste  resulting  from  it  on  the  right- 
hand  side  ;  the  pointer  will  then  indicate  a  figure  which  will 
be  the  percentage  of  waste  taken  out  in  the  combing  process. 

The  ease  and  rapidity  with  which  the  weighing  can  be 
made  by  simply  placing  a  length  of  combed  sliver  on  one 
side,  and  its  waste  on  the  other,  ensures  much  more  frequent 
tests  and  a  corresponding  increase  of  regularity  in  production. 

The  scale  is  clearly  cut  in  1  per  cent,  divisions  and  the 
result  can  be  easily  read  to  4  per  cent.  It  is  advisable  to  see 
that  the  case  is  set  on  a  level  base,  and  the  balance  should 
be  carefully  regulated  by  placing  a  small  object  or  weight  on 
the  left-hand  side  and  then  adjusting  the  two  top  regulating 
screws  until  the  pointer  is  opposite  the  first  mark  on  the 
index  plate.  The  balance  is  made  of  brass  with  a  steel 
pointer  and  arms,  and  is  enclosed  in  a  polished  baywood  case.. 


117 


118 


Improved  Drawing  Frame, 


The  accompanying  illustrations  show  two  elevations 
and  gearing  of  the  machine,  together  with  sections  and 
details  of  various  improvements.  The  machine  has  been 
completely  overhauled,  and  many  improvements  dis- 
covered during  the  course  of  a  long  practical  experience  are 
embodied  m  it.  All  the  parts  are  made  interchange- 
able, and  each  part  is  provided  with  a  letter  or  numeral  so 
that  in  case  of  breakdown  the  necessary  renewals  can  be 
ordered  with  the  assurance  that  they  will  be  sent  according 
to  order  and  fit  in  place  correctly. 

The  chief  advantages  of  our  Improved  Drawing 
f"rame  consist  of  the  following:— 

Beams  are  made  extra  strong,  planed  on  three  sides, 
and  supported  at  the  ends  with  strong  frame  ends. 

The  stands  carrying  the  callender  rollers,  the  drawing 
rollers,  and  the  feed  rollers   are  cast  in  one  piece,  and  each 

119 


set  is  milled  at  the  same  time  on  the  same  machine,  so  as 
to  ensure  absolute  alignment  of  all  the  rollers.  The  steps 
in  the  stands  are  loose  brasses  which  can  be  easily  renewed 
at  any  time,  and  each  line  of  rollers  can  be  set  independently 
of  the  others.  The  bearings  for  the  stop  motion  shafts  and 
for  the  sffaft  driving  the  coiler  motions  are  provided  with 
removable  caps,  so  that  the  shafts  can  be  lifted  out  and  do 
not  require  to  be  drawn  out  at  the  end  of  the  frame. 

The  gearing  is  all  placed  at  one  end,  and  only  one 
change  wheel  is  required  to  be  altered  in  changing  the  draft. 
(See  gearing,  page  132). 

Spring  weight  hooks  are  supplied  for  the  dead 
weights  on  the  front  line  of  rollers,  enabling  us  to  run  the 
front  roller  quicker  than  would  otherwise  be  the  case  with- 
out the  roller  jumping.  The  leather  covering  of  the  top 
rollers  lasts  longer  with  this  arrangement  than  with  ordinary 
dead  weighting. 

The  fluted  rollers  are  made  single  boss  so  that  the 
fleece  presents  only  two  selvedges,  and  fly  and  waste  is  thus 
avoided. 

Top  rollers  with  loose  ends  are  also  supplied  when 
required,  and  the  weight  hooks  hang  on  the  loose  bush  at 
the  end  of  the  roller  instead  of  on  the  running  roller.  The 
advantage  of  the  loose  ends  over  the  loose  boss  roller  is 
that  the  roller  itself  is  solid  and  the  ends  run  in  loose  bushes, 
each  having  good  surfaces  for  lubrication,  and  which  can 
easily  be  oiled,  thus  reducing  friction  to  a  minimum. 

Metallic  rollers. — For  certain  classes  of  work  these 
rollers  have  advantages,  if  special  care  is  taken  to  find  the 
correct  settings  for  the  particular  length  of  staple  employed. 
The  result  is  increased  production  and  elimination  of  the 
trouble  and  expense  in  connection  with  leather-coyered 
top  rollers. 

Diameters  of  rollers. — In  filling  up  the  specification 
forms  for  drawing  frame  rollers  care  must  be  taken  that  the 
distance  between  the  centres  of  the  first  and  second  rollers 
just  exceeds  the  length  of  the  staple  of  the  cotton  proposed 
to  be  used,  and  suitable  diameters  arranged  to  give  this^ 
distance.  A  good  rule  to  follow  for  the  second  and  third 
roller  distances  is  to  allow  an  extra  iin.,  and  a  iin. 
for  the  third  and  fourth  rollers  ;  any  variation  to  the  above 
can  easily  be  arranged  for  if  clearly  set  down  on  the 
specification  forms. 

120 


The  following  combination  of  rollers  will  give  an  idea 
of  the  diameters  of  rollers  used  when  working  different 
kinds  of  cotton  : — 


Cottons 

Bottom  Rollers 

Top  Rollers 

China  and  Indian  ] 

1 

i 

Ik 

Ih  dia. 

1  dia.  uncovered 

f  or    3I  dia.  uncovered 

( 

H 

1^ 

H 

li  .. 

1  .,  1^     „ 

A.merican - 

H 

H 

H 

li  .. 

1  ,.  1^     ,. 

1 

n 

n 

H 

li  .. 

ItolJ       -. 

li 

n 

U 

If  .- 

l^orli   .. 

li 

H 

li 

li   ., 

IJ     ..   li  .. 

Egyptian     and 

Sea  Island    ...  i 

li 
1^ 

li   .. 

li  dia.  uncovered 
li     .. 

li 

li 

li 

li  ., 

li     .. 

V 

U 

IS 

14 

H    .. 

I5  or  If  dia.  uncovered 

Rollers  weights. — For  ordinary  rollers  we  usually 
supply  two  weights,  each  of  221bs.  for  F.R.  and  171bs.  for 
2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  rollers.  For  metallic  rollers  we  supply 
lOlbs.  for  1st,  2nd,  and  3rd  rollers  and  121bs.  for  the  4th  roller. 


FRONT    TUMBLER 


WE^HT    PFUCVIMq     MOTION 
C       TOOTH    CAM5   F03  PAISINC  PUATE. 


pj      PLATE    FOO    RAlSlNt;    WEli;HT5 

TnRouc;H   LirriNc;  roda 
El     uirTiNq   RODS 

V       5LOT    TO   /VU-OW    PLATE    D 
TO     RISE 


Section  of  Drawing  Frame. 
121 


A  weight  relieving  motion  is  applied  to  take  the 
weight  off  the  top  rohers  when  the  machine  is  left  standing 
for  any  length  of  time,  so  as  to  prevent  the  top  rollers  being 
marked  or  flattened  by  the  flutes  of  the  bottom  rollers. 

We  have  recently  applied  for  a  patent  for  a  new 
weight  relieving  motion.  The  object  of  this  new  motion 
is  to  lift  the  weights  in  as  easy  and  even  manner  as  possible, 
and  it  is  so  arranged  that  it  does  not  disturb  the  correct 
position  of  the  weight  hooks  or  wires  when  the  rollers  have 
to  be  taken  out  for  cleaning,  &c.  To  prevent  this  the 
ordinary  oblong  nuts  on  the  wires  are  discarded  and  a  nut 
is  employed  having  a  set  screw  attached  at  the  side  ;  this 
screw  is  to  lock  the  nut  on  the  screwed  wires  after  the 
correct  position  is  found,  and  thus  making  it  impossible  to 
accidentally  alter  the  position  of  the  screwed  regulating  wnres 
when  changing  the  rollers  or  removing  them  for  cleaning,  &c. 
The  weights  supplied  with  this  motion  are  one  each  of 
441bs.  on  F.R.  and  341bs.  for  2nd,  3rd,  and  4th  rollers. 

Traverse  motion  with  special  flexible  brass  sliver 
guide,  adjustable  to  the  thickness  of  the  sliver,  prevents 
overlapping  or  too  wide  separation  of  the  slivers  on  enter- 
ing the  rollers. 

Clearers. — We  supply  usually  the  ordinary  stationary 
felt-covered  clearer,  with  polished  steel  cover  to  each 
delivery,  hinged  to  suitable  fixings. 

Ermen's  clearer  can  also  be  supplied  if  required. 
This  is  an  endless  felted  cloth  driven  at  a  positive  speed 
and  automatically  stripped  by  a  comb. 

The  stop   motion  spider  shafts,  front  and  back,  are 

6,  which,  so  long  as  the 
shafts  turn  easily,  is 
kept  in  gear  by  the 
spring  E  attached  to 
counterpoise  D.  When 
the  shafts  are  stopped 
by  the  falling  of  a 
tumbler   the   clutch   is 

SIDE  VIEW  OF  STOP  MOTION.        r^unt^b  ns' 

ing  lifts  the  bar  B  out  of  the  notch  in  which  it  rests,  and  allows 

the  spiral  spring  F  to  throw  the  strap  on  to  the  loose  pulley. 

The  back  stop  motion  tumbler  pivots  on  the  upper 

knife  edge  of  the  bar  O,  Fig.  9,  which  is  a  fixture.     The 


driven  by  the  incline  clutch 

SPIDEB   SH/i 


FIG.  6 . 


122 


lower  end  of  the  tumbler  just  passes  under  the  bar,  and  when 

the  tumbler  falls  this  offers  a  solid  resistance. 

machine  is  at  work  the  weight  of  the  sliver 

keeps  the  upper  end  of  the  tumbler  against 

the    bar   O,   which  can  be   adjusted   in   the 

direction  of  its  breadth  so  that  the  lower  end 

of    the    tumbler    just    clears    the    revolving 

spider,  and  the  slightest  displacement  of  the 

tumbler  stops  the  frame. 

The  front  stop  motion  can  be  ad- 
justed   with    great    nicety,    acting    when    a 

sliver    is    too   heavy,   as    when    a    piece    of 

clearer  waste  comes  forward,  and  also  when  a  sliver  is  too 

light,  as  when  a  roller  lap  occurs. 

The  Trumpet   E,  Figs.  7  and  8,  pivots  on  two  pointed 

projections  cast  on  its  underside,  and  carries  a  pendant  K  at 

the  back  hanging  free. 
When  the  machine  is 
working  the  trumpet 
E  is  drawn  down  at 
the  front  till  the  pro- 
jection at  the  end  of 
the  pendant  K  meets 
the  underside  of  the 
lever  L,  which  is  pre- 
vented from  rising  by 
the  balance  weight   P, 

which  can  be  adjusted  nearer  to  or  further  from  the  pendant 

to  suit  different  thicknesses  of  sliver,  but  if  the  trumpet  gets 

stopped  by  a  piece  of  clearer  waste  or  too  heavy  a  sliver, 


Fig.   8. 

123 


from  whatever  cause  arising,  the  resistance  of  the  weight  P 
is  overcome,  and  the  left-hand  end  of  the  lever  L  is  thrown 
down  into  the  spider  N,  Fig.  8,  stopping  the  machine.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  the  sliver  is  too  light,  the  trumpet  E  falls 
back  under  the  influence  of  the  pendant  K,  which  then 
engages  in  the  right-hand  spider  N\  also  stopping  the  frame. 
Full  can  stop  motion. — This  motion  is  arranged  to 
stop  the  machine  after  any  desired  length  of  sliver  has  been 
delivered,  or  when  the  can  is  full,  and  to  prevent  the  re- 
starting of  the  machine  until  the  full  can  is  exchanged  for 
an  empty  one. 


Electric  stop  motion. — ^The  primary  object  of  this 
patent  is  to  simplify  the  mechanism  when  applied  to 
stopping  the  machine  automatically  upon  the  sliver  coming 
through  too  light  or  too  heavy.     This  it  effects  by  dispensing 

124 


with  the  ordinary  split  wheels  usually  employed  for  trans- 
mitting motion  from  the  back  to  the  front  callender  rollers. 
We  adopt  a  front  callender  roller  long  enough  to  serve  six  or 
more  deliveries,  which  make  up  one  head  ;  and  the  back 
roller  we  make  of  one  diameter  throughout.  This  alteration, 
with  the  other  parts  affected,  is  clearly  illustrated  in  the  two 
views    given    herewith,    Figs.    1    and    2,    which    show    the 


Fig.   1 


callender  rollers,  the  top  plate  of  cover,  and  the  ordinary 
balanced  bell-mouthed  trumpet,  which  is  pivoted  and  forms 
part  of  an  electric  circuit.  In  connection  with  the  latter  is 
applied  a  tumbler,  which,  when  the  sliver  is  coming  through 
regularly,  rests  normally  clear  of  a  rod  that  also  forms  part 
of  the  electric  circuit.  Should  a  thin  or  light  part  of  the 
sliver  present  itself  to  the  trumpet,  the  front  end  rises  and 


causes  the  tumbler  to  come  into  contact  with  the  rod 
mentioned,  and  in  so  doing  completes  the  electric  circuit  and 
stops  the  machine.  On  the  other  hand,  when  the  sliver  is 
too  thick  and  heavy,  the  stop  motion  is  actuated  by  the  aid 
of  a  projection  formed  on  the  tumbler,  which  normally 
rests  below  a  balanced  pivoted  lever.  One  end  of  this  lever 
rests  near  but  normally  clear  of  the  rod,  and  the  other  end 
is  provided  with  an  adjustable  weight.  The  parts  are  so 
arranged  that  when  the  trumpet  is  drawn  down  by  the  extra 
weight  of  the  sliver  the  tumbler  is  raised,  and  the  projection 
thereon  comes  under  and  lifts  the  weighted  end  of  the 
balanced  lever,  thus  bringing  its  other  end  into  contact  with 
the  rod,  which  completes  the  circuit  and  stops  the  machine. 

Application  to  existing  machines. — We  have  so 
designed  the  parts  which  constitute  the  above  electric  stop 
motion  that  it  can  be  applied  to  existing  drawing  frames  at 
a  comparatively  small  cost. 

Single  preventer. — Without  this  arrangement  the 
back  roller  must  raise  the  sliver  from  the  bottom  of  the 
can  and  drag  it  across  the  stop  motion  tumblers,  so  that  the 


Fig.   1 


Fig.  2- 


rupture  of  the  sliver  almost  invariably  takes  place  close  to 
the  back  roller,  and  the  weight  of  the  broken  end  resting  on 
the  tumbler  retards,  if  it  does  not  completely  prevent  the 
action  of  the  stop  motion,  and  the  other  has  already  passed 
into  the  rollers  before  the  machine  is  stopped. 

To  obviate  this  defect  we  apply  an  extra  feed  roller, 
seen  in  the  above  sketch,  placed  over  the  centre  of  the  cans 
and  a  little  above  them,  thus  reducing  the  danger  of  stretch- 

126 


ing  delicate  slivers.  The  sliver  being  thus  fed  to  the  back 
roller  over  the  stop  motion,  which  lies  between  the  two 
rollers,  no  rupture  can  take  place  unless  before  the  feed 
roller,  consequently  the  broken  end  of  the  sliver  never  even 
reaches  the  tumbler  before  the  machine  is  at  a  standstill  (it 
is  useless  lo  introduce  a  roller  between  the  stop  motion  and 
the  back  roller).  A  great  advantage  of  our  system  is  that 
the  attendant  has  both  hands  free  when  piecing,  one  to  put 
up  the  sliver  and  the  other  to  set  on  the  machine  ;  the  top 
roller  never  requires  to  be  lifted.  Owing  to  the  form  given 
to  the  bracket  I,  Fig.  2,  which  carries  the  roller,  the  sliver 
then  passes  naturally  and  of  its  own  accord  under  the  roller. 

Coiling  motion. — Some  time  ago,  seeing  the  desir- 
ability of  introducing  a  Drawing  Frame  standing  lower  than 
the  ordinary  one,  so  that  it  might  be  more  easily  within  the 
reach  of  the  operatives  of  small  stature,  we  introduced  the 
arrangement  as  described  below ;  but  as  this  modification 
may  not  be  generally  known  to  spinners  we  think  the 
occasion  opportune  for  drawing  attention  to  same,  and  shall 
be  glad  at  any  time  to  show  frames  of  this  particular  design 
to  anyone  interested. 

The  improvement  consists  of  a  cast-iron  plate  fastened 
to  the  frame  end  and  spring  piece  and  resting  on  the  floor. 
This  plate  is  arranged  to  receive  the  trays  which  carry  the 
cans.  In  order  to  effect  this  without  cutting  the  floor  away, 
we  dispense  with  the  shaft  and  bevel  wheels  previously 
carried  below  the  coder  tray.  By  doing  this  it  allows  the 
tray  to  clear  the  floor  and  turn  freely.  The  tray  is  formed 
with  inclined  sides,  to  get  the  cans  readily  in  and  out  of 
position  without  injury.  On  the  outside  of  each  tray  is  a 
ring  of  teeth  into  which  works  a  spur  wheel  on  an  upright 
stud,  having  above  a  bevel  wheel  working  into  a  bevel 
wheel  on  a  driving  shaft  placed  over  the  trays.  This  shaft 
is  driven  by  an  upright  shaft  receiving  motion  from  a  shaft 
conveniently  placed  near  the  beams. 

Patent  coiling  motion. — General  y\dvantages  : 
1. — The  height  of  the  frame  is  greatly  reduced. 
2. — The  floor  requires  no  cutting  to  receive  the  frame  for 

carrying  the  cans. 
3. — A   fixed   arrangement,  supported  from   the   framing,  to 

prevent  the  can  motion  from  getting  out  of  the  correct 

position  to  the  coder  motion. 
4. — Easy  adjustment  of  can  to  coiler  motion. 

127 


Dimensions  of  Drawing  Frame. 


Deli- 
veries 
per 
head 


15in.  Gauge 


Ft.      In. 


Metres 


16in.  Gauge 


Ft.      In. 


Metres 


18in.  Gauge 


Ft,      In. 


Metres 


5 

6* 

1- 

6 

9* 

2' 

8 

0* 

2- 

9 

3* 

2- 

10 

6* 

3- 

11 

9* 

3- 

13 

Oi 

3- 

•689 
070 
•451 
•832 
•213 
•594 
•975 


5 

8* 

7 

0^ 

8 

H 

9 

8* 

11 

0* 

12 

4^ 

13 

8i 

740 
146 
553 
959 
365 
772 
173 


6 

7 

62 

9 

0* 

10 

6^ 

12 

0* 

13 

6* 

15 

oi 

1-842 
2-299 
2756 
3213 

3  670 
4-127 

4  889 


10 

3^ 

12 

9i 

15 

H 

17 

H 

20 

H 

22 

9i 

25 

H 

3130 
3  892 
4-654 
5-416 
6-178 

6  940 

7  702 


10  7i 

3 

232 

11  3i 

13  3J 

4 

044 

14  3J 

15  Hi 

4 

857 

17  3i 

18  7i 

5 

670 

20  31 

21  Si 

6 

483 

23  3| 

23  Hi 

7 

296 

26  31 

26  7J 

8 

109 

29  3J 

3435 
4  349 
5263 
6177 
7091 
8  005 
8^919 


15 

0 

18 

9 

22 

6 

26 

3 

30 

0 

33 

9 

37 

6 

4-572 
5715 
6858 
8  000 
9144 
10287 
11-430 


15 

6 

19 

6 

23 

6 

27 

6 

31 

6 

35 

6 

39 

6 

4^724 
5943 
7  162 
8-381 
9  600 
10819 
12^038 


16 

6 

21 

0 

25 

6 

30 

0 

34 

6 

39 

0 

43 

6 

5-028 

6-399 

7770 

9  144 

10512 

11-883 

13-259 


2 

19  81 

3 

24  8i 

4 

29  8| 

5 

34  81 

6 

,39  8| 

1   7 

44  8$ 

1   8 

49  8f 

6-014 
7^538 
9  062 
10  586 
12-110 
13 '634 
15158 


20 

41 

25 

81 

31 

01 

36 

4f 

41 

8S 

'47 

05 

52 

41 

6-217 
7^842 
9467 
11092 
12717 
14^342 
15967 


21 

8f 

6^ 

27 

81 

8^ 

33 

8i 

10^ 

39 

8'i 

12^ 

45 

8S 

13 

51 

8J 

15 

57 

81 

17- 

•623 
•451 
•282 
110 
940 
769 
598 


The  foregoing  lengths  are  for  frames  all  deHvering  on 
one  side  of  the  frame.  If  the  heads  are  set  alternately 
(zigzag)  lin.  must  be  added  for  2  or  3  heads  and  2in.  for 
4  heads.  If  alternate  and  Ermen  clearers  add  l|in.  for 
2  heads  and  3iin.  for  3  heads  instead  of  lin. 

When  fast  and  loose  driving  pulleys  are  supplied, 
4  inches  should  be  added  to  the  above  lengths. 


128 


Gearing. 

No.  of  Heads 

Cams  all  on  one  side 

Heads  Alternate 

1 

3ft.  Olin.  (0'"927) 

2 

5ft.  Siin.  (l'"508) 

5ft.     4iin.  (1"'533) 

3 

7ft.  6in.     (2"^287) 

7ft.     7in.     (2"^3]2) 

4 

9ft.  8fin.   (2™965) 

9ft.   lOfin.   (2'"990) 

If,  in  a  frame  of  3  heads,  with  a  passage  of  ISin.  is 
required,  2ft.  must  be  added  to  the  total  length  of  the  frame 
to  allow  for  the  passage  and  an  extra  frame  end. 

Width,  including  3  rows  of  cans,  4ft.  6in.  for  6  ends  up. 

4       ,,  „      5ft.  2in.    „    8 

Power  required.  —One  i.h.p.  for  every  14  deliveries. 


9 


IS^^^^^ 


L2a2aOa9^ 


Drawing  Frame  with  Beams  straight. 


'    vO.O.O.O, 


Drawing   Frame  with   Beams  alternate. 

Strapping. ---iMain  belt,   3in,   wide;    length  according 
to   circumstances.      Small   belt,    2in.    wide   to   front   roller, 
lift,  long  when  crossed  ;    10ft.   6in.  long  if  open. 

Weights. — Below  is  given  the  appro.ximate  weight  of 
a  16in.  gauge  frame. 

Gearing  •  1  head       ...        6  cwt.       3  heads     ...      14|  cwt. 
only       12  heads     ...      lOi   ,,.  4      „         ...      18*    „ 

Running  part  of  the  frame  per  delivery      ...  3  4   ,, 

Weights  per  delivery  ...  ...  ...  li  ,, 

When  "  Ermen's  "  clearers  are  supplied  add  171bs.  per 
delivery  to  the  running  part. 

When  frames  are  more  than  4  dehveries  per  head  add 
601bs.  per  head  for  the  mtermediate  spring  piece. 


129 


Pulleys.— 14in.  to  22in.  dia.  X  3in.  wide.  On  the 
driving  shaft  an  18in.  pulley  drives  a  12in.  on  the  F.R. 
The  height  of  the  driving  shaft  from  the  floor  is  12in.  and  the 
dia.  is  loin. 

Speeds. — For  American  Cotton.  Driving  shaft  235 
revs.  =  350  revs,  of  front  roller  usually  Ifin.  diameter. 

For  Egyptian  Cotton.  Driving  shaft  about  185 
revs.  =  275  revs,  of  front  roller  usually  Ijin.  diameter. 

For  Sea  Island  Cotton,  with  li  F.R.  Driving  shaft 
140  revs.  =  210  revs,  of  front  roller. 

Calculations,  Fopmulae,  Productions,  &c. 

Draft. — In  calculating  the  draft  it  is  convenient  to 
consider  the  back  roller  as  driving  the  front  roller.  In  our 
machine  there  is  a  slight  draft  between  the  l^in.  feed  roller 
and  the  back  roller,  as  also  between  the  front  roller  and  the 
2in.  callender.  The  drawing  rollers  may  be  anything  from 
liVin.  to  llin.,  and  standard  wheels  are  adopted  as  under 
for  various  combinations  of  rollers. 


Wheel  A  on 

Wheel  B  on 

feed  roller 

back  roller 

liin.  feed  working 

with  IxVin.  back  roller,    40 

...       33 

5J                                            >J 

l*in. 

44 

...       39 

5>                                            >> 

Uin. 

39 

...       38 

5»                                               JJ 

Ifin. 

36 

...       39 

5?                                               ?» 

liin. 

33 

...       39 

Similarly,  the 

wheels  connecting  the  front  rollers  and 

the  callender  are  :— 

- 

Wheel  on 

Wheel  C  on     Wheel  C  on 

the 

the 

the 

front  roller     callender 

callender 

2in.  callender  working  ItVin.  front      30 

1      /56 

o 

44 

55                                       55 

Uin.        „          30 

^.    52 

"5 

43 

liVn.     „          30 

g^    50 

40 

»)                                       55 

Uin.        „          30 

||   47 

36 

J>                                       55 

Ifin.    .    „          30 

o      43 

u 

34 

55                                          55 

liin.        „          30 

1    v39 

^ 

l32 

The    following 

table    of    constants 

for    various    corn- 

binations    of   sizes 

of    front    and    back 

rollers 

has    I 

)een 

calculated  from  the  above  data  and  that  given  in  Fig  1. 
Constants  are  given  for  the  draft  in  the  drawing  rollers  only, 
and  also  for  the  total  draft,  and  in  each  case  for  a  70  and 


130 


an  80  back  roller  wheel,  one  or  other  of  these  being  put  on 
according  to  the  relation  in  the  diameter  of  the  front  and 
back  rollers. 

Constant  Constant 

=  change  wheel,  or =  draft 

draft  change  wheel 

The  draft  between  the  back  roller  and  the  2nd  and  3rd 
respectively  is  fixed  for  any  particular  machine,  and  any 
change  made  in  the  pinion  only  alters  the  draft  between  the 
front  roller  and  the  second  roller. 


Diam.  of  Rollers. 

Constant  for  draft 

in  the 
fluted  rollers  only 

Constant  for  total  draft 

from  the  lin.  feed  roller 

to  the  2in.  callender 

Front 

Back 

Back  Roller  Wheels 

Back  Roller  Wheels 

70                    80 

70                    80 

In. 
ItV 

In. 
llV 

280 

320 

306              350 

ItV 

1* 

264 

302 

284 

325 

H 

li 

280 

320 

304 

347 -5 

n 

li 

252 

288 

276       I       316 

li 

u 

311 

356 

.326       1       373 

u 

li 

280 

320 

296       i       338 

li 

li 

254-6 

291 

268       1       .305 

If 

li 

342 

391 

357  5          408 

If 

li 

308 

352 

328 

372 

11 

11 

280 

320 

292-5 

334 

li 

11 

373 

427 

389 

445 

li 

li 

336 

384 

354-5 

405 

li 

11 

305 

349 

318 

364 

li 

li 

280 

320 

292 

334 

The  manner  of  calculating  the  draft  will  be  seen  from 

the   following,  which   will   be   understood    on   reference  to 

Fig*  1,  representing  a  plan  of  the  gearing. 

A  X  70  or  80  X  100  X  C  X  2in. 

Total  draft  = :; 

B  X  X25  X  48  X  liin. 

70  or  80  X  100  X  f 
Draft  in  the  4  rollers  =  — 

X  X  25  X  b 

where  /  is  the  diameter  of  the  front  rollers  and  b  that  of  the 
back  roller. 


131 


132 


The  following  are  also  useful    Formulae: 

Draft  X  hank  carding 


Hank  drawing 


Weight  of  drawing 


number  of  ends  up 

Weight  of  carding  x  No.  of  ends  up 


draft 


Draft 

Hank  carding 

Change  wheel 


No.  of  ends  up  x  hank  drawing 


hank  carding 
No.  of  ends  up  x  hank  drawing 

draft 
Desired  weight  X  change  wheel  on 


present  weight 
Present  hank  x  change  wheel  on 


Speed  of 
front  roller 


desired  hank 
Revs,  of  driving  shaft  X  dia.  of  bottom  pulley 


dia.  of  pulley  on  front  roller 
Production. — This  may  be  very  approximately 
determined  from  the  table  given  below,  which  is  based  on  the 
assumption  that  the  frame  is  standing  20%  of  the  engine  time. 
A  good  tenter  will  not  e.xceed  l?^?-;^  of  stoppage.  The 
numbers  in  the  table,  if  divided  by  the  hank  of  the  sliver, 
will  give  the  actual  production  in  lbs.  per  10  hours. 


Speed 

of 
Front 

Diameter  of  Front  Rollers 

1 

RoUer 

lin. 

iTRin. 

Uin. 

i|in. 

l^in. 

lAin. 

•275 

13-7 

14-58 

15-42 

17-13 

18-85 

20-56 

300 

14-95 

15-88 

16-82 

18-68 

20  55 

22-42 

.3-25 

16-2 

17-22 

18-22 

2025 

22-28 

24-3 

350 

17-45 

18 -53 

19  62 

21-8 

23-98 

26- 17 

375 

18-7 

1986 

21-02 

23-37 

257 

28-04 

400 

19-94 

21-18 

21-42 

24-92 

27-41 

299 

425 

21-18 

22-51 

23-82 

26-48 

29  12 

31-78 

450 

22-42 

23  83 

25-24 

2804 

30-85 

33-65 

475 

23-68 

25-16 

2663 

296 

32-56 

35-52 

500 

34-92 

26  5 

2804 

31-16 

34  28 

37-4 

Another  method  of  calculating  the  production  of  a 
drawing  frame  is  as  follows  : — 
Diam.xRevs.  of  front  roller  per  min.  x  3-1416  x  60min       yards  per 


36in. 


head  per  =  Y 
hour 


Y  X  grains  per  vard  of  finished  sliver         lbs.  per 

5 L ^ =  head  per  =  W 

7000  hour 

W  X  Number  of  working  hours  per  week  =  lbs.  per  head  per  week. 


133 


DRAWING   FRAME  SPECIFICATION. 

To  M 

Please  write  answers  to  the  questions  below,  and  return  the  form  as  soon  as 
possible,  retaining  the  Duplicate  one  for  your  own  use.     The  extras 
arc  l>ri)it((J  hi  Italics. 
JOHN    HETHEHINGTON    &    SONS    LTD..   MANCHESTER. 

No  IK— Should  these  works  be  closed,  wholly  or  in  part,  through  strikes,  lock-outs,  breakdowns, 

or  any  unforeseen  causes,  a  reasonable  delay  to  be  granted  to  the  makers. 
How  many  Frames  ?  How  many  Heads  to  each  Frame  ?  How  many 

Deliveries  in  each  Head  ? 
Will  vou  have  the  Heads  to  deliver  all  on  one  side  of  the  Beam,  or  set  alternately  ? 
To  stand  in  what  length  including  Driving  Pulleys  ?  What  gauge  will  you 

have— 14.  15.  16.  17,  18,  20  ?  (usually  16). 

(  For  Frames  to  deliver  all  on  one  side,  1  Head,    3ft.  Oin. ;  2  Heads,  5ft.    3jin. 

,,        .  ,,  .,  alternately  .,  3ft.  Oin.  ,,         5ft.    4|in. 

(^earuu.n  ^_  ^_  allononeside,  3  Heads,7ft.6in.:4Heads,9ft.    8|in. 

(  ,,  ,.  alternately  ,,  7ft.  7in.  ,,        9ft.  lOjin. 

Diameter  of  Fluted  Rollers  :—  Diameter  of  Top  Rollers  ;— 

•   to    . 

O*.  CO  fl 


<B  <-  b       S 


Fiont  in.  (usually  ij  or  1^)*         ■s'c 

fS'     ::  [(-uaiivis)        ||; 


Fourth  .,    (usually  li  or  Is) 


6;255 


s^co^d    ':■  -^'^ 


Third 
Fourth 


all 
1  inch. 


Are  we  to  cover  Top  Rollers  and  Clearers  ? 

If  Top  Rollers  for  Front  Lines  to  be  E.  Leigh's  Patent  Loose  Boss  ?        or  Loose 

Ends  at  per  delivery 

In  all  four  lines  to  have  loose  ends  ?  at  per  delivery 

If  Ervten's  Clearers!  at  per  delivery.        Steel  Flat  Top  Clearers? 

Will  you  have  Coiling  Motion  ? 
Height  of  Can  ?  inches.       Inside  diameter  of  Can  ?  Inches.        Outside 

diameter  of  Can   at  the  bottom  ?  inches. 

Indicators!  at  each. 

Top  Roller   Dead  ,  Front  ?  lbs.         Second?  lbs.      Third?  lbs. 

Weight —  I  Fourth?  lbs. 

(Usually  for  Covered  Rollers  22lbs.)  (171bs.)  (171bs.)  (17lbs.) 

(  ,,  Metallic        ,.       lOlbs.)  (lOlbs.)  (lOlbs.)  (lOlbs.) 

Total  Draught  of  Fluted  Rollers  ?  Draught  from  1st  to  2nd  ?  Draught 

from  2nd  to  3rd  ?  Draught  from  3rd  to  4th  ? 

Distance  from  Centre  to  Centre  of  Rollers  : —  Front  to  Second 

smallest  distance  ?  to  open  to 

If  Traverse  motion  to  be  applied  Second  to  Third  to  open  to 

How  many  Slivers  will  you  double  at  each  delivery  ?  Third  to  Fourth 

to  open  to 
Diameter  of  Pulleys  on  Driving  Shaft  ?  inches  (usually  16in.)  Speed  of 

Main  Shaft  revs.         Diam.  of  Drum  inches 

Do  you  require  Fast  and  Loose  Driving  Pulleys  ?  Do  you  require  a 

passage?  between  heads  of  inches. 

Diameter  of  Pulleys  for  Driving  Front  Roller  ?  inches  (usually  18in.  on 

Shaft  into  12in.  on  Front  Roller). 
What  hand  of  Frame  when  facing  Delivering  Roller?  on  right  hand 

on  left  hand 
Will  you  have  a  Back  Stop  Motion  ?  Will  you  have  an  Eccentric  Weight 

Relieving  Motion  at  per  delivery. 

Will  you  have  our  Patent  Front  StoDping  Motion,  which  Stops  ivhen  a  Sliver 

breaks  between  the  Front  Fluted  Roller  and  the  Callender  Roller,  and  also 

tvhen  a  lump  or  unusually  thick  Sliver  conies  forward  ?  at         per  del. 

Will  you  have  a  Stopping  Motion  ichen  the  Cans  are  full  ?  at  per  del. 

Will  vou  have  extra  Roller  placed  behind  Stop  Motion  for  assisting  Cotton  out 

of  Cans  (Duydales  Patent  Single  Preventer)  at  per  delivery. 

If  ivith  Patent  Metallic  Rollers  at  per  delivery. 

Indicators  to  each  head  or  to  each  finishing  head  oitly  ?  at  each. 

If  with  self-locking  guards '  at  If  driving  shafts  to  be  cased  in  ?        at 

Note.— The  Spare  Pinions,  Ac,  supplied  without  charge  with  each  Drawing  Frame  of  three 

heads  are  as  follows  :  Six  Draught  Pinioiis  and  Three  Top  Rollers. 
Is  a  complete  set  of  Change  Wheels  wanted  for  each  Frame,  or  how  many  ? 
Change  Draught  Wheels  ivanted  :        No.  of  Teeth  to 

Are  any  sj)are  articles  to  be  sent  in  addition  to  the  above  ? 
When  must  the  Frames  be  delivered,  and  how  ? 

REMARKS:— 

Date  Signed  by 

134 


135 


Improved  Speed  Frames. 


Our  illustrations  show  the  front  and  back  views  of  the 
frame,  also  the  gearing  in  diagrams  for  the  various  kinds 
of  frame,  together  with  a  section  of  the  Curtis- Rhodes 
differential  motion,  roller  stand,  etc. 

General  construction. — The  four  varieties  of  this 
class  of  machine  in  general  use,  viz.: — Slabbing,  Inter- 
mediate, Roving  and  Fine  Jack  Frames,  which  we 
construct  in  a  variety  of  dififerent  gauges  and  lengths,  have 
been  recently  overhauled  and  modernized  as  far  as  possible, 
involving  the  employment  of  many  new  patterns. 

All  parts  have  a  letter  or  number  cast  on  them  and 
those  bearing  the  same  letter  or  number  are  interchangeable, 
whilst  the  letters  or  numbers,  names  and  illustrations,  will 
be  found  in  the  '' detaiV  books  we  supply,  so  ihat  re- 
newals may  be  ordered,  and  obtained  exactly  similar  to  the 
pieces  to  be  replaced. 

The  framing  is  made  specially  low  to  facilitate  creel- 
ing, and  extra  strong,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  run  the  frames 
at  the  highest  speeds  with  a  minimum  of  driving  power. 

The  spring 
pieces  are  planed 
to  receive  the  roller 
beam,  and  they  are 
provided  with  ad- 
justable feet  to 
compensate  for  any 
irregularity  in  the 
tioor  level. 

The  beams 
are  very  strong  and 
planed  on  the  top 

The  roller 
stands  are  of  un- 
usual width  to  give 
a  long  bearing  to 
the  roller  necks, 
and  are  all  carefully 
milled  to  template, 

136 


as  are  also  the  cap-bars.  We  make  frames  if  specially 
desired  with  an  intermediate  stand,  thus  doubling  the  number 
of  bearings  for  the  rollers.  When  this  is  done  we  usually 
dispense  with  the  cap-bar,  the  roller  stand  itself  carrying  the 
top  rollers,  so  that  when  the  bottom  rollers  are  set,  the  top 
ones  are  set  along  with  them,  but  we  can  also  put  in  the 
intermediate  stand  with  the  usual  arrangement  of  cap  bar. 

Diameter  of  rollers,  &c. — Below  is  given  a  list  of 
suitable  diameters  of  roller,  &c.,  for  various  cottons: — 


Cottons  1       Machines 

l^ottom  Rollers 

Top  Rolle 

■s 

Usual  Weights 
lbs. 

1st.      2nd. 

3rd. 

1st. 

2nd. 

3rd. 

F.R. 

M.R. 

B.W. 

g       ^     Slubber 

;p  o  ^     Intermediate 
O      ^  j  Roving  

lie 
1 

\ 

ItV 

1 

if 

¥i 

13 
16 

18 
14 
20 

22 

18       j 
24 

■t  ^     'Slubber 

P  rt       Intermediate 
<            Roving  

H 
U 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 

1 

18-20 
14 
20 

22  to  24  1 

18 
24       1 

c  rt         Slubber 

.2  <u  T3   1 

a^  ^     Intermediate 
>^'^;^     Roving    ...) 
W  ^         Fine  Jack    j 

11 

11 
1* 
ij 

li 
H 

1^ 

li  or 

H 
H 

1^ 

u 

1t% 

11 

14 
12 
12 

12 
10 
10 

12 
10 

Division  or  dividing  plates  are  sometimes  applied 
to  slubbing  frames  ;  these  are  made  of  steel  and  placed  in 
front  of  the  roller  beam  between  the  front  roller  and  the 
flyer  to  prevent  a  broken  end  lashing. 

The  wheels  of  the  draft  gear  are  all  machine  cut. 
The  other  wheels  in  the  gearing  are  unusually  broad  and 
strong  and  are  machine  moulded  and  cleaned  out  by 
machinery,  and  this  we  consider  better  than  cutting  the  teeth 
out  of  the  solid,  as  the  wheels  thus  cast  are  quite  as  true  as 
cut  ones,  with  the  advantage  that  the  hard  scale  remains  on 
the  working  surface  of  the  tooth,  thus  greatly  increasing 
its  durability. 

The  cones  are  of  unusual  length  and  diameter,  and 
run  at  a  high  speed,  and  their  shape  is  quite  perfect,  being  the 
result  of  long  experience  in  spinning  very  fine  counts  where 
absolutely  perfect  winding  is  a  sine  qua  noii.  They  are 
placed  as  far  apart  as  possible,  so  that  a  long  strap  can  be  used. 


137 


Improved  motion  for  raising  and  lowering  the 
bottom  cone. — The  bottom  cone  is  carried  in  a  stout 
swinging  frame,  and  to  wind  the  strap  back  it  is  Hfted 
bodily.  This  is  done  by  a  lever  conveniently  placed  on  the 
front  of  the  frame,  which  is  provided  with  a  locking  motion, 
so  that  when  the  cone  is  down  it  is  securely  held  and  the 
strap  is  kept  tight.  It  is  also  provided  with  a  suitable 
regulating  screw. 

The  long  rack  for  moving  the  cone  belt  is  carried  on 
two  bowls  to  reduce  friction  in  order  that  the  change  will 
act  more  freely  and  quickly. 

Balancing  of  the  top  rail. — We  claim  special 
advantages  for  our  method  of  doing  this.  Instead  of  using 
the  customary  chains  and  weights  which  throw  the  rail  for- 
ward (being  necessarily  attached  to  one  side  of  it),  causing 
the  guides  to  bind  in  the  slides  and  the  spindles  to  run 
heavily,  we  introduce  a  lever  lying  lengthwise  of  the  frame 
and  pivoted  in  the  spring  piece.  One  end  of  the  lever 
supports  the  rail  directly  under  its  centre,  and  the  other  end 
carries  the  balance  weight.  In  this  way  the  rail  does  not 
tend  to  fall  forward,  and  it  moves  easily  in  the  slides  as  well 
as  leaving  the  spindles  very  free.  There  is  no  friction 
between  the  lever  and  the  rail,  but  only  a  rolling  contact, 
and  the  two  arms  of  the  lever  are  in  constant  ratio  to  one 
another  throughout  the  full  length  of  the  lift,  so  that  there 
is  no  variation  in  the  w^eight  applied.  The  lifter  shaft 
does  not  require  to  be  between  the  spindles,  but  is  placed 
behind  them  so  that  the  bottom  rail  can  easily  be  kept 
clean. 

The  top  and  bottom  rails  are  covered  at  the  front 
by  polished  steel  covers  curved  over  at  the  upper  edge  with 
the  double  object  of  protecting  the  wooden  middle  covers 
and  of  preventing  the  bobbins,  when  laid  on  the  rail  before 
doffing,  from  falling  off.  The  back  rail  covers  have  the  top 
edge  raised  to  prevent  the  bobbins  falling  off  behind,  and 
the  front  and  back  covers  of  the  bottom  rail  reach  to  the 
floor,  so  that  nothing  can  get  underneath,  and  the  racks  are 
also  well  protected.  Instead  of  the  usual  baywood  covers 
on  the  top  of  the  rails,  iron  ones  can  be  put  in  if  required, 
thereby  making  the  whole  of  the  casing  fireproof. 

Bottom  casing  plates  are  arranged  to  prevent 
bobbins,  brushes,  &c.,  getting  under  the  bottom  rail,  and 
forming  a  complete  protection  for  the  gearing. 

138 


The  spindle  and  bobbin  shafts  are  stronger  than 
usual  to  prevent  torsion  in  long  frames,  and  run  in  brass- 
bushed  bearings  well  arranged  for  oiling. 

The  spindle  and  bobbin  shaft  wheels  are  specially 
designed  to  run  with  the  least  possible  noise,  and  are  all 
machine-moulded.  The  arrangement  for  carrying  the  swing 
motion  has  been  modified  by  the  additon  of  an  extra  arm 
and  bracket  placed  at  the  frame  end,  thereby  reducing  the 
vibration  considerably. 

The  driving  shaft,  which  is  of  steel  and  increased  in 
diameter,  with  cast-iron  bushes  fastened  on  it,  and  these  run 
in  cast-iron  bearings,  being  easily  renewed  if  wear  takes 
place.  The  driving  shaft  has  an  additional  support  outside 
the  pulleys,  which  also  serves  as  a  guard  for  the  strap. 

Stop  motions. — We  apply  a  positive  knocking-off 
motion  for  stopping  the  frames  when  the  bobbins  are  full, 
and,  if  required,  we  supply  an  improved  stop  and  lock 
motion  arranged  to  stop  the  frame  when  any  desired 
number  of  layers  of  cotton  has  been  wound  on  the  bobbin, 
and  to  prevent  the  re-starting  of  the  frame  until  the  cone 
strap  is  wound  back. 

Measuring  motion  is  applied,  which  stops  the  frame 
when  any  desired  length  of  cotton  has  been  delivered  by 
the  front  roller. 

An  electric  stop  motion  is  supplied  when  required, 
a  very  effective  means  of  preventing  "Single"  or  knotted 
rovings. 

Spindle  oiling. — Special  attention  has  been  given  to 
the  oiling  of  the  spindle,  and  the  vertical  bearings  are 
slightly  dished  out  at  their  upper  ends  so  as  to  retain  as 
much  of  the  oil  as  possible. 

Spindle  footsteps,  when  required,  are  made  on  the 
self-lubricating  principle,  which  is  a  loose  step,  arranged 
with  a  specially-formed  groove  making  an  encased  oil 
chamber,  and  insuring  perfect  lubrication. 

Either  long  or  short  collars  are  supplied  as  may 
be  preferred,  but  long  collars  we  strongly  recommend,  as 
the  collar  supports  the  spindle  to  tlie  fullest  possible  extent. 

Ordinary  long  collars  are  bored  throughout  their 
entire  length,  so  that  the  inner  surface  is  smooth  and  does 
not  collect  fly  and  dirt.  When  desired  we  can  supply  long 
collars  made  from  steel  tubes. 

139 


The  shortening  and  reversing  motions  have  been 
much  improved.  In  the  reversing  motion  the  two  rocking 
levers  are  mounted  on  separate  centres  instead  of  on  one  as 
was  formerly  the  case  ;  longer  bosses  can  thus  be  provided, 
causing  steadier  working  and  less  wear  and  tear.  Formerly 
the  whole  shaft  carrying  the  reversing  bevels  was  moved  to 
and  fro,  but  in  our  new  arrangement  only  the  two  reversing 
bevels  are  displaced,  so  that  the  action  is  practically 
instantaneous  owing  to  the  absence  of  friction.  The 
mechanism  for  the  displacement  of  the  cone  strap  has  been 
the  object  of  a  patented  improvement,  so  that  a  very  fine 
ratchet  wheel  can  be  used  in  place  of  those  formerly  used 
which  had  only  a  few  teeth.  A  spur  gear  is  introduced 
behind  the  ratchet,  which  can  also  be  changed  if  necessary, 
and  the  wheels  used  are  the  ordinary  draft  wheels. 

Patent  shortening  or  tapering  motion.— The 
essential  feature  of  this  motion  is  the  shaper  plate,  which  is 
secured  to  the  end  of  the  tapering  rack.  This  plate  is  slightly 
concave,    and    is    actuated    by    the    studs    on    the    bracket 


r 

1    ■    - 

.. 

L^^'i   X' 

'    f 

^^^ 

> 

*  W^f 

-"^    ^ 

.  ^-    -"- 

,,.JZ^^:- 

-     ____^— — 

.       V 

VIEW  OF   TAPERING    MOTION    AS  APPLIED   TO   AN 
EXISTING    FRAME. 

140 


fastened  to  the  rail.  The  tapering  rack,  which  may  be 
described  as  a  lever,  has  its  fulcrum  at  one  fixed  distance 
throughout  the  building  of  the  bobbins,  and  the  leverage 
required  to  make  the  change  is  the  same  throughout, 
whereas  in  the  old  style  of  slotted  plate  or  two-bar  the 
distance  from  the  centre  of  the  motion  to  the  end  of  the 
rack  is  shortened  as  the  bobbins  increase  in  diameter,  and, 
therefore,  greater  pressure  is  required  to  make  the  change. 
By  the  use  of  this  shaper  plate  for  building  the  bobbin,  we 
are  enabled  to  make  a  much  shorter  taper,  which,  being 
convex,  prevents  any  running  over  or  under,  and  we 
are  able  to  put  considerably  more  length  in  the 
bobbins,  in  some  cases  as  much  as  twenty  per  cent., 
thus  reducing  the  number  of  doffings. 

ADVANTAGES:— 

Increased  Production. 
Better  Winding. 

Shorter  and  Convex  Taper  of  Bobbins. 
Can  be  easily  applied  to  existing  Machines 
of  any  make. 

Clearers. — We  usually  supply  the  stationary  flat 
clearer  or  the  revolving  top  clearer,  to  which  is 
attached  a  traverse  motion;  this  latter  is  mostly  used  on 
roving  or  line  jack  frames  w^hen  fine  work  is  being  produced. 

Clearer  covers. — These  are  now  made  from  sheet 
steel  unless  specially  ordered,  and  are  so  arranged  that  when 
the  cover  is  turned  up  it  does  not  come  in  contact  with  the 
sliver,  and  at  the  same  time  it  gives  sufficient  space  for 
piecing  up  the  broken  end  or  pulling  same  through  the  eye 
of  the  traverse. 

The  winding  has  been  the  object  of  very  special 
study  in  our  frame,  and  we  claim  that  it  is  absolutely 
perfect.  In  addition  to  a  large,  long,  quick-running,  and 
perfectly-formed  cone,  the  position  of  the  driving  shaft  in 
relation  to  the  rail  has  been  carefully  considered,  so  that 
the  motion  of  the  rail  does  not  cause  an  independent  motion 
of  the  bobbins,  and  the  Curtis-Rhodes  difi'erential 
motion  is  applied  to  all  our  frames.  An  illustration  of  the 
motion  is  given,  and  the  following  explanation  will  be  under-^ 
stood  on  reference  to  it.  The  central  casing  C  D,  which  is 
carefully  balanced  when  running,  is  fast  to  the'  shaft,  and 
carries  the  bosses  of  the  two  compound  wheels.  The 
internal  wheel,  to  which  is  attached  the  bobbin  wheel,  runs 

141 


loose  on  the  shaft,  as  does  also  the  cone  wheel  at  the  right 
hand.  The  latter  carries  a  23  pinion  inside  the  box,  gearing 
with  the  35  of  the  compound  35/20,  the  20  gears  with 
another  pinion  usually  25  teeth  on  the  same  stud  as  the  14, 
which  gears  with  the  92  internal  wheel  fixed  to  the  bobbin 
driver.  If  now  the  cone  wheel  runs  at  the  same  speed  as 
the  shaft,  the  bobbin  wheel  would  make  the  same  number 
of  turns  as  the  shaft  and  spindle  wheel,  but  if  the  cone 
wheel  runs  a  little  quicker  than  the  shaft  it  will  cause  the 
bobbin  wheel  through  the  intermediate  gear  also  to  run  a 
little  quicker,  and  in  the  following  ratio  :  Suppose  A  =  the 
speed  of  the  shaft,  and  n  =  that  of  the  cone  wheel,  n  being 
greater  than  A.  The  excess  of  speed  of  n  over  A  will  be 
represented  by  the  expression  (n — A).  Then  the  number 
of  turns  of  the  bobbin  wheel  for  A  turns  of  the  shaft  will  be 

(n-A)x23X20x  14         .         ^,      ^      2  (n— A) 
N  =  A  +  ^ thus  N  =  A  + 

35X25X92  25 

The  great  advantage  of  this  motion  is  that  all  the  parts  run 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  shaft,  and  at  only  slightly 
different  speed,  whilst  the  inside  pinions  run  very  slowly 
indeed  on  their  axes,  so  that  the  wear  and  tear  and  the  noise 
are  greatly  reduced.  The  bobbins  derive  the  greater  part 
of  their  speed  from  the  shaft,  and  only  the  excess  of  speed 
of  the  bobbin  over  the  flyer  is  derived  from  the  cone,  and 
that  through  a  very  slow-running  and  consequently  power- 
ful mechanism.  Through  the  employment  of  this  arrange- 
ment the  work  of  the  cone  strap  is  greatly  reduced  and  the 
winding  proportionately  better. 

It  goes  without  saying  that  the  winding  can  only  be 
perfect  when  absolutely  true  bobbins  are  used. 

"Mopaes"  diffepential  motion. — This  motion  is 
worked  by  an  internally  and  externally  toothed  wheel 
mounted  upon  an  eccentric  formed  on  the  sleeve  to  which 
the  variable  motion  is  imparted.  This  wheel  gears  into  a 
wheel  fixed  on  the  sleeve  of  the  wheel  for  driving  the 
bobbins.  The  whole  of  the  combination  is  cased  in,  and  the 
eccentric  is  formed  with  a  chamber  for  lubricant. 

Disengaging  motions  are  applied  to  the  lifter  shafts 
of  all  frames  when  specially  desired. 

Creels  are  made  of  angle  iron,  lined  with  wood  and 
supplied  with  pot  footsteps  and  the  usual  top  board  to 
receive  the  full  bobbins. 

142 


143 


Guards. — In  view  of  the  strict  regulations  \)f  the 
Employers'  Liability  Act,  we  apply  guards  to  all  wheels,  as 
well  as  to  all  moving  parts,  so  that  everything  is  now 
completely  covered  in,  and  when  ordered  we  supply  our 
improved  self-locking  doors,  casing  m  all  the  gearing  at 
the  back  of  the  frame.  These  doors  also  prevent  the  start- 
ing of  the  machine  until  closed,  or  the  opening  of  same 
while  the  machine  is  running. 

Brakes  to  the  flywheels  are  worked  from  the  setting-on 
rod,  so  that  directly  the  strap  is  brought  on  to  the  loose 
pulley  the  brake  is  applied. 

The  usual  extras  are  supplied  with  the  frames  if 
ordered,  such  as  long  collars,  loose  boss  top  rollers,  division 
plates,  special  measuring  motion,  Paley's  or  Tatham's 
traverse  motion,  brake,  rollers  and  necks  and  squares 
case-hardened,  indicator,  bobbin  boxes,  self  weighted 
rollers,  extra  strong  spindles,  electric-  stop  motion  for 
intermediates,  etc. 

We  supply  gratis  with  each  machine  four  ordinary  and 
two  loose  boss  top  rollers,  three  twist  wheels,  three  draft 
wheels,  three  lifter  wheels  and  three  ratchets,  including  those 
on  the  machine.  If  desired,  we  can  clothe  the  clearers  and 
cover  the  top  rollers  with  either  sheepskin  or  calf  skin. 

Hand  of  machine. — To  determine  the  hand  of  (he 
machine  face  the  spindles,  and  note  if  the  pulleys  must  be 
on  the  right  or  left  hand. 

Strapping,  etc. — The  main  driving  belt  is  3in.  wide, 
and  the  cone  straps  2in.  wide  and  7ft.  3in.  long  for  lOin.  lift, 
and  6ft.  7in.  for  7in.  lift  frames.  Six  feet  of  iin.  rope  is 
required  for  the  shortening  motion  drag  weight.  To  keep 
the  frames  running  on  ordinary  work  we  usually  estimate 
that  it  requires  10  tubes  per  spindle  for  slubbing  frames, 
11  for  intermediates,  and  12*5  for  roving  frames. 

Pulleys. — Slubbing  and  intermediate,  14in.  to  20in. 
dia.  Roving  and  fine  jack  frames,  14in.  to  18in.  dia.  X  3in. 
wide.  The  centre  of  driving  shaft  from  floor. on  lOin.  lift. 
.Slubbing  and  intermediate  frames  is  21in.  and  for  a  7in.  lift. 
Koving  frame  20in. 

Speeds. — In  the  slubbing  and  intermediate  frames  the 
spindles  usually  make  two  turns  for  one  of  the  driving  shaft, 
and  in  the  roving  and  jack  frames  2'51  for  the  ordinary 
gauges.  Others  are  indicated  in  our  calculations  and  the 
wheels  given  on  the  plans  of  the  gearing  for  the  various 

144 


machines.     Below  is  given  a  list  of  speeds  of  spindles  for 
the  various  machines  working  different  cottons  : — 


Cotton 

Slabbing  F. 

Intermediate  F 

Rovinfi  F.           Fine  Jack  F.    ' 

American  ... 

Revs. 
600  to  G50 

Revs. 
750  to  800 

Revs.                      Revs. 
1050  to  1100            —           1 

Egyptian  ... 

450  to  500 

650  to  750 

1000  to  1050    1050  to  11501 

Sea    Island 

400  to  450 

600  to  650 

900  to  1000    1000  to  1100 

Horse  Power. — The  approximate  power  is  1  h.p.  to 
50  Slabbing  spindles.  60  Intermediate  spindles. 
70  Roving  ,,  75  Fine  jack  ,, 

Nett  Weight  of  Speed   Frames. 


Slabbing 

Int'rm 

ediate 

Roving 

Jack 

,bs. 

Kilos. 

lbs. 

Kilos. 

lbs.  1  Kilos. 

lbs.    Kilos. 

Gearing 

2075 

945 

2075 

1 

945 

1990 

905 

I 

Rest  of  the  Machine  | 
in  lbs.  per  spindle  '. 
without  roller  and  i 
balance  weights       I 

711 

34-6 

5iJ 

24-8 

40* 

J8-4 

Balance    and    roller  [ 
weights  per  spindle  ) 

27h 

12 

20 

91 

1 

14      6-4  :                   ; 

To  obtain  the  approximate  gross  weight  add  26  per 
cent,  to  the  total  net  weight. 

Lengths. — To  find  the  length  of  a  frame  multiply  the 
space  by  half  the  number  of  spmdles,  and  add  3ft.  Ooin.  for 
single-driven  and  5ft.  lin.  for  double-driven  frames.  To 
find  the  number  of  spindles  that  will  stand  in  a  given  length 
deduct  3ft.  Olin.  or  5ft.  lin.  for  the  gearing  from  the  length, 
and  divide  the  remainder  by  the  space,  the  result  multiplied 
by  2  will  be  the  number  of  spindles  required. 

Example.— To  find  the  length  of  a  single-driven 
roving  frame  of  180  spindles,  20in.  gauge  : 

The  table  on  the  following  page  gives  the  space  for  a 
roving  frame  gauge  20in.  as  5in. 
which    is    half    the    number    of 
37ft.    6in.,    to    which    must    be 
40ft.  6jin.  for  the  total  length. 


so  multiplying  5in.  by  90, 
spindles,  gives  450in.  or 
added    3ft.    OMn.,    making 


145 


u 


a> 


111 


CO 


146 


Similarly,  to  find  the  number  of  20in.  gauge  roving 
spindles  to  stand  in  40ft.  6iin.,  deduct  3ft.  0|in.  for  gearing; 
this  leaves  37ft.  6in.  for  the  spindles.  37ft.  6in.  divided  by 
5in.  (the  space  for  20in.  gauge)  gives  90,  and  this  multiplied 
by  2  gives  180,  which  is  the  number  of  spindles  required. 

The  following  tables  give  the  particulars  and  sizes  of  the 
different  frames  for  which  we  have  patterns,  together  wnth 
the  size  of  bobbins  they  wnll  produce: — 


Frame 

Gauge 

Space 

No.  of 
Sp*indles 
per  box 

Lifts 

Diameter 

of  the 

full  bobbin 

20|in. 

lOitin. 

4 

lOin.,  llin.  orl2in. 

5^in.  or  6in. 

!    S 

20in. 

lOin. 

4 

,,              ,, 

5§in. 

i  -s 

19in. 

9iin. 

4 

lOin.  or  llin. 

5|in. 

!  1 

18in. 

9in. 

4 

„ 

5x%in. 

(0 

17in. 

S^in. 

4 

,> 

5^in. 

16in. 

Sin. 

4 

5iin. 

0 

21in. 

Tin. 

6 

8in.,  9in.  or  lOin. 

5iin. 

1 
■5 

(  lOfin. 

6-58in. 

6        i           ,. 

4|in. 

(  26-33m. 

6-58in. 

8     ! 

4|in. 

i  1 

'    1 

J  19in. 
1  25 -33111. 
(  18in. 
1  24in. 

6-33in. 
6-33in. 
6in. 
6in. 

6 

8 
6 
8 

^ 

4TVn. 
4  Jin. 

22in. 

5^in. 

8 

6in.,   Tin.,  8in. 

4in. 

21in. 

5|in. 

8 

•  >              ,. 

3|in. 

.    tn 

20iin. 

5iin. 

8 

>> 

3iin. 

e 

1 

20in. 
19m. 

5in. 
4|in. 

8 
8 

6in.,   Tin. 

3iin. 

ISin.       1 

4iin. 

8 

> . 

Sr^in. 

17§in. 

4Min. 

8 

i>              >. 

3in. 

1 

ITf^sin. 

4i|in. 

8 

,. 

2|in. 

(0 
0 

24in.       1 

4in. 

12 

5in.   or  6in. 

2iin. 

OS 

15^in. 

3|in. 

8 

•., 

2lin. 

147 


Calculations  for  SLUBBING,   INTERMEDIATE, 
and   ROVING   FRAMES. 

General  Fortnulce 

Revs,  of       I  Revs,  of  main  shaft  x  dia.  of  pulley  on  same 

Driving  = 

g^g^fj.  j  dia.  of  pulley  on  frame. 

revs,  of  driving  shaft  X  wheel  on  same  x  50 


Revs,  of  Spindles 


w 


heel  on  spindle  shaft  X  25 


Turns  of  Spindle        )  wheel  on  driving  shaft  x  50 

for  one  of 


Driving  Shaft  J  wheel  on  spindle  shaft  X  25 

]  F.R.  wheel       top  cone  driving  spl.  wheel 

Turns  of  x     wheel     ^    shaft  W.    ^ 

spl.  for  1     1= 

Qf  PR         1  W.  on  cone  twist  W.  on  spl.  spmdle 

I  drum  shaft  wheel  shaft  toe  wheel 

I  revs,  of  driving  shaft  X  twist  wheel  X  wheel  on  top 

Revs,  of       _  cone  shaft  end 

F.R.         I  ~ 

j  top  cone  wheel  x  wheel  on  front  roller. 

Inches  Delivered  by  Front  Roller  for  One  Turn  of  Driving  Shaft 

twist  wheel  x  wheel  on  cone  shaft  end  X  3'1416  X  dia.  of  F.R. 


Turns  per  Inch 


top  cone  wheel  x  wheel  on  F.R. 
revs,  per  spindle  per  min. 
inches  delivered  per  min. 


Twist  Wheel      |  square  root  of  present  counts  x  wheel  on 

and 


Lifter  Wheel       )  square  root  of  required  counts 

present  counts  x  wheel  on 


Draft  Wheel 


required  counts 


Ratchet  Wheel     |  square  root  of  required  counts  x  wheel  on 

and  \  =     ; 

Rack  Wheel        ]  square  root  of  present  counts 

8|  X  length  wrapped  in  yards 

Counts  or  Hank   Roving    == 

weight  of  above  length  in  grains 

8i 
Weight  per  Yard  of  Roving  in  Grains   = 


Revs,  of  F.R.   -= 
Hanks  per  Hour 


hank  roving 
Revs,  of  spindles 


turns  per  inch 

revs,  of  spls.  per  min.  x  60  min.  jggg  12-%  for 
turns  per  in.  x  840  yds.  x  36in.       stoppages 

148 


§ 

CO 

CO 

§ 

CD 

8 

L^ 

o 

X 

CN 

CD 

-^1 
CD 

X 

;^ 

eo 

CO 

o 

CO 

X 
CM 

CM 

CM 

CO 
CN 

CN 

CM 

CN 

§ 

tH 

cj:j 

o 

1  8 

g 

X 

CM 

1—1 

X 

CM 

O 

X 

X 

X 
CO 

S 

8 

X 
CO 

■^-< 

j  s 

s 

CM 

^ 

CM 

00 
CM 

CN 
CN 

1— 1 
CM 

§ 

O 

o 

X 

00 

§ 

X 

§ 

rH 
X 

X 

CD 

X 
CD 

t- 

o 

X 

8 

CM 

CO 

CD 

th 

8 

g 

CD 
CM 

CM 

00 
CM 

CM 

CM 

1—1 
CM 

g 

CTi 

C5 

X 

t- 

O 

to 

g 

00 

^ 

§ 

-M 

X 

fM 

t^ 
t^ 

8 

CD 
CN 

CD 

a. 

T^ 

g 

CO 

CM 

CM 

CM 
CM 

1—1 
CM 

S 

a 
1—1 

CTJ 
iH 

X 

t- 

CD 

rH 

s 

s 

g 

X 
CM 

8 

CO 
X 

8 

CD 
X 

8 

o 

CM 

o 

1—1 

T^ 
T^ 

(M 

CO 
CM 

1-1 

CM 

§ 

tH 

O 

X 

CD 

CO 
iH 

CO 

II 

o 

o 

C<] 

X 
1— 1 

S 

X 

X 

CD 

CO 

CO 

X 

CD 

S 

^ 
^ 

■r^ 

s 

CM 

CO 

CM 

"M 

o 

CM 

CTi 

1—1 

X 

X 

1— t 

1—1 

O 

CD 

T— 1 

O 

0) 

UJ 

o 

g 

S 

8 

8 

X 

g 

o 

§ 

S 

CO 
CM 

o 

Q 

T-i 

CO 
(M 

CM 

O 
CM 

a 

X 

X 
1— 1 

1—1 

CD 

»c 

UO 

^ 

z 

CO 

cx) 

X 

X 

§ 

I— 1 

o 

CM 

X 

o 

§ 

8 

CL 

CO 

CM 

CN 

^ 

o 

X 

t- 

t- 

CD 

lO 

lO 

-* 

CO 

CO 

Li. 
O 

CO 

8 

g 

g 

CD 

X 

o 
o 

CM 

CO 

§ 

^ 

00 
CM 

CM 
CN 

oq 

(31 

1—1 

X 

1—1 

t- 

CD 
1— ( 

rH 

1—1 

tH 

CO 

CO 

Q 

o 

§ 

'X 

X 

CD 
O 

^ 

^ 

8 

s 

U 
LU 

a. 

CO 

CN 

^ 

X 

1—1 

t~ 

CD 
1—1 

^ 

1—1 

1—1 

^ 

CO 

CN 

1—1 

CN 

i 

X 

o 

CD 

o 

S 

CM 

o 

X 

CO 
(M 

o 

CN 

CD 

(J) 

Ci 

I— 1 

X 

t^ 

CD 

o 

T^ 

iO 

-■il 

CO 

r-! 

CO 

CM 

1—1 

CN 

1— t 

rH 
rH 

g 

s 

2 

g 

.X 
X 

CD 
iH 

CO 

C^ 
-* 

o 

8 

§ 

CO 

L- 

CD 

UO 

1— I 

^ 

^ 

CO 

CN 

CN 

T-l 

tH 
tH 

rH 

rH 

1 

i 

^ 

CO 

(M 

CD 

C5 

X 

CM 
CM 

CO 

CD 

X 

o 

g 

(M 

8 

X 

1—1 

CD 

T— 1 

rH 

^ 

CO 

CO 

CN 

1— 1 

CM 

1—1 

T-i 

rH 

o 

o 

o 

s 

<M 

1— 1 

X 
I— 1 

CO 

CO 

Ci 

X 
CN 

CO 

§^ 

CM 

CO 

CN 

§ 

to 
1—1 

»o 

-* 

CO 

1—1 

CM 

1—1 

CM 

1—! 

1—1 
1—1 

1—1 
1—! 

o 

rH 

o 

o 

<Ji 

GO 

8 

CO 

(M 

8? 

CO 

g 

CO 

CO 

CM 

CD 

rH 

CN 

X 

^ 

XJH 

CO 

1— t 

CM 

1— 1 

1—1 

o 

o 

o 

o 

O 

X 

s 

g 

X 

00 

o 
-* 

CM 

^ 

CO 

o 

1—1 

o 

8 

CO 

CM 

tH 

Ol 

^] 

o 

o 

a 

a 

a 

X 

X 

X 

149 


Square  Roots. 


i 
No. 

1 

V 

No. 

V 

No. 

V 

No. 

V 

•4 

•632 

2^4 

1^54 

4-8 

2  19 

9-75 

3-12 

1      -45 

•671 

25 

1-58 

49 

2 -21 

10 

316 

•5 

•707 

2-6 

161 

5 

2  23 

1025 

3-2 

•55 

•742 

27 

164 

5^1 

2^26 

10-5 

3-24 

•6 

-.774 

275 

1-658 

5-2 

2-28 

1075 

3-28 

•65 

•806 

2-8 

107 

5-25 

2-29 

11 

3^317 

"7 

•836 

2^9 

1^70 

53 

2-30 

11^25 

335 

•75 

•866 

3 

173 

54 

2-322 

115 

339 

•8 

•894 

3-1 

1-76 

5-5 

2 -345 

11-75 

343 

■85 

•922 

32 

1-79 

56 

2^367 

12 

346 

•9 

•949 

3-25 

1'802 

5-7 

2-388 

12-5 

353 

•95 

•975 

33 

1^816 

5-75 

2  399 

13 

3-60 

1-0 

1 

3^4 

1^84 

5-8 

2401 

13  5 

3-675 

I'l 

1048 

35 

1-87 

59 

2^43 

14 

374 

12 

1095 

3-6 

1^897 

6 

245 

14-5 

381 

1-25 

1118 

37 

1-92 

6-25 

25 

15 

387 

13 

1-14 

3-75 

1-936 

6-5 

255 

15-5 

393 

1^4 

1184 

3-8 

1^949 

6-75 

2 -599 

16 

4 

1'5 

1225 

39 

1^975 

7 

2^647 

16-5 

4  06 

1^6 

1265 

4 

2 

7-25 

2  692 

17 

412 

17 

1-304 

4-1 

2^025 

7-5 

2 -738 

175 

4-18 

175 

1323 

4^2 

2-05 

7-75 

2^784 

]8 

424 

1-8 

1342 

4-25 

206 

8 

2-828 

185 

4-3 

1-9 

1-378 

4-3 

2-072 

8^25 

2-872 

19 

4-36 

2 

1^415 

4^4 

2-098 

85 

2-915 

19-5 

441 

2-1 

1^449 

4-5 

212 

8^75 

2  957 

20 

4-47 

2-2 

1^483 

4-6 

2-145 

9 

3 

2-25 

1^5 

4-7 

2-168 

9^25 

3-04 

2^3 

1-517 

475 

2-18 

95 

3-08 

150 


Production.— To  cover  all  the  conditions  voluminous 
tables  would  be  required,  and  we,  therefore,  think  it  better 
to  provide  a  simple  formula  whereby  each  may  calculate  a 
very  approximate  production  for  himself. 

The  pounds  passed  through  the  front  roller  of  a  frame 
in    10  hours'  uninterrupted  running  will  be,  say,  P  where 

S  1 

p  =  X 

504  C         HvH 

where  S  =  the  speed  of  the  spindles  per  minute. 

C  =  the  number  by  which  the   v/ counts  is  multiplied  to 
give  the  twists  per  inch,  varying  according  to  the 
class  of  cotton. 
H  =the  counts  of  the  roving. 

S 

The  value  of  the  expression  -  is  given  in  the  table 

for  all  likely  values  for  S  and  C.  Consequently  the  value 
of  P  may  be  at  once  obtained  by  dividing  the  proper 
number  in  the  table  by  the  counts  multiplied  by  its  square 
root.     (A  table  of  square  roots  is  appended). 

The  actual  pounds  produced  per  spindle  in  10  hours 
will  then  be  very  approximately  : — 

938  P 

■    :,^    , — r-^;,  for  slubbing  frames,  with  bobbins  lOin.  X  5|in. 

938  plus  16  r 

825  P  for     intermediate     frames,     with     bobbins 

825  plus  16  P  lOin.  X  4jin. 


394  P 


394  plus  14  P 

300  P 
300  plus  14  P 

225  P 


for  roving  frames,  with  bobbins  7in.  X  3iin. 
for  jack  frames,  with  bobbins  7in.  X  2fin. 
for  jack  frames,  with  bobbins  6in.  X  22in. 


225  plus  14  P 

Example. — Required  the  actual  production  of  a  roving 

frame  spinning   4-hank    roving.     Speed   of   spindles    1000. 

Turns   per   inch    1*2  v^ counts.     In    the    table    opposite    1*2 

and  under   1000  is  found  the  number   16"55,  and  dividing 

this  by  4  v^4  =  8  the  result  is  2"07  nearly,  then 

394  X  2'07  815*58 

; = 1  92  lbs.  per  spindle. 

394+(l4  X  2"07)        422'98 

151 


152 


Another  method  of  obtaining  the  production  is  as  follows  : — 

Revs,  of  spls.  per  min.  X  60min.  ^^^^  -^oo'   ^^^ 

Hanks  per  hour  =    ■ ,    ^7'/" 

Turns  per  in.  x  840  yds.  X  36in.    stoppages. 

/  =  dia,  of  front  roller,     .v  =  the  change  wheel. 

Draft    wheel    constants. — In    all    our    frames    the 

usual  arrangement  of  draft  gearing  is  shown   in  the  plans 

of  the  gearing,  namely   24  on  the  ff-ont  roller  driving  90  on 

the  change  wheel  stud,  and  56  on  the  back  roller. 

If/  =  the  dia.  of  F.R.,  b  =  dia.  of  B.R.,  and  x  =  the  change  wheel, 

56  X  90  x/         210  X  f 

then  draft  =  or '—  and  since 

X  X  2"^  X  b  X  X  b 

for  any  particular  frame  /  and  b  have  knov>'n  values,  a 
constant  may  be  determined,  which,  if  divided  by  the  change 
wheel,  will  give  the  draft  it  gives,  or  if  divided  by  the  draft 
required  will  give  the  change  wheel  necessary. 

In  special  cases  the  back  roller  wheel  is  a  50,  or  a  60, 
and  the  front  roller  wheel  sometimes  28.  The  table  fol- 
lowing gives  constants  for  any  of  these  combinations,  and 
for  all  usual  combination  of  roller  diameters. 


Table  of  Draft  Constants. 


Diameter  of 
Rollers 

Front  and  Back  Roller  Wh 

eels 

^    Usual 

Special 

1 

Back 

24  front 

24  front 

28  front 

28  front 

24  front 

28  front 

56  back 

50  back 

50  Back 

56  back 

60  back 

60  back 

In. 

I 

In. 
1 

184 

164 

141 

157-5 

196-8 

168-7 

H 

1 

197 

175 

151 

168-6 

210-8 

180-6 

1 

1 

210 

1875 

160-8 

180 

225 

192-8 

ItV 

1 

223 

199 

171 

191 

239 

205 

iT^n 

1t^. 

210 

187-5 

160  8 

180 

225 

192-8 

_ 

^1* 

1 

236 

211 

181 

202-5 

253 

217 

H 

n 

210 

187-5 

1608 

180 

225 

1928 

H 

1 

2625 

234-5 

201 

225 

281 

241 

^ 

^k 

ih 

233 

208 

179 

200 

250 

214 

H 

H 

210 

187-5 

160-8 

180 

225 

192-8 

1^ 

n 

257 

229 

196 

220 

275 

236 

11 

u 

231 

206 

177 

198 

247.5 

212 

13 

ig 

210 

187-5 

160-8 

180 

225 

192-8 

1^ 

n 

252 

225 

193 

216 

270 

231-5 

^ 

ig 

229 

204 -5 

1755 

196-5 

245  5 

210-5 

H 

li 

210 

187-5 

160  8 

180 

225 

192-8 

153 


1 
1 

1 
1 

HICO 

Id 
c 

O 
U-i 

1 

1 

CM 

-^ 

00 

u, 
O 

U-i 

-^ 

OO 

\^ 

'    ' 

O 

s^ 

1 

1 

! 
< 

154 


155 


Constants  for  Twist  per  inch. 

SLUBBING    FRAMES. 


Front 

Top 

Wheel  on 

roller 

cone 

driving 

Spindle 

wheel 

wheel 

shaft 

wheel 

120 

35 

46 

50 

1 

32  constant 

X                    — 

64 

X 

48 

25 

3-92 

Wheel  on 

Twist 

Wheel  on 

Spindle 

Cir.  of 

cone  drum 

wheel 

spindle 

toe 

F.R. 

shaft 

shaft 

wheel 

liin.  dia. 

INTERMEDIATE 

FRAMES. 

Front 

Top 

Wheel  on 

roller 

cone 

driving 

Spindle 

wheel 

wheel 

shaft 

wheel 

130 

40 

46 

50 

1 

X    ■    X 

47  constant 

X    -  ■            ■  — 

54 

.r 

48 

25 

392 

Wheel  on 

Twist 

Wheel  on 

Spindle 

Cir.  of  F.R. 

cone  drum 

wheel 

spindle 

toe 

l:Jin.  dia. 

shaft 

shaft 

wheel 

ROVING    FRAMES. 

Front 

Top 

Wheel  on 

roller 

cone 

driving 

Spindle 

wheel 

wheel 

shaft 

wheel 

140 

30 

54 

50 

1 

74 '7  constant 

X 

36 

X 

X                          X 

43 

25 

392 

Wheel  on 

Twist 

Wheel  on 

Spindle 

Cir.  of  F.R. 

cone  drum 

wheel 

spindle 

toe 

l^in.  dia. 

shaft 

shaft 

wheel 

FINE   JACK    FRAMES. 

Front 

Top 

Wheel  on 

roller 

cone 

driving 

Spindle 

wheel 

wheel 

shaft 

wheel 

140 

32 

54 

50 

1 

108'8  constan 

X 

X X 

27 

.r 

42 

25 

3-92 

Wheel  on 

Twist 

Wheel  on 

Spindle 

Cir.  of  F.R. 

cone  drum 

wheel 

spindle 

toe 

l|in.  dia. 

shaft 

shaft 

wheel 

Constant  divided  by  turns  per  inch  ==  twist 

wheel. 

In  the  following  tables  constants  are  given  for  the  different  gauges 
of  frames,  and  for  all  required  diameters  of  front  rollers  except  Ixfii^. 
and  li'^in.  dia.  Should  constants  for  these  be  required  they  may  be 
found  by  dividing  the  constants  given  opposite  the  lin.  roller  in  the 
various  columns  by  11875  and  1*3125  respectively. 

156 


Slabbing  Frames. 


Usual 
19in. 
20in. 
•20Ain. 


35 


17in. 
18in. 


48 


35 


'  SOirti.  for 
16in.      j        jifj 

bobbins 


50 


52 


35 


Gauge 


Wheel  on  the  end  of  the  spindle 
shaft 


Top  cone  wheel 


In. 

I 

1 

1* 

li 

If 
1^ 


47-7 
446 
418 
39-3 
37  15 

3345 

30-4 

27-88 


45-8 

43-95 

431 

42-7 

41 

402 

40  05 

38-45 

377 

37-7 

3618 

355 

356 

34  18 

335 

3203 

30-76 

30-15 

29-12 

27-97 

27-4   1 

267 

25-62 

2512 

Multipliers  for  turns  per  inch 
Sea  Island     v  counts  x '7 
Egyptian        v  counts  X  09 
American  v  counts  x  1-1-1-2 
Indian  \^countsxl-3 

Change  _  constant 


Wheel       required  turns  per  in. 
Turns      _        constant 
per  inch  ~  twist  wheel  on 


Intermediate  Frames. 


fi 

I  r 


ISin. 
23in. 


UFual 
„.i.  19|in. 

2^51"-  26iin. 


19in. 


46 


48 


40 


40 


40 


21in. 


50 


40 


Gauge 


Wheel  on  the  end  of  the  spindle 
shaft 


Top  cone  wheel 


In. 

1 
« 

1 

IrV 
U 

Ig 


73-45 

7015 

•66-2 

6455 

68  0 

65 -45 

62-5 

60-2 

64  13 

6135 

586 

56  45 

605 

57  65 

5515 

531 

57-15 

54-55 

321 

50-2 

57-4 

491 

469 

4515 

46- 75 

446 

42-6 

41-0    ) 
37-6    ) 

42-85 

40-9 

39  08 

Multipliers  for  turns  per  inch 
Sea  Island     v  counts  x  78 
Egyptian        v' counts  x  0-95 
American  v  counts  x  11-1 '2 
Indian  v/countsxl'2 

Chanqe  _  constant 


Wheel       required  turns  per  in. 
Turns     _        constant 
per  inch     twist  wheel  on 


157 


c^ 


o 
O 

o 


158 


Roving  Frames. 


£  2 

ITj^in.                    18iin. 
18in.                 20in..  21in. 

Gauge 

4-2                            43 

-Wheel  on  the  end  of  the  spindle  shaft 

30                           30 

Top  cone  wheel 

In. 

i 

-n 
1 

li 

IS 

109-3 
97-4 
95  6  . 

89-95 
85 

76  5 

69-5 
63  7 

106-75 
99-6 
•93-4 

87-9 
83 

747 

67-9   1 
62-3   j 

Multipliers  for  turns  per  inch 
Sea  Island     \  counts  x  1-1 

Egyptian        y  counts  x  1 '  15 

American       v'^  counts  X  1 ' 2-1 ' 25 
Indian             v  counts  x  15 
Change  __              constant 
WJieel       required  turns  per  inch 
Turns       _       constant 

per  inch     twist  wheel  on 

Fine  Jack   Frames. — (27  on  the  end  of  cone  shaft  gearing 
with  140  on   the  front  roller). 


IVftin. 
18in.,  24in. 

Gauge 

42              1 

Wheel  on  the  end  of  the  spindle  shaft 

45              ! 

Top  cone  wheel 

In. 
1 

H 

li 

191-3 
170, 
153 
139 

127  5 

Multipliers  for  turns  per  inch 

Sea  Island     A/counts  x  0-9 

Egyptian        y  ' counts  x  0*95 

"American       v'countsx  I'O-ll 
Change  _              constant 

Wheel       required  turns  per  inch  | 

Multipliers  of  square  root  for  turns  per  in 

ch. 

\    Slubbing       Intermediate 

Roving        Fine  Jack 

Sea  Island 07                      078 

11 

1  15 

1  2—1  25 

1-5 

0-9             1 
0-95 
10— 11 

1 

Egyptian    0  9                      0  95 

American  11— 12             11—12 

Indian    13                      12 

159 


,_.-I_ 


F^ 


r?- 


-25 --"1 


75 10^  7 


Long  Collar  and   Bobbins  Skewers  for 
9",  8',  7',  6"   Lifts. 


160 


SPECIFICATION. 


Details  to  be  given  when  ordering  Speed  Frances. 

How  many  Frames?  How  many  Spindles  in  each  Frame? 

To  stand  in  what  length  including  I  The  gearing  occupies  3ft.  O^in.  for 

driving  Pulleys?  Notk  -  Single  Driven  Frames. 

Length  of  Lift?  inches  t  Width  of  Frame  3ft.  Oin. 

(Usually  10.9  or  Sin.) 
For  Soft  or  Press  Bobbins?  What  description  of  Presser  ? 

Diam.  of  l^obbin  when  full  ?  Diam.  of  Bobbin  Barrel  ? 

Flyer  or  Bobbin  to  lead  ? 

If  with  Short  Collar?  or  Mason's  Long  Collar?  extra  per  Spindle,  at 

Diam.  of  Spindle  ?        (Usually  ^in.)         If  with  fiin.  diam.        extra  per  Spindle,  at 

(l^sually  Twist  Way), 
at 


Spindles  to  run  Twist  or  Weft  Way  ? 
If  with  Patent  Footstep  extra? 
Which  Gauge  will  you  have  ? 


-  p  CD  t;; 


Diameter  of  Fluted 
Rollers 


Front 


Second 


Third 


inch 


t/)      ;^      - 


Diameters  of  Top 
Rollers. 


Front 


Second 


Third 


inch 


Back  Line  of  Rollers  to  have  corrugated  or  common  Flutes  ? 

If  Top  Rollers  or  Front  Line  to  be  E.  Leigh's  Patent  Loose  Boss  ? 

extra  per  spindle  at 

Total  Draft  of  Fluted  Rollers  ?  Draft  from  Front  to  Second  Roller  ? 

Draft  from  Second  to  Third  Roller  ? 
If  Bay  wood  or  Iron  Flat  Top  Clearers  ? 
Top  Spindle  Rail  cased  with  Pay  wood  or  Iron? 
Distance  from  centre  to  centre  of  Rollers? 
Front  to  Second,  smallest  distance  to  open  to 

Second  to  Third,  smallest  distance  to  open  to 

Top  Roller  Dead-weights  for  three  lines  of  Rollers: — 
If  Middle  and  Back  Top  Rollers  Self-weighted? 
If  three  lines  of  Rollers  weighted  separately  with  Dead-weights  ? 

extra  per  spindle,  at 

Front  lbs.  Second  lbs.  Third  lbs. 

Number  of  Hank  Roving  to  be  made  ?  Extreme  length  and  diameter  of  Creel 

Bobbins  ? 
Creel  :     If  for  two  Bobbins  for  each  Spindle  ?  or  for  three  B  bbins  ? 

at  per  Spindle? 

Height  and  diameter  of  Coiler  Can  ? 
Speed  of  Main  Shaft  per  minute  ?  Diameter  of  Drum  on  same  ? 

If  with  Brake,  extra  at 

Speed  of  Spindle  ?  revs,  per  minute 

Spindle  for  one  of  Front  Roller  ? 
Diameter  of  Driving  Pulleys  on  Frames  ? 
Driving  Pulleys  when  facing  Spindles 
Hank  Indicators  extra  at  each. 

to  run  through  ?  extra  per  Spindle,  at 

Note.— The  Spare  Pinions,  &c.,  supplied  without  charge  for  each  Intermediate 
Frame  are  as  follows  : — 
2  Draft  Pinions,  2  Twist  Pinions,  2  Lifter  Shaft  Pinions,  10  Ratchet  Pinions,  and  6 

Top  Rollers. 
Is  a  complete  set  of  Change  Wheels  wanted  for  each  Frame,  or  how  many  ? 
Change  Wheels  wanted  :— Draft  Pinions,  Nos.  of  Teeth  to 

Twist  Nos.  of  Teeth  to 

Lifter  Shaft  Pinions,  Nos.  of  Teeth  to 

Ratchet,  Nos.  of  Teeth  to 

.\re  any  spare  articles  to  be  sent  in  addition  to  the  above? 
When  must  the  Frames  be  delivered,  and  how  ? 

REMARKS: 

Date  Signed  by 


How  many  turns  of 

in. 
on  right  hand  or  left  hand  ? 

If  with  separating  Plates  for  ends 


161 


162 


Patent  Self-Acting  Mules. 


HETHERINGTON   AND  CURTIS   H-PATTERN 
MULES. 

We  are  makers  of  the  Hethenington  Mule,  the  Curtis 
H-Pattern  Mule,  the  ordinary  mule  twiners  with 
stationary  creel,  and  a  newly-designed  Yorkshire  Twiner 
with  stationary  spindles  and  travelling  creel,  as  well  as  of 
special  muies  for  waste  and  woollen.  All  these  machines 
are  the  outcome  of  long  experience  and  careful  study,  and 
we  do  not  hesitate  to  say  tfiat  they  lead  the  way  in  regard 
to  production,  light  running,  steady  winding,  whilst 
the  upkeep  expenses  are  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

All  the  parts  are  made  on  the  interchangeable  principle, 
and  have  cast  on  them  a  w^ell-defined  letter  or  nun)ber  to 
facilitate  ordering  change  pieces  or  parts  broken  in  transit, 
and  catalogues  are  supplied  giving  illustrations  of  each  part 
with  its  corresponding  letter  or  number,  so  they  can  be 
ordered  with  the  assurance  that  they  will  come  according  to 
order  and,  when  to  hand,  fit  in  place. 

HETHERINGTON    PATTERN. 

The  headstocks,  cast  in  one  piece,  are  spacious  and  of 
great  strength,  and  permit  of  easy  access  to  all  p'krts  for  the 
purpose  of  oiling  and  regulating,  and  are  so  arranged  that 
every  part  can  be  easily  removed  without  interfering  with 
any  other  important  part.  The  scroll  shaft,  the  rim 
shaft,  and  the  two  backing-off  and  taking-ln  shafts 
can  all  be  removed  in  a  couple  of  minutes,  as  the  bearings 
are  so  arranged  as  to  come  away  with  the  shafts,  and  being 
all  steady-pinned  can  be  replaced  accurately  without 
hesitation.  The  bearings  are  all  brass-bushed,  and  the 
bushes  can  be  easily  renewed  when  worn,  and  at  a  most 
trifling  cost. 

The  illustration  shows  the  mule  headstock  back,  from 
which  it  will  be  seen  that  it  is  extra  strong  and  cast  all  in 
one  piece. 

The  surfaces  on  the  headstock  to  receive  the  various 
brackets  are  all  milled  atone  operation  by  special  machinery 

•      163 


at  one  setting,  thereby  ensuring  that  all   the  parts  are  per- 
fectly square  and  perpendicular  to  each  other. 

The  brackets  have  also  milled  surfaces  so  that  in 
every  case  two  perfect  facings  come  together,  thus  making 
a  solid  joint  to  withstand  the  vibration  which  the  carriage 
and  different  motions  produce  when  the  mule  is  running. 
All  brackets,  besides  the  bolts  used  for  fastenmg,  are  steady- 
pinned,  so  that  if  removed  they  may  be  replaced  in  correct 
position  without  loss  of  time. 


A  special  machine  is  employed  for  boring  holes  for 
back  shaft,  speed  gearing  studs,  and  cam  shaft,  all  at  one 
operation,  ensuring  correct  relation  between  these  parts. 

Strong  foundation  plates  receive  the  headstock  and 
the  two  first  slips  with  the  builder,  thus  binding  the  whole 
into  a  solid  square  as  the  centre  of  the  machine. 

The  driving  belt  controls  only  the  turning  of  the 
spindles,  rollers,  and  the  outward  movement  of  the  carriage. 

164 


The  taking-in  and  backing-off  are  driven  by 
separate  band  from  the  countershaft,  and  suitable  provision 
is  made  for  keeping  the  band  tight.  The  grooved  pulley  in 
the  headstock  is  an  ordinary  rim  pulley,  and  being  placed 
on  the  outside  of  the  bearing  is  instantly  changed  if  necessary, 
and  where  a  large  range  of  counts  is  to  be  spun  it  is  a  great 
advantage  to  be  able  to  alter  slightly  the  speed  of  the  taking- 
in  and  backing-off  without  any  trouble. 

A  special  band  tightening  apparatus  is  used  which 
comes  on  the  slack  side  of  the  band,  so  that  the  slack  band 
is  taken  up  as  required  in  a  very  simple  manner. 

Strap  or  independent  taking-in  and  backing-off 
is  applied  to  mules  for  spinning  counts  from  120's  to  300's. 
The  motion  is  driven  by  a  strap  in  place  of  ropes  (as  mentioned 
above).  The  arrangement  is  very  simple,  and  the  amount  of 
strap  on  the  drawing-up  pulley  can  be  adjusted  to  give  any 
speed  required,  this  regulation  being  effected  by  a  stop  rod 
and  anadjusting  screw\  As  the  strap  pulleys  are  in  front  of 
the  driving  pulleys,  the  motion  takes  up  no  more  space  than 
the  ordinary  drive. 

The  rim  shaft  is  made  of  steel,  Ifin.  dia.,  with  the 
boss  for  the  rim  pulley  forged  on.  We  call  attention  to 
this,  as  it  allows  of  the  greatest  possible  speed  to  be  attained, 
and  greatly  facilitates  the  satisfactory  working  of  the  mule. 

The  rim  band  carrier  pulleys  are  made  13in.  dia. 
This  increased  size,  compared  with  those  ordinarily  used, 
greatly  reduces  the  wear  of  the  rim  band,  and  as  they  run  at 
a  correspondingly  much  lower  speed,  and  upon  steel  centres, 
the  lubrication  is  effected  much  better,  and  the  risk  of  fire  is 
greatly  reduced ,  this  being  one  of  the  most  dangerous  parts  of 
the  mule.  We  also  provide  an  auxiliary  tightening  pulley 
on  the  square  for  the  rim  band.  By  this  means  we  get  extra 
tightening  of  the  band  without  the  front  pulley  projecting 
into  the  wheel-house,  and,  further,  the  time  is  increased  be- 
fore re-splicing  of  the  band  is  necessary.  Compensating 
or  swing  pulley  frames  are  also  applied  to  take  up  the 
slack  of  the  rim  band  at  the  commencement  of  the  outward 
run  of  the  carriage. 

The  backing-off  friction  is  19in.  in  dia.,  thus  giving 
increased  power  to  this  important  movement. 

The  levers  for  putting  the  backing-off,  taking-in,  and 
cam  shaft  frictions  in  and  out  of  gear,  as  well  as  those  for 
moving  the  front  roller  and  backshaft  clutches,  are  all  made 

165 


in  the  form  of  a  fork,  and  pass  on  each  side  of  the  shaft  so 
as  to  grip  the  friction  or  clutch  on  both  sides,  and  thus  act 
squarely  on  it,  preventing  twist  and  torsion  and  consequent 
dwell  or  hesitation. 

The  taking-in  friction  is  13in.  dia.  and  thus  very 
powerful.  It  is  so  arranged  that  it  may  be  thrown  out  from 
the  front  of  the  headstock  by  a  foot  lever  if  required 
during  the  inward  run. 


The  back  shaft  clutch  is  so  arranged  that  if  the 
carriage  meets  with  any  obstruction  on  the  outward  run  the 
clutch  will  be  thrown  out,  and  the  carriage  brought  to  a 
standstill. 

The  taking-in  scroll  bands  are  in  one  continuous 
length,  and  provision  is  made  for  equal  tension  on  both  ropes 
by  the  introduction  of  a  special  tightening  apparatus,  and  a 
certain  length  is  kept  in  reserve  for  re-knotting,  thus  effect- 
ing a  saving  in  banding. 

.The   backing-off  cam   can   be  so  adjusted  that  the 
faller  follows  the  yarn  as  it  uncoils  from  the  spindle. 

The  backing-off  chain  tightening  motion,  which 
is  connected  with  the  builder  plates,  takes  up  the  slack  of 
the  chain  automatically,  and  does  not  require  the  slightest 
attention. 

The  cam  shaft  is  driven  by  a  friction  which  is  of  the 
simplest  construction,  being  all  cast  in  one  piece.  Its  work 
is  greatly  reduced  by  the  independent  action  of  the  carriage, 
which  will  also  make  the  more  important  changes,  as  it  will 
change  the  strap  at  both  ends  of  the  draw,  throw-out  the 
taking-in  friction  and  the  backshaft  clutch, and  all  the  motions 
are  so  arranged  that  no  two  that  are  antagonistic  can  be  in 
gear  at  the  same  time.     Thus  it  is  impossible  for  the  taking- 

166 


in  friction  to  get  into  gear  until  the  backing-off  friction  is 
clear,  or  the  drawing-out  clutch  to  engage  whilst  the  taking-in 
is  in  gear, 

Puliing-off  OP  hastening  motion. —This  is  very  simple 
in  construction  and  easy  to  adjust.  It  consists  of  a  lug  or 
finger  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  adjusted  by  the  replacing 
of  a  peg  to  get  any  required  movement.     This  finger  or  lug 

r  ^^ 


is  attached  to  a  rod  on  the  side  of  the  headstock,  which  is 
depressed  by  fallers  on  the  outward  run  of  the  carriage,  and 
thus  pulls  the  strap  On  to  the  loose  pulley. 

The  tin  roller  pulley  is  usually  12in.  in  dia.,  but  14in. 
may  be  introduced  if  necessary,  and  they  can  be  made  in 
halves  with  two,  three,  or  four  grooves,  as  may  be  desired. 


167 


The  tin  roller  shafts  are  of  large  diameter,  and  run 
in  easily  lubricated  brass  bearings,  or  the  bearings  can  be 
made  on  the  Mohler  principle  to  swivel  and  be  self-adjusting, 
if  required. 

The  regulator  motion  (strapping  or  governing)  is  so 
made  that  the  slightest  variation  in  the  position  of  the  fallers 
makes  a  corresponding  alteration,  and  a  cam  again  releases 
the  motion  without  putting  any  strain  on  the  faller. 

A  fullcop  stop  motion  is  applied  to  weft  mules  to 
ensure  all  the  cops  being  made  the  same  size. 

Faller  coupling  motion  for  fine  spinning  is  a  pre- 
ventive of  snarls,  gives  better  wound  cops,  and  prevents  any 
undue  strain  on  the  yarn.  The  snail  plate  that  controls  the 
backing-off  also  coils  the  yarn  on  the  spindle  wdien  the  faller 
rises.  The  fallers  can  be  more  easily  and  readily  adjusted 
to  suit  the  requirements  of  the  yarn  being  produced. 

The  winding  has  received  special  attention  and  may  be 
said  to  be  perfect,  no  matter  whether  the  carriage  runs  in 
slowly  or  quickly,  and  a  hard  cop  with  an  increased  length  of 
yarn  on  it  is  made.    The  builder  rails  and  copping  plates 

are  accurately  machined  to 
/     /^  template    so   as    to   give   a 

//  .  v<<¥l     ..„ ,..^      perfect  cop,  and  must  under 

no  consideration  be  filed  at 
the  mill,  and  the  relative 
positions  of  the  centres  of 
the  quadrant  and  winding 
drums  have  been  carefully 
-fixed  to  ensure  steady  and 
regular  winding.  As  ac- 
cessories to  the  winding, 
we  employ  an  automatic  and  perfectly  controllable  nosing 
motion,  mounted  on  the  quadrant,  which  is  clearly 
shown  in  the  sketch  above  and  the  side  elevation  of  the 
headstock. 

The  quadrant  sector  is  a  separate  part  and  not  cast 
together  with  the  trunk,  so  that  in  case  of  accident  it  can  be 
replaced  at  once  and  at  a  small  cost. 

Improved  tension  motion  specially  arranged  to 
relieve  tension  on  yarn  during  backing-off  and  commence- 
ment of  winding,  by  the  very  gradual  increase  and  decrease 
of  weight  applied,  permitting  the  application  of  heavier 
weights  at  the  correct  moment  to  ensure  firm  winding. 


(MINC  MOTION 

Hethepin>cton    M'JLE 


169 


Head  twist  motion  is  driven  from  the  twist  worm  on 
the  rim  shaft.  The  motion  is  so  compounded  that  the  twist 
wheel  can  be  of  a  reasonable  diameter  for  once  round  of  the 
motion. 

Twist  latcil. — This  device  is  so  arranged  that  while 
twisting  at  the  head  is  taking  place  the  strap  is  being 
gradually  drawn  from  the  fast  pulley,  so  that  when  the  twist 
is  complete  there  remains  only  a  small  portion  of  the  strap 
on  the  fast  pulley  to  be  removed.  By  this  arrangement  there 
is  a  great  saving  in  the  backing-off"  friction,  and  there  is  less 
wear  and  tear  on  the  ritn  bands.  The  device  is  easily  ad- 
justed for  drawing  off  the  strap  at  any  given  distance. 

Tlie  twist  wlieels  are  spur  wheels  of  large  diameter 
so  that  very  small  changes  may  be  made,  and  two  change 
places  are  provided  so  as  to  reduce  the  number  of  change 
wheels  required  where  a  large  range  of  counts  is  to  be  spun, 
and  they  are  so  arranged  that  the  change  can  be  effected 
easily  and  quickly.  There  is  an  arrangement  in  connection 
with  the  change  wheel  which  enables  us  to  change  on  the 
rim  shaft,  and  also  the  pinion  on  the  twist  lever,  thus  getting 
a  much  larger  range  than  otherwise. 

The  square  is  of  a  very  strong  section,  with  the  front 
and  back  plates  cast  together.  The  carriage  is  built  to  go 
inside  the  square,  and  is  bolted  to  the  front  and  back  plates 
and  steadied  with  fin.  dia.  diagonal  rods. 

Patent  metal  carriage. — This  carriage  is  constructed 
entirely  of  metal.  The  whole  framework  is  built  up  of  rails 
and  sheet  metal,  bound  together  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
present  the  greatest  resistance  with  a  minimum  amount  of 
deflection,  to  meet  all  strains  developed  in  the  carriage  when 
the  mule  is  working,  and  for  rigidity  and  firmness  is  superior 
to  anything  at  present  in  existence. 

The  homogeneity  of  the  material  distributes  the  ex- 
pansion and  contraction  equally  so  that  each  part  is  affected 
by  it  in  equal  ratio. 

It  is  much  superior  to  wood,  inasmuch  as  it  is  not  in- 
flammable, runs  lighter,  is  more  rigid,  is  not  so  liable  to  get 
out  of  square,  and  produces  better  work  and  more  length. 
The  wood  carriage,  after  working  some  years,  becomes  so 
saturated  with  oil  that  its  weight  increases  very  considerably 
and  requires  more  power  to  drive,  and  it  becomes  more 
inflammable  and  requires  frequent  squaring  up  in  con- 
sequence of  the  shrinking  nature  of  the  timber. 

170 


SECTION   OF   METAL  CARRIAGE. 


Advantages  of  the  Metal  Capriage. 

1, — Non-inflammable  and  practically  indestructible. 

2. — Considerably  lighter  and  stronger. 

3.  —Less  power  required  to  drive  the  mule. 

4. — Steadier,  and  practically  no  vibration. 

5. — No  swinging  motion  of  the  carriage. 

6. — Less  breakage  of  ends,  hence  less  waste. 

7. — More  even  winding. 

8. — Greater  production,  and  higher  speeds  obtainable. 

9. — More  sensitive  to  the  changes. 
10.— Works  with  less  noise  than  the  ordinary  one. 
IL — No  strain  on  the  rollers,  spindle  rail,  tin  rollers,  and 
faller  shafts,  and  when  once  set  correctly  remains  so. 

171 


SLIDE 
BAR 


FRONT 
C  ROLLER 


CAM-  SHAFT. 


PLAN 

IMPROVED   STRETCHING   OR  JACK    MOTION, 


172 


12. — Made    in    uniform   long   lengths,  affording   maximum 
strength  and  rigidity,  it  requires  few  joints  and  no 
special  couphngs. 
13. — Tin  roller  bearings  of  swivel  type,  and  supported  on 

firm  stretchers  directly  above  carriage  bearers. 
14.      All  metal,  hence  no  trouble  through  unequal  expansion. 

The  wood  carriages  are  light  and  very  strong  and 
rigid,  and  are  boarded  underneath  with  stout  boards  so  that 
they  are  very  stiff.  The  parts  are  put  together  by  tongues 
and  grooves  ail  cut  by  special  machinery,  and  are  wedged  up, 
by  hardwood  wedges  dipped  in  glue  before  they  are  driven 
up,  and  thus  making  as  strong  a  job  as  possible.  The 
carriage  stays  are  also  strengthened  by  wrought-iron  cross 
stays  bolted  from  each  of  the  hardwood  stays,  thus  prevent- 
ing any  bending  movement,  and  a  carriage  stop  motion 
is  applied  so  that  the  carriage  can  be  brought  to  a  standstill 
at  the  beam  without  putting  the  strap  off. 

Slips  and  carriage  wheels. — In  order  to  ensure  per- 
fect and  steady  running  of  the  moving  parts,  we  employ  at 
the  headstock  end  of  the  carriage  a  much  wider  slip  and 
carriage  wheel  than  usual.  The  life  of  the  slip  is  thus 
prolonged,  and  this  reducing  of  the  wear  of  the  slip  ensures 
perfect  coping  for  a  much  longer  period  than  if  an  ordinary 
width  of  the  slip  was  used. 

Stretching  or  jacking  motion. — In  this  arrange- 
ment as  the  carriage  is  being  drawn  out  from  the  roller  beam 
before  the  stretching  commences,  the  front  roller  spindle,  the 
large  bevel,  and  the  whole  of  the  wheel  box  revolve.  The 
rollers  can  be  disengaged  at  any  time  during  outward  run  of 
the  carriage ;  after  they  are  disengaged  the  stretching  com- 
mences, through  the  wheels  A,  B,  and  the  Avheel  box,  the 
Avheel  C  on  the  long  boss,  and  then  through  the  train  of 
wheels  on  to  the  back  shaft. 

Roller  motion  whilst  winding. — This  motion  is 
driven  from  the  back  shaft  direct  on  to  the  front  roller. 

Roller  delivery  motion  whilst  twisting  is  worked 
from  the  worm  on  the  rim  shaft  through  a  train  of  wheels 
on  to  the  front  roller. 

Patent  draft  gearing.— The  object  of  this  device  is  to 
get  unlimited  and  accurate  drafts,  at  the  same  time  using 
large  change  wheels. 

The  device  consists  of  a  compound  bracket  A,  B,  secured 
to  the  roller  beam  carrying  a  stud  C,  on  which  are  mounted 

173 


wheels  D  and  E,  gearing  into  F,  which  is  secured  to  the  front 
roller,  and  G  running  loose  on  the  the  front  roller.  F  being 
a  driver,  gives  motion  through  D  and  E  to  the  wheels  G  and 
G^  to  the  crown  wheel,  change  wheel  H,  and  to  the  back 
roller. 


ROLLER 


CROWN 

WHEEL 


5_  TRDNT 
ROLLER 


P-^TCNT    A.Rn<\NCEMEr<T    FOR     IDraFT    BS     RoLLEKS 


For  applying  to  existing  machines. — When  it  is 
required  to  change  from  a  low  to  a  high  draft,  say  from  8  to 
16,  in  existing  mules  by  the  addition  of  this  arrangement  the 
original  front  roller  wheel  must  be  made  to  run  loose.  The 
motion  is  then  put  into  gear  with  this  latter  wheel  and  into 
a  new  driving  wheel  which  must  be  fastened  to  the  front  roller, 
and  thereby  getting  the  increased  draft  without  changing  any 
of  the  exisiting  wheels  or  fixings.  When  it  is  required  to  go 
back  to  the  low  draft,  the  bracket  B  and  the  wheels  D  and 
E  are  taken  out  of  gear  by  means  of  the  adjusting  screw  B', 
and  the  original  front  roller  wheel  G  is  again  fastened  to  the 
front  roller,  and  the  original  draft  remains. 

Double  speed  driving. — The  illustration  shows  the 
mechanism  for  driving  mules  at  two  speeds  for  fine  counts. 
We  employ  two  pairs  of  fast  and  loose  pulleys,  and  two 
independent  slide  bars,  each  of  which  carries  one  of  the  belt 
forks  for  the  two  driving  belts.      On  a  stud  above  the  driving 


174 


pulleys  we  pivot  a  quadrant  which  has  a  slot  concentric  with 
its  arc,  but  terminating  into  two  radial  portions  :  in  these 
latter,  work  a  stud  and  bowl  fixed  to  each  of  the  slide  bars. 
When  the  change  takes  place,  say  to  the  quick  speed,  the 
quadrant  is  moved  forward  and  approximately  horizontally, 
and  carries  with  it  the  bowl  on  the  slide  bar  for  slow  speed, 
after  moving  it  the  required  distance  on  to  the  loose  pulley  it 
comes  into  the  concentric  slot  and  thus  leaves  the  bowl,  and 
in  turn  comes  in  contact  with  the  bowl  on  the  bar  for  the 


Double  Speed 
Driving  for 
Fine  Mule. 


quick  speed,  thus  taking  the  strap  over  the  loose  on  to  the 
fast  pulley.  One  great  advantage  is  that  it  is  impossible  for 
the  straps  to  be  on  the  two  fast  pulleys  at  the  same  time,  and 
it  is  considerably  neater  than  the  two  sets  of  three  pulleys 
for  obtaining  the  motion. 

Duplex  driving  can  be  supplied  if  desired,  consisting 
of  two  pairs  of  fast  and  loose  pulleys  on  the  rim  shaft. 
Owing  to  these  pulleys  being  narrower  than  the  usual  ones 
the  straps  have  to  be  moved  a  smaller  distance  at  each 
change. 

175 


/6 


The  pulleys  are  usually  16in.  dia.,  but  may  be  made 
larger  if  desired,  our  headstocks  being  capable  of  taking 
pulleys  up  to  20in.  dia.  and  5iin.  wide  for  5in.  belt  if  required. 
Scavengers. —  When  required  we  can  supply  scav- 
engers or  cleaners  for  clearing  the  carriage  from  fluff  or  loose 
fibres,  either  the  curtain  or  stationary  scavenger,  or 
the  travelling  scavenger,  which  automatically  traverses 
the  length  of  the  roller  beam  by  means  of  an  endless  band. 
Snicking  motion  used  in  fine  spinning  is  driven  from 
a  pair  of  narrow  pulleys  placed  on  the  rim  shaft,  its  object 
being  to  give  an  increased  speed  to  the  spindle  a  given  time 
before  the  carriage  finishes  the  inward  run,  to  wind  on  the 
slack  yarn  caused  by  the  lifting  of  the  counter  faller.  Snarls 
and  cut  yarn  are  thus  avoided.  The  motion  can  be  set  to 
come  into  operation  at  any  required  distance  up  to  9  inches 
before  the  finishing  of  the  stretch. 

Fallers. — The  counter  faller  shaft  is  carried  on  anti- 
friction bowls  of  large  diameter,  thereby  ensuring  a  free 
movement  of  the  shaft. 

Thread  guides  for  mules  with  two  or  three  threads  per 
boss  are  usually  supplied  with  the  ordinary  slotted  traverse 
guide,  and  for  single  boss  mules  for  spinning  fine  counts  from 
double  roving  we  usually  supply  back  traverse  guides  with 
brass  eyelet  holes,  together  with  spaced  middle  guides  to  suit. 
Patent   loose  bolster. — It  is  generally  acknowledged 

that  the  spindles  absorb 
a  large  proportion  of  the 
power  required  to  drive 
mules  and  twiners.  This 
is  mostly  due  to  the  rigid 
manner  in  which  the 
spindles  are  held  in  the 
bolster.  In  order  to 
overcome  this  we  have 
introduced  a  simple  loose 
gravity  bolster  for  each 
spindle,  whereby  less 
power  to  drive  and  less 
frequent  oiling  are  re- 
quired. From  the  sketch 
it  will  be  seen  that  we 
use  an  ordinary  bolster 
and  bolster  plate.     The 


t^Ui.c.  Car  R I  oce- 


lli 


178 


plate  is  provided  with  open  slots  for  each  bolster,  and  the 
bolster  itself  is  carried  by  a  sheet  metal  clip  doubled,  to 
leave  a  space  wider  than  the  thickness  of  the  bolster  plate,  and 
the  clip  itself  is  a  little  wider  than  the  slot  in  the  bolster  plate. 

When  the  bolster  is  pulled  into  position  by  the  band  the 
front  portion  of  the  clip  abuts  against  the  edge  of  the  bolster 
plate.  At  the  end  of  the  clip  are  two  projections,  with 
rounded  heads,  which  rest  on  the  bolster  plate  and  allow  the 
bolster  to  rock  freely  in  every  direction,  whereby  a  flexible 
bearing  is  obtained  for  the  spindle. 

Speeds. — The  usual  speed  of  the  countershaft  is  from 
480  to  500  revs.,  and  the  rim  shaft  850  revs,  for  spindle  speed 
of  8,000  to  11,000  revs,  per  min.,  with  6in.  dia.  tin  rollers  and 
fin.  dia.  spindle  wharve  for  twist,  and  5in.dia.  tin  roller  and 
fin.  dia.  of  spindle  wharve  for  weft. 

Space. — The  gearing  occupied  by  rim-at-back  mules 
is  5ft.  5Mn.,  and  with  stretching  motion  5ft.  Goin.  The 
rim-at-side  mule  occupies  5ft.  1  liin.,  and  wnth  stretching 
motion  5ft.  Ufin. 

CURTIS    H-PATTERN    MULE. 

This  mule  is  different  in  many  details  from  the 
Hetherington  Pattern,  and  is  made  either  on  the  spring  and 
lever  principle  without  a  cam  shaft,  or  can  be  made  with 
a  cam  shaft  if  desired.  Many  of  the  details  described  in 
tlie  Hetherington  mule  are  applicable  to  both  mules.  In 
mules  made  without  a  cam  shaft  the  changes  are  performed 
by  springs,  rods,  and  levers,  a  device  creating  force  holding 
same  in  reserve  until  required,  and  releasing  same  at  will. 

The  headstock,  of  which  we  give  two  views,  has  been 
completely  overhauled  and  constructed  from  entirely  new^ 
models.  In  doing  this,  special  regard  has  been  given  to  the 
general  strength  of  the  headstock  as  a  whole,  together  with 
the  individual  parts  that  go  tow^ards  the  making  of  what  can 
be  safely  said  to  be  the  strongest  mule  headstock  ever 
constructed.  This  enables  it  \o  deal  more  effectively  with 
the  spinning  of  all  classes  of  yarn. 

Al  I  the  parts  are  made  on  the  interchangeable  principle, 
a  now  well-recognised  method  in  the  building  up  of  all  classes 
of  machinery,  and  each  part  is  provided  with  a  letter  or 
numeral,  so  that  in  case  of  breakdown  the  necessary  renewals 
can  be  ordered  with  the  assurance  that  they  will  come 
according  to  order  and,  when  to  hand,  fit  in  place. 

179 


X 


180 


The  motions  are  entirely  separate  from  each  other, 
and  so  arranged  that  no  two  antagonistic  motions  can  be  in 
operation  together. 

Spri  ng  change  motion. — The  cam  shaft  is  replaced  by 
atrip  motion  which  works  very  satisfactorily, and  is  illustrated 
on  another  page.  The  motion  of  the  quadrant  is  utilised  to 
charge  a  spring  during  both  the  outward  and  inward  run  of 
the  carriage,  and  the  faller  shafts  release  the  trip  at  both  ends 
of  the  draw.  The  attack  being  one  of  direct  contact,  the 
motion  is  capable  of  very  accurate  adjustment.  The  quad- 
rant shaft  carries  a  small  crank,  and  its  partial  revolution 
acting  on  a  system  of  le'vers  charges  the  spring  that  makes 
the  changes. 

Cam  motion. — Only  one  lever  engages  w^ith  the  cam, 
this  being  the  angle  lever  which  controls  the  back  shaft 
clutch  box,  front  roller  clutch,  the  taking-in  friction,  and  the 
engaging  of  the  backing-off  friction.  This  arrangement 
gives  absolute  correct  timing  of  the  various  changes,  as  the 
movement  of  the  one  cam  actuates  them  all. 

Strap  motion. — The  outward movementofthecarriage 
is  utilised  to  bring  the  belt  on  the  loose  pulley,  and  the  levers 
are  so  arranged  that  the  carriage  can  begin  to  control  this 
movement  in  any  position  within  12in.  of  the  termination  of 
its  outward  run.  •  \\'hen  a  twist  motion  is  used  this,  of 
course,  is  not  required. 

The  inward  run  of  the  carriage  immediately  before 
arriving  at  its  termination  is  in  a  similar  way  arranged  to  put 
the  belt  from  the  loose  to  the  fast  pulley,  and  great  care  has 
been  taken  in  the  arrangement  of  the  various  motions  that 
no  antagonistic  movements  shall  or  can  be  brought  into 
operation  at  the  same  time,  as  the  changes  are  so  arranged 
and  connected  that  one  must  go  out  of  gear  before  the  other 
is  capable  of  acting,  such  as  the  backing-off,  which  cannot 
get  into  gear  while  the  carriage  is  on  its  outward  run,  and 
the  taking-in  cannot  be  in  gear  at  the  same  time  as  the 
drawing-out.  Neither  can  the  taking-in  get  into  gear  at  the 
same  time  as  the  backing-off,  as  in  the  action  of  putting  into 
gear  one  relieves  the  other. 

The  displacement  of  the  strap  by  the  carriage  is 
thoroughly  under  the  control  of  the  minder,  who  can  instantly 
alter  the  time  to  suit  requirements. 

Driving  pulleys. — These  are  usually  made  16in.  to 
18in.  dia.,  and  5in.  wide. 

181 


Patent  strap  motion. — By  this  arrangement  the 
movement  of  the  strap  is  controlled  by  a  weight  instead  of 
a  spring,  and  so  arranged  that  the  strap  is  both  taken  off  the 
fast  pulley  and  brought  on  to  the  loose  pulley,  or  vice  versa, 
by  the  pull  of  the  weight  only  ;  this  ensures  an  even  and 
steady  movement  of  the  strap,  and  with  using  a  dead  weight 
in  place  of  a  spring  there  is  no  possibility  of  any  loss  of 
movement. 

Patent  backing-off  motion. — The  backing-oif  is 
charged  shortly  after  the  carriage  leaves  the  roller  beam. 
The  rod  is  then  latched  into  position,  so  that  there  is  no  strain 
on  the  carriage,  also  little  pressure  on  the  levers  connected 
with  the  fallers  at  the  termination  of  the  draw.  The  charg- 
ing of  the  spring  being  completed,  it  then  only  remains  for 
the  rod  to  be  unlatched,  which  is  done  by  the  action  of  the 
fallers  locking,  ready  for  winding. 

The  twist  motion  is  driven  by  a  worm  on  the  tin 
roller  shaft,  ensuring  the  correct  twist,  whether  the  rim  band 
be  tight  or  slack. 

The  tin  roller  shafts  are  of  large  diameter,  and  run 
in  easily-lubricated  brass  bearings,  or  the  bearings  can  be 
made  on  the  Mohler  principle  to  swivel  and  be  self-adjusting 
if  required. 

We  have  patterns  for  the  rim-at-side  and  rim-at- 
back  arrangements,  and  all  the  foregoing  details  are 
applicable  to  both  kinds. 

All  the  usual  details  can  be  supplied  such  as  squaring 
band  pulleys,  duplex  driving,  fallers  on  bowl,  anti- 
friction carriage  bearers,  stretching  motion,  roller 
motion  whilst  windingand  whilst  twisting,  travelling 
scavenger,  double  speed  motion,  faller  easing 
motion,  strap  taking-in  and  backing-off,  wood  or 
all-metal  fireproof  carriage. 

Tension  motion,  of  w^hich  we  give  an  illustration,  is 
worth  attention.  The  rail  A  having  a  shoulder  or  rise  at  the 
front  end  can  be  regulated  in  height.  During  the  inward 
run  of  the  carriage  the  bowl  at  the  end  of  the  lever  B  must 
run  over  the  shoulder  of  the  rail,  and  in  doing  so  puts  tensions 
on  the  yarn  through  the  spring  D  ;  the  greatest  tension  being 
whilst  winding  on  the  shoulder  of  the  cop.  As  the  carriage 
runs  in  and  the  faller  rises  the  tension  is  diminished  until  it 
ceases  altogether  \vhen  the  carriage  is  near  the  beam. 

183 


Speeds. — The  rim  shaft  may  run  any  speed  from  700 
to  900  revs,  per  min.,  according  to  the  speed  of  spindles 
required.  The  tin  rollers  are  6in.  dia.,  and  the  spindle 
wharves  fin.  dia.  for  both  twist  and  \veft.  The  countershaft 
usually  runs  from  425  revs,  to  525  revs,  per  min. 

Pulleys. — 16in.  to  20in.  dia.  X  5iin.  wide  for  5in.  belt. 

Power. — ^110  twist  spindles  or  120  weft  spindles=  iH.P. 

Length  of  mules. — Multiply  the  number  of  spindles 
by  the  gauge  and  add  the  following  dimensions  for  the  gear- 
ing of  the  different  kinds  of  mules. 


Type  of  Mule 

With 
Roller  Motion 

With 
Stretching  Motion 

5ft.        5|in. 
4ft.      llin. 
5ft.      ll^in. 
5ft.       Oin. 

5ft.       6iin. 
5ft.       2Jin. 
5ft.     ll^in. 
5ft.       3*in. 

H-Pattern  (Curtis) 

Hetherington  rim  at  side 
H-Pattern  rim  at  side.... 

To  find  the  number  of  spindles  that  will  stand  in  a 
given  length  deduct  the  above  lengths  from  the  space  avail- 
able, multiply  the  remainder  by  12  and  divide  by  the  gauge. 
The  number  of  spindles  must  be  divisible — 


by  2  for  single  bossed  rollers. 

by  4  for  rollers  with  2  threads 
per  boss. 


by  6  for  rollers  with  3  threads 
per  boss. 

by  8  for  rollers  with  4  threads 
per  boss. 


The  distance  from  centre  to  centre  of  front  rollers  in  a 
pair  of  mules  for  64in.  stretch  for  a  new  mill  must  not  be 
less  than  15ft.  Sin.  to  meet  the  Factory  Act.  Centre  of 
front  roller  to  back  of  headstock  is  3ft.  2in.,  and  from  the 
centre  of  front  roller  to  back  of  creel  is  1ft.  6in.  for  single 
creel,  1ft.  8 oin.  for  twist  4-height  double  roving  creel,  and 
1ft.  10|in.  for  weft  4-height  double  roving  creel.  The 
distance  from  centre  of  front  roller  to  outside  of  fallers  is 
6ft.  4in,  for  64in.  draw. 

Stretch. — Mules  made  for  56in.,  58in.,  60in.,  62in., 
64in.  and  66in.  draw,  according  to  the  Nos.  to  be  spun. 

Guards. — In  view  of  the  strict  regulations  of  the  Em- 
ployers' Liability  Act,  we  apply  guards  to  all  wheels  as  well 
as  to  all  moving  parts,  so  that  everything  is  now  completely 
covered  in,  and  it  is  impossible  for  any  serious  accidents  to 


184 


occur.  The  illustrations  given  herewith,  together  with  the 
back  view  of  Curtis  Headstock  shown  below,  gives  an  idea 
of  how  the  different  parts  are  guarded. 


BACK  VIEW  OF   H.   MULE  HEADSTOCK   WITH   GUARDS. 

A — Rim  Pulley  Guard.  C — Middle  Drawing-out  Band. 

B— End  Scroll  on  Back  Shaft.  D— Scroll  Shaft  Guard. 

G  —  Carriage  Wheel  Guard. 


185 


The  following  illustrations  show  two  methods  of  guard- 
ing the  band  pulley  on  the  outer  frame  ends;  either  kind  is 
adopted    according    to    the 
position    of    the    pulley,    if     - 
placed  on  the  top  of  fram-      -      . 
ing  or  carried  from  the  floor. 

The     guard     for     the 
back     shaft     scroll     is 


carried  from  the  outer  frame 
end,  completely  encircling 
the  scroll  and  making  it 
impossible  to  be  caught  by 
the  band. 

When  specially  ordered  we  can  supply  guards  of  strong 
blue  planished  steel  which  entirely  cover  in  the  scrolls,  yet 
so  arranged  that  no  time  is  lost  when  replacing  a  band. 


We  also  make  floor 
brackets  and  guards  for 
middle  drawing-out  band, 

on  the  flat  (as  shown),  or  up- 
right pattern  which  completely 
case  in  the  pulley,  and  are 
firmly  secured  to  the  floor, 
making  them  impossible  to 
be  moved  by  the  passing  of 
skips,  &c. 


186 


End  scroll,  frame  end  pulley,  and  faller-stop. — 

These  are  all  guarded,  together  with  the  quadrant,  in  such 
a  manner  that  they  have  all  been  passed  by  II. M.  Inspector 
of  Factories  and  Workshops.  All  the  above  can  be  applied 
to  any  make  of  mule. 

The  accompany- 
ing illustrations  show 
one  method  of  guard- 
ing the  back  part  of 
the  headstock.  The 
guard  is  made  of  sheet 
steel  riveted  together, 
making  a  solid  guard. 
It  will  be  seen  from 
the  illustrations  that 
it  is  fitted  with  sliding 
doors  to  enable  any 
change  to  be  made 
without  removing  the 
guard.  The  guard  can 
be  easily  cleaned,  and 
there    is    no    fear    of 


fluff"  gathering,  which 
would  be  dangerous 
in  case  of  fire.  Some- 
times we  supply  this 
shape  made  of  wnve 
netting. 

The  headstock 
guard  for  the  Curtis 
mule  is  formed  of  a 
cast-iron  frame  sup- 
ported by  the  head- 
stock  back,  and  filled 
in  with  a  detachable 
sheet-iron  panel.  Be- 
low this  is  a  platform 
and  end  guards  for 
the  taking-in  scroll 
shaft,  which  may  be  thus  entirely  cased  in 
arrangement  is  shown  on  page  186. 


A  view  of  this 


187 


This   illustration   shows   one   method   of   guarding  the 
fallers  by  means  of  a  cast-iron  stationary  cover. 

We  also  supply  covers  for  taking-in   bevels,  scroll 
bevels  and  quadrant,  &c. 

Fixed  carriage  wheel  guards. — We  have  many 
different  patterns  of  this  guard, 
which  is  carried  from  the 
carriage  front  in  place  of  runn- 
ing loose  on  the  rail. 

Patent  faller  stop 
guard. — Upon  the  faller 
bracket  we  form  a  projection 
or  stud, and  this  passes  through 
a  curved  slot  formed  in  the 
guard.  The  guard  rests  norm- 
ally upon  and  extends  below 
the  counter  faller  shaft,  so 
that  when  the  winding  faller 
shaft  turns,  taking  the  bracket  forward  and  downwards,  the 
projection  on  the  bracket  passes  along  the  slot  in  the  guard, 
which  remains  stationary,  and  so  effectually  protects  the 
operative  from  injury  by  the  stop  on  the  bracket  as  it  returns 
sharply  upon  the  counter  faller  shaft. 

This  can  be  applied  to  existing  mules  of  any  make. 


Fig.  1. 


Fig.  2. 


Fig.  1  shows  the  guard  in  position  during  the  outward 
run  of  the  carriage. 

Fig.  2  the  position  during  the  inward  run. 

188 


Various  kinds  of  Creels  used  on  the  "  Heth  "  and 
"Curtis"   Pattern   Mules. 

The  illustrations  herewith  show  a  few  of  the  different 
kinds  of  creels  used  for  single  or  double  rovings. 

For  ordinary  twist  mules  it  is  usual  to  supply  a 
3-height  single  creel,  which  with  Ifin.  gauge  mules  allows 
all  full  bobbins  to  be  used. 

If  the  height  of  the  room  will  allow  of  a  single  creel 
when  using  either  single  or  double  roving  we  strongly 
recommend  them,  as  it  is  better  for  creeling,  and  much  more 
convenient  for  the  operative  when  piecing  up  broken  ends. 

For  Egyptian  and  Sea  Island  Yarn  it  is  a  common 
practice  to  use  double  roving  in  order  to  get  a  better  quality 
of  yarn  and  a  more  uniform  thread. 

The  creels  for  these  yarns  are  made  in  various  styles, 
the  single  4-height  creel  using  full  and  half  bobbins  being 
the  most  common  for  If  gauge  or  twMst  mules. 

The  3-height  double  creel,  with  broad  board  to  take  two 
sets  of  bobbins,  is  the  one  used  most  for  weft  or  fine  gauge 
mules. 

Single  or  double  creels  are  made  with  iron  or  w^ood 
supports  or  rails  for  carrying  the  skewers  supporting  the 
roving  frame  bobbins. 

All  the  creels  are  supported  by  strong  upright  rods, 
carried  from  the  spring  pieces,  and  supplied  with  top  boards 
to  carry  the  roving  frame  bobbins  ready  for  putting  in  the 
creels. 

Table  creels. — Besides  the  creels  shown  in  the 
illustrations,  w^e  sometimes  employ  a  table  or  gallery  creel. 
This  is  used  mostly  in  attics  where  the  sloping  roof  does  not 
give  sufficient  head  room  for  the  ordinary  creel,  or  in  such 
places  where  the  light  is  bad.  In  this  creel  the  bobbins  are 
placed  in  a  kind  of  gallery,  behind  each  other,  with  each  row 
a  little  higher  than  the  preceding  one. 

We  do  not,  however,  recommend  this  kind  of  creel,  as 
they  are  not  convenient  to  creel  or  piece  up  the  broken  ends. 
There  is  also  no  top  board  to  keep  the  full  bobbins  on,  and 
they  take  up  more  space  than  the  ordinary  creel,  and  should 
not  be  adopted  unless  for  the  reasons  given  above. 


189 


190 


191 


192 


SELF-ACTING   MULE  for  WORSTED. 

In  designing  this  mule  we  have  introduced  a  number  of 
most  important  improvements,  and  have  succeeded  in  making 
a  mule  easy  to  manipulate  and  capable  of  a  good  production 
of  yarn  of  the  highest  quality. 

The  Headstock  is  strong  and  well  braced  on  two 
foundation  plates,  and  is  made  for  either  the  spring  change 
motion  or  cam  shaft.  The  front  roller  catch  box  is 
controlled  by  a  sliding  cam  plate.  Either  wood  or  our 
patent  metal  carriage  can  be  supplied. 

Strap  motion. — The  outward  movement  of  the 
carriage  is  utilised  to  bring  the  belt  on  the  loose  pulley,  and 
the  levers  are  so  arranged  that  the  carriage  can  begin  to 
control  this  movement  in  any  position  within  12  inches  of 
the  termination  of  its  outward  run.  When  a  twist  motion 
is  used  this,  of  course,  is  not  required. 

Rollers. — Three,  four,  or  five  lines  of  rollers  are  used 
according  to  requirements,  all  adjustable,  independent  of  each 
other,  or  the  two  or  three  front  lines  fixed  and  cnly  the  back 
line  adjustable. 

SELF-ACTING   MULE  for  Wool,  Shoddy,  and 
Cotton  Waste  Yarns. 

This  mule  is  supplied  with  double  or  treble  speeds, 
which  can  be  applied  at  any  part  of  the  outward  run  of  the 
carriage,  the  rollers  are  driven  independently  of  the  carriage 
with  separate  change  wheels  for  each,  the  toothed  segment 
of  the  quadrant  and  the  pinion  are  made  of  malleable  iron. 
Wood  or  our  patent  metal  carriages  can  be  supplied,  also 
backing-off  chain  tightening  motion,  twist  motion 
and  backing-off  retarding  motion,  slubbing  motion, 
spindle  stop  motion,  rim  band  tightening  motion, 
carriage  pushing-in  motion.  We  usually  supply  one 
row  of  plain  bottom  rollers  l^in  dia.  and  24in.  dia.  top 
rollers,  but  two  row^s  of  plain  or  fluted  bottom  rollers  and 
one  row^  of  top  rollers  can  be  supplied  if  desired.  Strong 
spindles  capable  of  producing  cops  up  to  lOoin.  long. 

For  other  particulars  see  small  books  for  \\'aste  or 
W^oollen  Machinery. 


193 


strapping,   Banding,  &c. 

Pulleys. — 16iD.  to  iOin.  dia.  X  5^in.  wide  for  5in.  belt. 
Speeds. — For  ordinary  counts,  850  revolutions. 
HoPSe    Power.^ — For    coarse    gauges,    100    spindles; 
medium   gauges,    110    spindles;    fine  gauges,    120    spindles 

to   1  H.P. 

Length  of  mules. — IMultiply  the  number  of  spindles 
by  the  gauge  and  add  the  following  dimensions  for  the  gear- 
ing of  the  different  kinds  of  mules. 


1 

Type  of  Mule 

With 
Roller  Motion 

With 
Stretching  Motion 

Hetherington 

H-Pattern  .    . 

oft.        5iin. 
4ft.      llin. 
5ft.      ll^in. 
5ft.        Oin. 

5ft.       6iin, 
5ft.       2^in. 
5ft.     ll^in. 
5ft.       3iin. 

Hetherington  rim  at  side 
H-Pattern  rim  at  side  ... 

To  find  the  number  of  spindles  that  will  stand  in  a 
given  length,  deduct  the  above  lengths  from  the  space  avail- 
able, multiply  the  remainder  by  12  and  divide  by  the  gauge. 
The  number  of  spindles  must  be  dixisible — 

by  2  for  single  bossed  rollers, 

by  4  for  rollers  wnth  2  threads  per  boss, 

by  6  ,,  ,,  3 

by  8         „         „         4 

Net  weight  for  mules. —  Hetherington  Pattern,  64in. 

stretch  : — 

Headstock,  square  and  end         ...  ...  ...      3,640  lbs. 

Remainder  of  ^Machine    ...    l^in.  gauge,  14ilbs.  per  spindle. 
,,  ,,  ...  liin.       ,,        15ilbs.  ,, 

„  „  ...   l|in.        „        17ilbs. 

To  obtain  the  approximate  gross  weight,  add  26  per  cent. 

Strapping  required  for  Mules. 

From  main  shaft  to  counier  usually  about  50ft.  of  5in. 
or  6in.  strapping. 

Down  strap  usually  about  22ft.  of  4iin.  or  5in.  strapping. 


194 


Banding. 

2  scroll  drawing-Lip  bands 
1  check  band 
1  auxiliary  scroll  band   . 
1  long  quadrant  band 

1  short         ,,  ,, 
5  back  shaft  scroll  bands 
5         „ 

4  squaring  bands 
Rim  band 
Taking-up  band  ... 
Strapping  motion  band 
Return  band 
Spindle  banding  ... 

Banding 

2  scroll  drawing-up  bands 
1  check  scroll  band 

1  auxiliary  scroll  band 

2  off  end  draw  bands 
2  short  ,, 
2  middle           ,, 
2  short              ,, 
1  headstock  band 
i  short  band 
1  return    ... 
Rim  band 

Top  taking-up  band 
8  squaring  bands  under 

carriage 


Hetherington   Mule. 

Is          ...       |in.  di 

a.,  10ft.          each 

..       ^m.     , 

,     21ft. 

.. 

..       l-m.     , 

,      10ft.  6in.      „ 

|in.      , 

,     21ft. 

|in.     , 

,      12ft. 

..       fin.      , 

,     21ft. 

..       fin.      , 

,     12ft. 

..       lin.      , 

,       9ft. 

-.     Tein.      , 

,     62ft. 

..     Tiin.      , 

,     36ft. 

■|in.      , 

,     19ft.  6in.      ., 

iin.     , 

,     18ft. 

iin.      , 

,       4ft.  perspdle 

H-Pattern  IVIule. 

lin.  dia.,  10ft. 


Im. 
im. 


fin. 
fin. 
fin. 


fern. 
Tein. 


9    • 

Tel"- 


19ft. 

9ft. 
16ft. 
10ft. 
19ft. 
12ft. 
16ft. 
10ft. 
lift. 
65ft. 
69ft. 

12ft. 


each. 


CALCULATIONS    AND    FORMUL/E. 


Turns  per 
inch 


Mule  Twist  Formulae. 

Turns  of  spindle  in  a  given  time 
ins.  delivered  bv  front  roller  in  same  time 


Turns  of  spindle  for  one  of  the  rim. — The  tin 

roller  pulleys  may  be  any  diameter  from  Sin.  to  14in. 
inclusive.  Tin  rollers  are  6in.  and  Sin.  dia.  Spindle  wharves 
lin.     Supposing  a  mule  to  have  a  12in.  tin  roller 


are  fin.  to 


195 


pulley,  6in.  tin  roller  (^ifin.)  and  fin.  spindle  wharves  (tI), 
and  D  to  be  the  diameter  of  the  rim,  then  adding  iVin. 
(diameter  of  band)  to  the  diameters  of  the  tin  roller  and 
wharve,  the  number  of  turns  of  the  spindle  for  one  of  the 
rim  is 


D  X  97 
12  X  13 


D  X  "622 


The  following  table  gives  the  multipliers  for  various 
sizes  of  tin  roller  pulleys  and  spindle  wharves,  and  for  both 
6in.  and  5in.  tin  rollers.  These  numbers  multiplied  by  any 
diameter  of  rim  will  give  the  number  of  turns  of  the  spindle 
for  one  of  that  rim. 


Diameter 

Diameter 

of 

spindle 

wharves 

Diameters  of 

Tin  Roller  Pulleys. 

of  tin 
rollers 

8in. 

9in. 

lOin. 

llin. 

12in. 

13in. 

14in. 

6in.      -' 

( 

fin. 

11025 

•980 

•870 

•802 

•735 

■678 

•630 

Sin. 

•936 

•808 

•832 

•718 

•746 
■646 

•668 

•585 

•622 
■539 

■574 
•4975 

•533 
•462 

lin. 

•712 

•633 

■570 

•518 

•475 

•4385 

■407 

gin. 

•921 

•818 

•736 

•670 

■614 

•567 

•486 

5in.      1 

fin. 

•778 

•682 

•622 

•566 

•519 

•479 

•445 

^in. 

•675 

■600 

■540 

•491 

•450 

•4155 

■389 

lin. 

•595 

■529 

■476 

■433 

•397 

•3665 

•340 

Mule   Draft   FoPmul8e,--On  the  front  roller  of  the 
'  Heth  "  mule  is  a  compound  wheel  wnth  18  and  22  teeth, 
either  of  which  may  be  used  as  required.     The  back  roller 
wheel  is  usually  54,  but  may  be  any  number  from  40  to  60. 

If  /  is  the  diameter  of  front,  and  b  that   of  the  back 
roller,  and  ,t  the  draft  wheel 


draft 


54  X  120  X  /       54  X  120  x  / 

or accordinj 


X  X  22  X  b 


X  X  18  X  b 


to  the  front  roller  wheel  in  gear,  and  when  /  and  b  are  the 
same  (as  is  usually  the  case),  these  expressions  reduce  to 

294*5  360 

and respectively.      The   following   table   gives 

X  X 

constants    for    various    combinations    of    rollers,  and   with 
either  18  or  20  in  gear: — 

196 


TABLE    I. 
Hetherington  Pattern. 


Diameter: 
Front  roller 

Back  roller 


Constant 
with  54 
back  and 
22  front 
roller 
wheel  ... 

Constant 
with  54 
back  and 
18  front 
roller 
wheel  ... 


In. 

In. 

In. 

■ 
In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

H 

H 

H 

u 

i 

i 

I 

it 

•il 

1 

1x^6 

1« 

n 

i  ■ 

H 

1 

1 

ii 

1 

ii 

1 

1 

1 

1 

294  5 

273 

255 

239 

294-5 

275 

258 

2945 

276 

294-5 

313 

331 

1 

360 

334 

312 

292 

360 

336 

315 

360 

337 

360 

382 

405 

If  the  back  roller  wheel  be  not  54,  a  new  constant  may 
be  found  by  multiplying  the  foregoing  by  54,  and  dividing 
by  the  other  back  roller  wheel  on. 

H- Pattern. 

(Back  roller  w^heel  50,  Compound  front  roller  wheel,  ^f). 


Diameter 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

Front  roller... 

¥i 

¥1 

H 

¥1 

i 

i 

i 

H 

H 

1 

It\ 

1* 

Back  roller  ... 

¥i 

1 

8 

H 

1 

' 

H 

1 

H 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Constant  with 

54  back  and  ^ 
20  front  rol- 1 

300 

278 

260 

244 

300 

280 

262 

300 

281 

300 

319 

337 

ler  wheel  ...' 

Constant  with  | 

50  back  and  1. 
16  front  rol- 1 

375 

348 

325 

305 

375 

350 

328 

375 

351 

375 

399 

422 

ler  wheel  ... ' 

Inches  delivered  by  front  roller  for  one  turn  of 
the  rim. — In  the  Hetherington  mule  there  is  a  17  or  a  20 
bevel  driving  the  front  roller  bevel,  and  tw^o  change  places 
are  provided  for  the  twist  pinions,  the  one  (x)  on  one  end  of 
the  rim  shaft,  and  the  other  (Y)  the  wheel  that  gears  with  x. 
Then  if  /  be  the  diameter  of  the  front  roller 


197 


Inches  delivered  for  one  turn  of  the  rim  for  a  17  bevel  = 

X  X  28  X  17  X  3*14/    _  X  X  f  X  ri24 

Y  X  35  X  38  ~  Y 

X  xf  X  1-322 
and  for  a  20  = 

Taking  the  first  of  these  expressions  and  the  example 
given  above  for  the  turns  of  the  spmdle,  we  get 

X  X  f  X  1-124 
Turns  per  inch  =  D  x  '622 

For  any   particular  mule  /  is  fixed  suppose  f  or  '875, 

and  fixing  suitable  values  for  the  rim  and  twist  wheel  on  the 

end  of  rim  shaft,  say  16in.  and  24  teeth,  and  supposing  the 

turns  per  inch  required  to  be  22,  we  have 

16  X  '622  X  Y 

22  = or,  which  is  the  same  thing, 

24  X  875  X  ri24 

22  X  24  X  -875  x  ri24 

=  Y,  and  from  this  we  find 

16  X  "622 

Y  =  51*2,  that  is  a  51  change  wheel. 

The  following  tables  give  constants  for  a   17  and  a  20 

driving  bevel  in  conjunction  with  various  diameters  of  front 

roller  and  various  sizes  of  the  wheel  x  on  the  end  of  the  rim 

shaft.     These  constants  divided  by  the  wheel  Y  would  give 

the  inches  delivered  by  the  roller  for  one  turn  of  the  rim  shaft. 

These  numbers  divided  by  the  wheel  Y  would  give  the 

inches  delivered  by  the  front  roller  for  one  turn  of  the  rim. 

If  we  designate  the  constant  in  Table   II.   by    B,  and  that 

obtained   by    multiplying   the  constant  in  Table   I.  by   the 

diameter  of  the  rim  by  A, 

B    A  X  Y 

then  the  turns  per  inch  =  A  ^ = 

Y  B 

turns  per  inch  X  B 
or =  change  wheel,  Y. 

Put  into  words  the  rule  for  the  use  of  the  two  tables  is 
as  follows: — Fix  suitable  diameter  of  rim  to  give  desired 
speed  of  spindles  and  convenient  size  of  twist  wheel  X. 
Then  change  wheel  Y  will  be  found  by  multiplying  the 
proper  constant  in  Table  II.  by  the  required  terms  per  inch, 
and  dividing  by  the  diameter  of  the  rim  multiplied  by  the 
proper  constant  in  Table  I. 

198 


GEARING   OF  "HETH"    MULE. 
199 


TABLE  II. 


Example: — Suppose  the  front  roller  is  fin.  and  the 
driving  bevel  17,  and  that  we  choose  a  24  wheel  on  the  end 
of  the  rim  shaft;  then  in  the  upper  half  of  Table  1 1.,  opposite 
fin.  and  under  24,  we  find  the  number  23"7,  and  multiplying 
this  by  22  turns,  say,  for  32's  yarn,  we  get  510'8.  If  the  tin 
roller  be  6in.,  and  the  pulley  12in.,  and  spindle  wharve  fin., 
and  it  be  decided  to  use  a  16in.  rim,  then  in  the  upper  half 
of  Table  I.,  opposite  fin.  and  under  12in.,  we  find  the 
constant  '622,  and  multiplying  this  by  the  rim  (l6in.)  we  get 
9'952 ;  then 

510*0^9"952==5r2,  that  is  a  51.'s  change  wheel. 

In  our  "  Curtis"  H-pattern  headstock  both  the  change 
wheels  are  driving  wheels,  namely,  the  wheel  on  the  head  of 
the  rim  shaft  (X)  and  the  bevel  (Y)  gearing  with  the  bevel 
on  the  front  roller.  Table  I.  remains  the  same,  but  Table  II. 
assumes  a  slightly  different  form,  as  also  the  formulae  for 
obtaining  the  change  wheel  from  the  tables. 


200 


202 


TABLE   II.  FOR  THE  H-PATTERN   MULE. 


Bevel 

gearing  with  the  front  roller 

bevel 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

1 

74-8 

70-0 

66-0 

62-2 

590 

560      53-4 

510 

48-75 

46-7 

# 

69  0 

64-7 

60-9 

57-5 

54-2 

51-8 

49-2 

470 

45-0 

431 

^ 

637 

60  0 

56-5 

53-2 

50-5 

48-0 

45-75 

437 

41  9 

40-0 

^ 

59-7 

560 

52-8 

49-85 

47-25 

44-85 

42-7 

40-8 

39-0 

374 

1 

560 

52  6 

49-45 

46-7 

44-25 

42-0    1  400 

38-2 

36-6 

35  0 

In^ 

52-7 

495 

46-45 

439 

41-6 

39-6      37-6 

35  95 

344 

33-0 

U 

49-8 

467 

440 

415 

393 

37-4      356 

34-0 

32-5 

31-15 

A  being  a  constant  obtained  by  the  use  of  Table  I.,  and 
B  that  from  Table  II.,  X  the  change  wheel  on  the  end  of 
the  run  shaft  in  the  H -pattern  mule,  may  be  obtained  by 
multiplying  A  by  B  and  dividing  the  result  by  the  twist  per 
inch  required. 

The  following  formulae  are  useful  in  changing  from  one 
count  to  another  : — 

sq.  root  of  counts  x  wheel  on 


Twist  wheel  required 
(if  a  driving  wheel) 

Twist  wheel  required 
(if  a  driven  wheel) 

Builder  ratchet 
required 


sq.  root  of  counts  required. 

sq.  root  of  counts  required  x  wheel  on 

square  root  of  present  counts 
sq.  root  of  required  counts  x  wlieel  on 

square  root  of  present  counts 


Gain  in  the  carriage. ^Since  the  length  of  scroll  band 
unrolled  in  a  draw  is  64in.,  and  the  yarn  delivered  by  the 
front  roller  is  64in.  less  the  amount  of  gain  required,  w^e  may 
consider  the  back  shaft  scroll  as  a  roller  taking  up  what  the 
roller  delivers  with  a  small  draft. 

lin.  of  gain  in  the  carriage  is  equal  to  a  draft  of  1*016, 
and  corresponding  values  for  gains  up  to  5in.  are  given 
below : — 


Gain  ... 

lin. 

l^in. 

2in. 

2iin. 

3in. 

S^m. 

4in. 

4^in.      5in. 

Draft... 

1-016 

1-024 

1-032 

1041 

1049 

1-058 

1066 

1.075    1085 

103 


The  scrolls  on  the  back  shaft  are  made  Sin.  diameter, 
and  for  fin.  scroll  band.  Their  diameter  to  the  centre  of 
the  band  is,  therefore,  5fin.  or  5'625. 

The  driving  wheel  on  the  front  roller  is  either  40,  50,  or 
60,  and  three  tables  of  constants  for  each  are  given  below. 

The  spur  on  the  gain  wheel  gearing  with  the  wheel  on 
the  back  shaft  is  25,  26,  or  27,  and  in  each  table  a  line  of 
constants  for  various  sizes  of  front  rollers  is  given  opposite 
each  of  these  wheels. 

These  constants  divided  by  the  draft  between  the 
carriage  and  the  roller  (that  is  the  gain)  will  give  the  gain 
wheel. 

Table  I.     40  Front  Roller  Wheel. 


Spur  on 

the  Gain 

Wheel 

Diameters  of  the  Front  Roller 

§in. 

ilin. 

lin. 

l^in. 

liin. 

25 

26 
27 

86-75 

89-2 

92-6 

80 

83-2 

91-75 

75 

78 
81 

706      1      66-7 
734      !     6935 
76-2      ;      72, 

Table  II.     50  Front  Roller  Wheel. 


Spur  on 

the  Gain 

Wheel 

Diameters  of  the  Front  Roller 

^in. 

ilin. 

lin.             lyein. 

Hin. 

25 
26 

27 

107-2 
1114 
115-3 

100 
104 
107 -8 

9375     '     88-25 
97-5            917 
101           1      95 

83-4 
866 
89-8 

Table  III. 

60  Front  Roller  Wheel. 

Spur  on 

the  Gain 

Wheel 

Diameters  of  the  Front  Roller 

iin. 

ilin. 

lin. 

l^in. 

Hin. 

25 
26 

27 

128-7 
1338 
138  9 

120 

124-8 

1295 

112-5 

117 

1215 

105-8 

110 

114 

100 
104 
108 

Example: — Suppose  we  require  3in.  of  gain  in  the 
carriage,  that  is,  r049  of  a  draft.  We  have  60  on  the  front 
roller,  which  is  lin.  m  diameter,  and  we  choose  a  gain  wheel 
to  have  a  26  spur  gearing  with  the  back   shaft  wheel.     In 


204 


Table  III.,  opposite  26  and  below  lin.,  we  find  the  constant 
1 17,  and  dividing  this  by  the  required  draft,  1*0+9,  we  get  1 12 
nearl}',  that  is  a  1 12/26  gain  wheel,  for 


1*045,  or  very  nearly  the  draft  required. 


60       26     5"625in. 
^ X 

112      75  lin. 

In  our  H-pattern  the  front  roller  wheel  is  always  45, 
and  the  gain  wheel  spur  18.  The  constants  are,  therefore, 
as  follows  :  — 


Diameters  of  the  Front  Rollers. 


^in. 


lin. 


l^in. 


liin. 


103     ...     96*2     ...     90*2     ...     84*9     ...     80*2 

These  constants  divided  by  the  draft   (gain)   required 
will  give  the  gain  wheel. 

A  Table  of  Turns  per  inch. 

To  Spin  Weft  and   Twist  from   10  s  to  T32's. 


1         Weft  Yarns 

Weft  Yarns 

Twist  Yarns 

Twist  Yarns 

V    counts  x3'25 

V  counts  X  3-25 

V  counts  X  3-75 

\/  counts  X  3*75 

Counts 

Turns 

Counts 

Turns 

Counts 

Turns 

Counts 

Turns 

10 

10-27 

72 

27-.57 

10 

11-85 

72 

31-81 

12 

11-25 

74 

27-96 

12 

12-95 

74 

32-25 

14 

12-16 

.      76 

28-33 

14 

1403 

76 

32-68 

16 

13-00 

78 

28-70 

16 

15-00 

78 

33-11 

18 

1376 

80 

29-07 

18 

15-91 

80 

3354 

20 

1453 

82 

29-43 

20 

I6-77 

82 

33-95 

22 

15-24 

84      ■ 

29-79 

22 

17-59 

84 

34-36 

24 

15-92 

86 

3014 

24 

I8-37 

86 

34-77 

26 

1657 

88 

30-49 

26 

19-12 

88 

3517 

28 

17-20 

90 

30-83 

28 

19-84 

90 

35-.57 

30 

17-80 

92 

31-17 

30 

20-54 

92 

35-96 

32 

18-38 

94 

31-51 

32 

21-21 

94 

36-35 

34 

18-95 

96 

3184 

34 

21-87 

96 

3674 

36 

1950 

98 

3217 

36 

22-50 

98 

37-12 

38 

20-03 

100 

32-50 

38 

2312 

100 

37-49 

40 

20-55 

102 

.32-82 

40 

23-72 

102 

37-87 

42 

21-06 

104 

3314 

42 

24-.30 

104 

38-24 

i        44 

21-56 

106 

3346 

44 

24-87 

106 

38-60 

46 

22-04 

108 

33  77 

46 

25-43 

108 

38-97 

48 

2252 

110 

34 -08 

48 

25-98 

110 

39-33 

50 

22-98 

112 

3  ♦■39 

50 

26-52 

112 

39-68 

52 

23-44 

114 

34-70 

52 

2704 

114 

4003 

54 

23-88 

116 

35-00 

54 

2756 

116 

40-38 

;       56 

2432 

118 

35-30 

56 

28-06 

118 

40-73 

58 

24-75 

120 

35-6O 

58 

28-56 

120 

4107 

60 

25-17 

122 

35-89 

60 

29-05 

122 

4142 

62 

25-59 

124 

36-19 

62 

29-52 

124 

41 -75 

64 

26-00 

126 

36-48 

64 

30-00 

126 

42-08 

66 

26-40 

128 

36-77 

66 

30-46     . 

128 

4242 

68 

26-80 

130 

37-05 

68 

3092 

130 

42-75 

70 

27-19 

1.82 

37-34 

70 

31-37 

132 

43-O8 

The  above  table  is  for  American  and  Indian  cottons,  for  Egyptian 
and  Sea  Islands  the  multipliers  for  twist  and  weft  are  3'606  and  3' 183 
respectively. 

For  Table  of  Square  Roots  see  page  229. 


205 


Useful   Formulae. 

Twist  wheel    required   _  sg.  root  of  counts  x  wheel  on 
(if  a  driving  wheel)         "      ^^    ^^^^  ^f  co^„,tg  required 

Twist  wheel    required        ^^-  ^^^^  o^  counts  required  x  wheel  on 
(if  a  driven  wheel)         ^  sq.  root  of  present  cou~^ 

sq.  root  of  required  counts  X  wheel  on 

Builder  ratchet  required   =^  

sq.  root  of  present  counts 

turns  of  spindle  in  a  given  time 

inches  delivered  by  front  roller  in  same  time 

revs,  of  spindles 


Turns   per    inch  = 
Turns    per    inch  ^ 


Revs,  of  F.R. 


Draft    wheel 


Draft 


Counts 


revs,  of  F.R.  x  cir.  of  F.R. 
revs,  of  rim  X  17  to  20  x  28  x  17  or  20 

40  to  60  X  35  x  38 
dia.  of  F.R.  x  B.R.  wheel  x  crown  wheel 

dia.  of  B.R.  x  draft  x  F.R.  wheel 
counts  X  length  of  stretch 
length  delivered  in  inches  x  hank  roving 
draft  X  hank  roving  x  length  of  stretch 


Change  pinion   =^ 
Speed  of  spindles 


length  delivered  in  inches 
counts  being  spun  x  present  whee 
counts  wanted 
revs,  of  rim  x  dia.  of  rim  P.  x  dia.  of  tin  roller 
pulley  on  tin  roller  shaft  x  dia.  of  spl.  wharve 


To  find  Approximate  Production  of  a  Mule  in 
Hanks  or  Lbs.  per  Week. 

No.  of  draws  Length  of  No.  of  working  60 

per  minute       stretch  in  inches     hours  per  week     minutes        Hanks 

=     per 
840  yards  x  36  inches  week 

Hanks  per  week 

=  lbs.  per  week. 

Counts 

Note.—  To  obtain  working  hours  allow  about  6%  to  7i%  for  time 
required  for  cleaning,  doffing,  breakages,  &c.,  depending  on  counts  of 
yarn,  time  taken  in  doffing,  &c. 

206 


Production  of  Mules  from  the  Draws  per  Minute. 

(CALCULATED.) 


Seconds 
for  4 
draws 

Draws 

per 
minute 

Hanks 
in  10 
hours 

I  Seconds 
j       for  4 

II  draws 

Draws 

per 
minute 

Hanks 
in  10 
hours 

Seconds 
for  4 
draws 

Draws 

per 
minute 

Hanks 
in  10 
hours 

41 

585 

7-42 

61 

39 

4-99 

81 

2-96 

376 

42 

5  7 

7-26 

62 

3-87 

4-91 

82 

2  93 

371 

1 

43 

56 

7  08 

1 

63 

3-81 

4-84 

83 

2  89 

3  67 

44 

5  45 

6  93 

64 

372 

476 

84 

2  86 

3-63 

45 

53 

677 

1       65 

3  69 

469 

85 

2-82 

3-58 

46 

52 

6  62 

66 

364 

4-62 

86 

2  79 

354 

47 

5-1 

648 

Ij       G7 

1  j 

358 

455 

87 

2  76 

3-5 

48 

5 

6-34 

il       68 

t  . 

353 

4-48 

88 

2-73 

346 

49 

4-9 

6  22 

69 

348 

4-42 

89 

2-7 

3  42 

50 

1 

4-8 

6-09 

!       70 

343 

435 

90 

2  67 

3-38 

51 

4-7 

5-97 

71 

j 

3-38 

4-29 

91 

2  64 

335 

52 

46 

586 

T2 

3-33 

4  23 

92 

261 

3-31 

53 

i 

4-5 

5 -75 

1       78 

328 

4-17 

93 

2-58 

3  28 

54 

4-45 

5-64 

74 

3-24 

412 

.    94 

255 

3-24 

55 

4-86 

5  54 

!       75 

3-2 

406 

95 

2  53 

321 

56 

4-28 

544 

\       '' 

3  16 

410 

96 

2-5 

3  18 

57 

42 

5-84 

77 

3-12 

396 

97 

2-47 

3  14 

58 

414 

5  25 

78 

308 

3-91 

98 

2  45 

311    ^ 

50     -1 

407 

516 

79 

3  04 

386 

99 

2  42 

3  08 

60 

4 

508 

80 

3 

3-82 
1 

100 

24 

305 

Deduct  7^%  for  doftin'',  waste  and  cleaning,  up  to  16  s  varii  ,     , 

-o/  ^  u  ^         '    to  get 

3  b  , ,  , ,  , ,  above       , ,  »         ° 

the  approximate  real  production.     Hanks -=- counts  =  lbs. 

207 


_^  »  .^ 

a 

>•-.. 

-   "V 

1     1-^    CHECU                  T.         CRCCU                                                   II      1 

'"                                ; 

•;    '                                  FRONT     ROLLER                                 r^  '  2^^ 
oi      ;    '0     'O    «                                       FAULCRS.                                               " 

5.  A  MULE                 f 

.  !  R1M5HAFT     PARALLEL     TO        <'  0 
'r?             HELAD&TOCKl.                    jjl  < 

,  ]-9', 

0 

FROM  4     0 

;o;                                                    rALLERS      ' 

«'  .                            »;*  = 

S  [     1                                  FRONT   BOWUCR  .  2°  ' 

S;f                                     SA    MUUEl.                  fa 

"V"                                RlMSHXFT      PARAUUCU   TO       ''1* 

;^.     CRCCU.            ;=  ;          CBCCU. 

1 1 

4^      -  -                             '  1 

■S 

HETHERlNqJON      PATTERN . 

FRONT    ROLLER 


FA1-UCR& 


FAL.UERS 


FRONT     ROLLER  .        1  5 i. 


-^Ij{}ii>- 


5    A    MULE.  .  J,  a 

Z    RIMSHAFT     PARALLEL         J|| 
^  •    TO     WEADSIOCK.  o!5 


S.  A.  MUUE  . 
RlMSWAFT    PARALUEl. 

TO    carriac^e;  . 


CURTIS     PATTERN. 


0 

,!'!°' 

-        V 

i              ^ 

:■!                  !i 

'• 

'  < 

i  s 

ROLLERS 

1i 

'"'•    s  A  v/oolle:is» 

-;?            MULE. 

o;<   N*   <2    HEADSTOCK  . 

-■   D 

is 

1-104 

0 

.FROMjlo', 

TO     6-0' 

°: 

'  "00 

FALLCRS 
roller*.     '6. 

-J                            S  A   WOOl-L-ENJ 
o>-                                       MULE. 

O'.JL.                             NEW     HEAO&TOCK 

7 

'J 

^ 

\\ 

.;._.. 

1 

DIMENSIONSOF  MACHINES 


208 


Diameters  of  Top  Rollers. 
Front  inch. 

Second 
Third 


SELF-ACtING    MULE    SPECIFICATION. 

How  many  Mules  ?  To  stand  in  what  length  ? 

Number  of  Spindles  in  each  Mule  ?  For  Twist  or  Weft  ? 

Speed  of  Spindles  per  minute  ? 

Ciauf4e  of  Spindles  ?  inch. 

Lent^ih  of  Spindle  out  of  Bolster?  ins.  Length  of  Spindle  ? 

Diameter  of  Wharve  on  Spindle  ?  inch. 

Spindle  Blade  any  particular  sort  ?  If  tinned. 

If  to  a  Pattern  Spindle  ?  Is  the  floor  tiled  or  boarded? 

Description  of  Ileadstock — Ordinary  ?  or  with  rim  at  side. 

Counts  to  be  spun  ?  No.  of  Hank  Roving  ? 

Dfameter  of  Tin  Roller?  (Usually  Gin,  for  Twist  or  5in.  for  Weft). 

Diameters  of  the  Fluted  Rollers.        ^     ^. 

u      -a 

rront  mch.  Z  S  c 

Second  ,,  -"c  « 

u   °-^ 

Third  .,  ^     ^ 

O 
If  Top  Rollers  for  front  line  to  be  E.  Leigh's  Patent  Loose  Boss  ? 

extia  per  Spindle,  at 

Top  Rollers  for  three  or  two  threads  to  a  Boss  ? 

or  one  thread  to  a  Boss  ?  at  extra  per  Spindle  ? 

Draft,  front  to  back  ?  Draft,  middle  to  back  ? 

Distance  between  front  and  middle  Rollers?  inch, 

middle  and  back  Rollers?  inch. 

Top  Rollers  to  be  weighted  by  Lever  or  Dead  Weights  ? 
If  Lever  Weights,  fixed  or  movable  ? 
Weight  on  Top  Rollers?  to  be  lbs.  If  Dead  Weights,  state  weight 

of  each?  lbs. 

Diameter  of  Top  Clearers  ?  ins.  Top  Clearers  to  work  over  or 

between  the  Saddles? 
Curtain  Scavengers  for  Carriages  ?  or  Wood  Roller  Scavengers  for 

Wood  or  Steel  Carriages  ?  Carriages?  at  per  Spindle. 

Shaft  for  soft  ends,  under  the  fluted  Rollers  ? 

Shaft  for  hard  ends,  at  front  of  Roller  Beam  ?  at  per  Spindle. 

Under  Clearers  with  Springs  or  Weights? 

Iron  Rods  and  Tin  Traverse  Guides?  or  Steel  Traverse  Guides  ? 

Wood  Creel  ?  or  Iron  Creel  for  Roving  ?  at  per  Spindle. 

Upright  or  Gallery  ?  For  two,  three,  or  four  heights  of  bobbins. 

Indicators?  at  each. 

Full  Cop  Stop  Motion  (for  Weft  Mules)  ?  at  per  Mule. 

Size  of  Creel  Bobbins?  Boarding  Bottom  of  Carriage  ?  at  per  Spindle. 

Plate  Footsteps?  at  per  Spindle.  Length  of  Stretch  ?  ins 

Gain  of  Carriage  ?  ins.     ■  If  driven  direct  or  by  a  Countershaft  ? 

Speed  of  Line  Shaft  ?  revolutions  per  minute. 

Diameter  of  Drum  on  Line  Shaft  ?  ins. 

Is  the  Driving  Shaft  parallel  with  the  Carriage  or  Headstock  ? 
Direct  Driving  from  Line  Shaft  ?  at  per  Mule. 

Bottom  Driving  Apparatus  through  the  floor?  at  per  Mule. 

Top  Driving  Apparatus  ?  at  per  Mule. 

Patent  Regulator?        at        per  Mule.  Stretching  Motion  ?        at        per  Mule. 

Roller  Motion  whilst  Winding?  at  per  Mule.  Back  Shaft  and  Scrolls? 

Squaring  Band  Pulleys  and  Tightening  Apparatus?  at  per  Mule. 

Patent  Nosing  Motion?        at        per  Mule.  Zinc  Drippers  ?         at        per  Mule. 

Roller  Motion  whilst  Twisting  ?  at  per  Mule. 

Assistant  Taking-in  Scroll  and  Ratchet  Drum  ?  at  per  Mule. 

Note.— The  Spare  Pinions.  &c.,  supplied  without  charge  with  each  Self-Acting 
Mule,  are   as  follows  : — 2  Twist  Pinions,  4  Draft  Pinions.  2  Builder 
Pinions,  and  6  Top  Rollers. 
Is  a  complete  set  of  Change  Wheels  wanted  for  each  Mule,  or  how  many  ? 
Change  Wheels  wanted  : — 

Pinions,  Nos.  of  Teeth  to  Twist,  Nos.  of  Teeth  to 

Builder  to 

Are  any  spare  articles  to  be  sent  in  addition  to  the  above  ? 
When  must  the  Mules  be  delivered,  and  how  ? 
Remarks  : — 

Date  Signed  by 

209 


210 


Self-Acting  Twiners  with  Travelling  Creel. 
"YORKSHIRE"    TWINER. 

We  have  recently  constructed  an  entirely  new  head- 
stock  for  this  machine  so  as  to  embody  our  past  experience 
better  than  could  be  done  by  modifying  an  existing  machine. 
It  is  built  on  substantially  the  same  lines  as  our  mule  head- 
stocks.  The  rim  shaft  can  run  at  a  high  speed,  and  a  very 
large  variation  in  the  twist  is  obtainable.  Large  pulleys 
are  employed  throughout,  and  all  the  working  parts  are 
solid  and  substantial,  as  well  as  carefully  made. 

The  headstock  rests  upon  planed  bedplates  which 
carry  the  radial  arm,  cop  builder,  and  other  bearings,  corn- 
bining  the  whole  in  a  very  rigid  manner. 

The  position  of  the  drawing-out  scroll  has  been 
altered  so  as  to  bring  the  band  into  a  perfectly  horizontal 
position  in  place  of  the  usual  inclined  one. 

An  improved  tightening  motion  has  been  introduced 
for  quickly  getting  the  proper  tension  of  the  taking-in  bands. 

The  tin  roller  pulley  and  the  winding  and  backing-off 
ratchets  are  made  in  two  halves. 

The  creels  are  made  in  various  forms  for  doubling 
from  cops  or  ring  frame  bobbins ;  we  also  make  one  to  take 
the  bobbins  from  winding  frames,  where  two  or  three  ends 
are  wound  together.  Any  kind  of  water  trough  can  be 
applied,  with  proper  arrangements  for  regulating  the  drag, 
and  a  suitable  locking  motion  for  the  thread  is  also  provided 
when  necessary. 

The  faller  stands  are  made  with  antifriction  bowls 
for  the  shafts  to  run  on. 

Stretch. — The  mules  for  cotton  can  be  made  with 
60in.,  62in.,  64in.,  or  66in.  stretch.  Those  for  woollen  and 
waste  are  usually  made  for  72in.  stretch. 

Gauges. — We  have  patterns  for  the  following  gauges, 
in  addition  to  the  ordinary  gauges  advancing  by  eights  : — 
1 1^6 in.,    liVin.,    lyVin.,   lyein. 

Gearing. — The  space  occupied  by  the  gearing  is  4ft. 
9iin.  less  twice  the  gauge. 

Banding  for  ''Yorkshire"  Twiner. 

Taking-in  scroll  band      ...  ...      -^in.  dia.,  15ft.  Gin.  long. 

Long  drawing-out  band  ...  ...      |in.      ,,      17ft.  ,, 

211 


...      fin. 

dia.,  15ft. 

long. 

...   T%in. 

„     15ft. 

6in.      ,, 

...   T^in. 

„     56ft. 

...    iVn. 

.,     46ft. 

...   TT^in. 

„     15ft. 

...   Yfiin. 

„       9ft. 

...    iVin. 

„     lift. 

)PS. — "  Yorkshire  " 

Twiners, 

Short  ,,  ,, 

Check  band 
Rim  band 
Taking-in  bands... 
Band  for  the  governor  motion 
Squaring  bands  : — 3  required 
3 

Nett   weight   of  twine 
72in.  stretch  : — - 
Headstock,  square  and  off  ends 
Remainder  of  the  machine,  l|in.  gauge,  9olbs.  per  spindle. 
Top  driving  not  included  in  above  weights. 
To  obtain  approximate  gross  weight,  add  26  per  cent. 

Pulleys,  usually  16in.  dia.  X  5in.  wide  with  a  speed 
from  850  to  1,000  revs,  per  min.,  according  to  the  class  of 
yarn  being  produced. 

Power. — 120  to  160  spindles  per  1  i.h.p. 


3,8881bs. 


SELF-ACTING   ''FRENCH"  TWINER. 

We  make  twiners  on  the  French  principle,  i.e.,  similar 
to  mules  with  a  stationary  creel  for  2  or  more  cops  or 
bobbins  per  spindle,  and  ha\e  adapted  for  same  our  " Curtis " 
H-pattern  headstock  with  spring  and  lever  or  cam 
change  motion,  fitted  with  our  latest  improvements,  includ- 
ing patent  backing-off  motion,  positive  twist  motion 
driven  from  the  tin  roller  shaft,  etc.  The  troughs  are 
usually  of  wood,  and  may  be  zinc  lined  if  desired.  We  also 
make  zinc  troughs  to  rest  on  a  cast-iron  beam  as  used  for 
the  mule  roller  stands.  The  drag  is  put  on  the  yarn  by 
means  of  lead  bobbins  or  porcelain  blocks  (various  other 
arrangements  for  regulating  the  drag  may  be  applied),  and 
we  provide  a  brass  locking  motion  when  desired.  For  other 
details  re  construction  and  the  various  motions  and  guards 
see  description  of  mules. 

■  Pulleys. —  16in-  to  18in.  dia.  X  5in.  wide.  Speed. — 
900  to  1,000  revs,  per  min.,  and  the  gearing  occupies 
4ft.  4iin.      Power.— Similar  to  the  S.A.  Mule. 


212 


SELF-ACTING   TWINER   SPECIFICATION. 


No.  of  Twiners  ?         No.  of  Spindles  in  each  ?          Distance  of  Spindles  ? 

Revolutions  of  Main  Shaft  per  minute?        Diameter  of  Drums  on  do.  ? 

Diameter  of  Fast  and  Loose  Pulleys  on  Countershaft  ? 

Diameter  of  Drum  on  do.  ? 

Length  of  Countershaft  ?  feet  inches. 

Driven  from  above  or  underneath  Headstock  ? 

Length  of  Draw  or  Stretch  ?  inches. 

Length  of  Spindles  i^  Diameter  of  Wharve? 

Length  of  Spindle  to  stand  out  of  Bolster  ?  Speed  of  Spindles  ? 

Twist  per  inch  ? 

Zinc  or  Brass  Guides  ? 

Covering-in  Boards  over  Tin  Rollers  to  be  hinged  or  in  one  piece  ? 

Width  of  List  Boards  ?  Are  Plummet  Weights  required  ? 

Nos.  to  be  doubled  ?       From  what  counts  is  the  Twiner  to  be  started  ? 

Creels  ?  Length  of  Skewer  ? 

With  or  without  Water  Trough  ? 

Price  per  Spindle  ?  Terms  of  Payment  ? 

If  Driving  Apparatus  extra  ? 

If  Water  Troughs  extra  ? 

If  Patent  Tightening  Apparatus  for  Rope  Taking-in  extra 

If  Brass  Guides  instead  of  Zinc  extra  ? 

If  to  be  fixed  on  stone  floor  ^ 

Plate  Bolster  ^  Wood  or  vSteel  Carriages  ? 

Hardcastle's  Patent  Continuous  Creel  ? 

When  must  the  Machines  be  delivered,  and  how? 

Remarks  : — 

Date  Signed  by 

213 


214 


Ring  Spinning  Frame. 


This  machine  has  just  been  thoroughly  overhauled 
and  brought  up  to  date  in  every  possible  way,  and  we  have 
the  utmost  confidence  in  stating  that  it  cannot  be  surpassed 
by  anything  else  on  the  market,  both  in  respect  of  its  finish, 
solidity,  and  durability,  and  in  the  quality  and  quantity  of 
its  production.  Special  attention  has  been  paid  to  facility 
in  making  the  necessary  changes  of  wheels,  etc.,  in  providing 
a  strong  foundation  for  gearing,  and  to  the  self-adjustment 
and  automatic  lubrication  of  all  high-speed  bearings. 

Replacement  of  broken  or  worn  parts. — To 
facilitate  the  ordering  of  these  each  part  is  provided  with  a 
letter  or  number,  to  facilitate  ordering  change  pieces  or 
parts  broken  in  transit. 

Gearing  ends. — These  are  specially  designed  to  allow 
the  necessary  changes  to  be  made  easily,  and  no  material 
or  workmanship  is  spared  to  make  a  strong  and  perfect 
foundation  for  the  driving. 

Wheels  are  machine-moulded  and  the  teeth  machine- 
cleaned,  with  the  exception  of  the  draft  wheels,  which  are 
machine-cut ;  but  if  desired  cut  wheels  can  be  used  throuhgout. 

Pedestals  are  self-adjusting  and  self-lubricating,  and 
rests  on  broad  planed  ledges,  every  convenience  being  pro- 
vided for  oiling,  and  all  such  oil  holes  as  cannot  be  readily 
got  at  are  furnished  with  tubes  having  the  orifice  placed  in 
a  convenient  and  conspicuous  position. 

The  tin  rollers  are  strong  and  well  made  in  short 
lengths,  coupled  by  stout  cast-iron  shafts  which  run  in  Mohler 
self-adjusting  and  self-lubricating  bearings,  this  arrangement 
of  a  cast-iron  shaft  running  in  a  cast-iron  flexible  bearing 
being  the  most  satisfactory  for  the  purpose. 

Double  tin  rollers  are  generally  employed  in  the 
spinning  frames,  and  they  are,  when  ordered,  connected  by 
rope  driving,  with  a  tension  screw  arrangement  at  the 
off-end.  This  ensures  the  same  speed  in  both  tin  rollers  and 
a  considerable  saving  in  the  spindle  banding. 

Panels  enclose  the  gearing  and  off-ends  of  the  frame 
and  form  a  guard  against  accident.  All  joints  and  fitting 
surfaces  are  planed  or  milled. 

215 


The  girder  op  spindle  rails  are  of  a  deep  and  strong 
section,  and  machined  all  over.  The  top  flange  forms  a  true 
surface  for  carrying  the  spindle,  and  the  lower  flange  carries 
the  rocking  shaft  brackets  for  the  lifter  motion.  The  back 
surface  of  the  rail  is  bolted  and  pinned  to  the  spring  piece, 
thus  making  the  whole  frame  very  rigid  and  allows  of  a  high 
speed  being  attained. 

Ring  rails  are  made  broad  and  strong  with  an  excep- 
tionally deep  flange,  are  milled  on  the  top  and  front  and  left 
squarley  into  the  poker  top,  where  they  are  also  joined, 
thus  avoiding  all  possibility  of  accidental  displacement. 

Lifting  motion. — The  lifting  of  the  ring  rail  can  be 
worked  by  means  of  chains  and  bowls;  but  our  usual  practice 
is  by  L  levers,  well  balanced,  connected  with  the  builder  motion 
lever  by  a  cham,  which  cannot  lock  as  it  is  always  under  the 
necessary  tension.  The  lower  arm  of  the  lever  carries  a  bowl, 
on  w^hich  rides  the  poker  foot  supporting  the  ring  rail.  The 
upright  arm  of  these  levers  are  connected  with  the  levers 
running  the  full  length  of  the  frame  by  means  of  stout 
adjustable  rods.  After  doffing,  the  heart  lever  can  be  rapidly 
raised  and  lowered  to  take  up  the  slack  yarn  by  application 
of  the  foot  to  a  pedal,  whilst  putting  the  strap  on  a  fast  pulley. 

The  rocking  lever  employed  for  lifting  the  pokers  is 
made  in  halves, and  so  arranged  that  the  level  of  the  ring  plates 
can  easily  be  adjusted.  The  lifting  pokers  are  carried  in 
long  cast-iron  tubes  to  prevent  binding  at  the  top  or  bottom 
of  the  lift. 

Building  or  copping  motion. — We  can  supply  the 
straight  lift  with  shortening  motion  or  the  ordinary  cop 
building  motion  which  is  usual  for  twist  or  weft  yarns. 

The  front  roller  runs  in  broad  stands  to  reduce  wear 
on  the  necks,  and  is  placed  higher  than  usual  and  more  to 
the  front,  so  as  to  facilitate  piecing  and  cleaning. 

The  roller  stands  are  of  our  improved  pattern,  the 
bearings  for  the  front  roller  are  bushed  with  brass  and  the 
slides  are  milled  all  over  to  standard  sizes.  The  front  bear- 
ing is  a  separate  piece  so  that  in  case  of  accident  it  can 
be  easily  replaced  without  in  any  way  disturbing  the  stand. 

The  stands  are  made  with  an  incline  at  various  angles, 
25°  for  twist  and  35°  for  weft  being  the  usual  ones.  We 
also  supply  if  desired  a  30° -low  stand. 

The  cap  bar  fingers  are  made  separate  and  carried 
on  turned  bars  supported  from  the  stand,  the  bearings  for 

216 


the  top  rollers  are  all  nnlled,  and  the  front  roller  nib  is 
separate,  thus  affording  easy  adjustment.  With  all  parts 
being  standard  sizes,  all  are  interchangeable. 

Weighting  of  the  top  rollers  may  be  either  all  three 
lines  weighted  by  lever  and  saddle,  or  the  front  line  only 
weighted  by  dead  weights  and  the  other  two  self- weighted, 
the  latter  arrangement  being  specially  suitable  on  the 
inclined  stands  with  our  specially-made  cap  bars. 

The  traverse  motion  on  the  spinning  frames  is 
arranged  to  reverse  quickly  at  each  end,  and  thus  prevent 
dwell,  which  is  always  a  great  evil. 

All  our  rings  are  punched  from  the  solid  steel  bar, 
turned  by  specially  designed  machinery  and  highly  polished 
after  being  thoroughly  case-hardened.  All  are  carefully 
examined  before,  leaving  our  works  for  smoothness,  con- 
centricity and  perfect  hardening. 

Our  standard  ring  is  made  with  one  flange,  but  we 
also  make  the  double-flanged  reversible  ring  with  split 
cast-iron  or  sheet-iron  holders. 

Changeable  rim  pulley  driving. — When  a  frame  is 
required  to  spin  a  range  of  counts  from  low  to  medium,  or 
where  only  a  slow-running  line  shaft  is  used  for  driving  the 


217 


Ring  Frame  Spindles. 

(1)  For  weft  with  solid  bottom,  also  made  with 
multiple  screw  oil  cup. 

(2)  For  twist  with  multiple  screw -oil  cap,  also  made 
with  solid  bottom  instead  of  oil  cup. 

(3)  For  paper  tubes  with  wood  plug  on  spindle 
blade. 

Note. — Much  trouble  is  frequently  caused  by  the  use 
of  unsuitable  oils  and  imperfect  bobbins,  and  also  by 
neglecting  to  keep  spindles  reasonably  clean. 


218 


frame,  we  sometimes  employ  a  changeable  rim  pulley  with 
tightening  apparatus  at  the  headstock.  This  device  consists 
of  a  shaft  with  the  usual  pair  of  fast  and  loose  driving  pulleys, 
carried  from  the  frame  ends,  with  a  plate  on  the  boss  of  the 
fast  pulley  to  carry  the  rim  or  rope  pulley.  From  this  rope 
pulley  the  rope  passes  over  suitable  guide  i)ulleys  on  to  the 
tin  roller  shaft,  thus  giving  motion  to  the  frame,  the  speed 
of  which  is  readily  changed  by  changing  the  rim  pulley. 

Doffing  motion. — By  means  of  this  arrangement  half 
a  turn  of  a  conveniently-placed  handle  enables  the  ring  plates 
to  be  lowered  by  the  attendant  sufficiently  to  wind  a  few  coils 
of  yarn  below  the  bobbin.  These  are  left  on  the  spindle 
when  the  bobbin  is  withdrawn,  and  the  new  bobbin  secures 
the  thread  ready  for  re-starting. 

Lappets  or  thread  boards  have  their  proper  working 
position  determined  by  an  adjustable  stop,  so  that  the 
distance  from  the  thread  wire  to  the  top  of  the  bobbin  can 
be  regulated  by  a  single  screw  to  suit  various  counts  of 
yarn  ;  and  for  doffing  they  are  lifted  by  a  lever  con- 
veniently placed  at  the  gearing  end  of  the  machine. 

Metal  lappets  or  thread  guide  plates  can  be 
supplied  if  desired.  These  are  fixed  on  angle  irons,  hinged 
to  the  roller  beams,  to  each  of  the  angle  irons  we  supply  2in. 
adjusting  screws  for  regulating  the  angle  of  the  lappet. 

Improved  ''  Phoenix  "  type  spindles.— After  count- 
less experiments  and  tests  with  many  types  of  flexible 
spindles,  we  have  now^  succeeded  in  so  improving  our  well- 
known  Phoenix  "  Spindle  and  adapting  it  to  the  longer  lifts 
and  higher  speeds  at  present  in  vogue  that  we  have  decided 
to  retain  it  as  our  standard.  It  is  made  either  for  twist  or 
weft,  with  or  without  detachable  oil  cup  of  the  multiple 
screw  variety.  Each  spindle  is  carefully  set,  balanced  and 
tested,  at  a  greater  speed  than  under  the  usual  working 
conditions,  before  leaving  the  works. 

The  spindles  are  made  with  or  without  bobbin  cup,  and, 
if  required,  with  a  wooden  plug  the  whole  length  of  the  blade 
for  use  with  paper  tubes.  The  oiling  of  ttie  spindle  is 
perfect,  the  foot  being  always  immersed  in  oil  with  suitable 
provision  for  circulation  of  same,  and  when  the  spindle  is 
provided  with  an  oil  cup  the  removal  of  the  dirty  oil  pre- 
paratory to  re-oiling  is  greatly  simplified. 

We  illustrate  on  page  218  in  section  three  of  the 
principal  spindles  which  we  recommend. 

219 


The  holding-down  catch  for  the  spindles  is  so 
designed  and  balanced  that  no  matter  how  it  is  moved  aside 
it  returns  to  its  original  position,  and  ensures  the  spindle 
always  being  in  its  bearing. 

Separators. — We  usually  supply  the  "  Blinker"  type 
carried  on  the  ring  rail  and  so  arranged  that  they  can  easily 
be  turned  back  for  piecing-up  or  for  doffing. 

These  separators 
are  attached  to  short 
angle  iron  bars ;  having 
fixed  to  each  end  a  pivot 
and  cast  with  it  another 
projecting  lug.  The 
pivot  rests  in  a  small 
bracket  secured  to  the 
ring  rail  with  the  pro- 
jecting lug  on  theoutside. 
When  the  cop  is  building 
the  separator  is  upright 
(see  fig.  1),  and  the  lug 
is  then  at  the  top  part  of 
the  small  bracket  to 
prevent     the     separator 


Fig.   1. 

falling  forward.  When 
the  cop  is  finished  the 
separators  are  pushed 
back  by  hand  (see  fig.  2), 
this  brings  the  lug  in 
contact  with  the  bracket 
at  a  lower  point  and  thus 
prevents  it  from  falling 
too  far  back ;  when  by 
the  slighest  touch  with 
the  fingers  replaces  it 
again  in  workingposition. 
Advantages  of 
the  separators. — The 


Fig    2. 


220 


diameter  of  the  ring  can  be  increased  by  iin.  representing 
16  per  cent,  less  doffings,  the  spindle  speed  can  be  increased 
at  least  5  per  cent,  for  the  higher  counts,  and  up  to  10  per 
cent,  for  the  lower,  counts,  making  a  total  worthy  of  con- 
sideration. A  lighter  traveller  can  be  used,  and  the  spinning 
of  soft  yarn  is  facilitated,  the  quality  improved,  the  yarn 
being  smooth  and  more  elastic. 

In  the  present  apparatus  we  have  endeavoured  to  remove 
all  defects  and  have  no  hesitation  in  stating  that  it  is 
undoubtedly  the  most  satisfactory  for  the  purpose  yet  intro- 
duced. It  is  simplicity  itself  and  cannot  possibly  get  out  of 
order,  and  it  does  not  in  any  way  interfere  with  the  work  of 
the  piecers  and  doffers. 

We  also  supply,  when  specially  ordered,  separators  or 
fingers  attached  to  angle  iron  placed  midway  in  the  lift  and 
so  arranged  that  when  the  ring  rail  reaches  a  certain  height 
the  whole  arrangement  falls  automatically  out  of  action. 
After  doffing  it  is  replaced  by  hand. 

Other  ballooning  arrangements. — We  can  if  de- 
sired supply  the  well-known  "Shepherd  &  Midgley's" 
Motion,or  the  half-circle  steel  plate,  which  automatically 
falls  out  of  action  at  any  given  portion  of  the  lift. 

Rollers. — We  supply  loose  boss  top  rollers  to  front 
line  if  required.  Bottom  rollers  case-hardened  all  over,  or 
in  the  necks  and  squares  only  if  desired. 

Creels  can  be  made  in  any  of  the  usual  forms  for  double 
or  single  rovings.  The  supports  for  the  skewers  carrying 
the  roving  bobbins  are  made  of  strong  angle  iron,  lined  with 
wood.  These  are  carried  by  strong  upright  rods  supporting 
the  usual  top  board  for  holding  the  roving  bobbins  not  in  use. 
For  double  roving  we  sometimes  use  a  special  cast-iron  flat 
creel.  By  employing  this  creel  two  rows  of  roving  bobbins 
can  be  used,  and  the  necessity  of  high  creels  is  dispensed  with. 

Fig.  1  shows  a  "  Birkenhead  "  creel  for  double  roving, 
fig.  2  "Birkenhead"  creel  for  single  roving;  this  gives  a 
lower  creel  than  the  ordinary  vertical  type,  fig.  3.  Fig.  4 
is  a  vertical  creel  for  double  roving. 

Strap  fork  for  starting  and  stopping  the  frame  is  so 
arranged  that  the  machine  can  be  set  in  motion  or  stopped 
from  either  side. 

The  machine  can  be  arranged  for  either  rope  or  belt 
driving.  When  rope  driving  is  adopted  we  use  specially- 
designed  fast  and  loose  rope  pulleys,  the  fast  pulley  having 

221 


Fig.  3. 


222 


Fig.  4. 


two  grooves,  one  of  which  is  shallow  and  allows  the  frame 
to  start  gradually. 

In  very  long  frames  the  driving  pulleys  may  be  placed 
in  the  middle  of  the  frame,  and  in  this  case  the  front  rollers 
are  usually  made  to  run  through  from  end  to  end.  This 
arrangement  is  quite  convenient  in  all  respects  where  the 
frames  must  be  very  long  to  fill  up  the  room. 

Waste  ring  spinning  frames. — We  make  ring 
frames  for  spinning  waste, 
arranged  with  surface  drums  to 
receive  the  condenser  bobbins, 
or  with  creels  to  take  cheeses 
directfromtheCardingEngine. 
The  Illustration  shows  an  up- 
right creel  to  take  the  small 
cheeses  of  bobbins  which  are 
usually  carried  on  small  tin 
tubes  with  a  large  head. 

Length  of  ring  frames. 
To  find  the  number  of  spindles 
that  will  stand  in  a  given 
length,  deduct  the  space  for 
the  gearing  as  given  below, 
and  divide  the  remainder  by 
the  gauge.  The  result  multi- 
plied by  two  will  be  the  number 
of  spindles.  The  number  of 
spindles  in  spinning  frames 
must  be  divisible  by  four. 

To  find  the  length  of  a 
ring  frame  of  a  given  number 
of  spindles  multiply  half  the 
number  of  spindles  by  the 
gauge  and  add : — Frames  with 
ordinary  driving,  2ft.  7in. 
Frame  rollers  driven  in  the 
middle,  3ft.  5|in.     Frames. driven  at  both  ends,  4ft.  2in. 

Spinning  Frame  Gauges,  etc. 


In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

Gauge 

n 

^i 

'^1 

n 

'2^'k 

3 

Diameter  of  Kino;        : 

llorli 

H 

1^ 

H 

U 

2 

Diam   of  Spindle  Wharve... 

i 

i 

^ 

7 
S 

I 

1 

223 


When  Separators  or  anti-ballooning  plates  are  employed 
the  gauges  may  be  iin.  less,  whilst  the  ring  remains  the 
same  diameter. 

Lift,  usually  4in,  to  6in.  for  weft,  and  5in.,  5oin.,  6in. 
and  7in.  for  twist,  and  coarse  counts  up  to  Sin. 

Width  of  frames. — We  have  patterns  for  frames 
2ft.  9in.  and  3ft.  wide.     The  usual  width  is  3ft. 

Hand  of  frame. — To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
frame  stand  facing  the  gearing  end  and  state  which  hand  the 
driving  pulleys  must  be  placed. 

Horse  power.— Medium  counts  90  spindles  to  i.h.p. 

Driving  pulleys, —  lOin.  to  ISin.  dia.  for  3iin.  or  4in. 
belt.  The  height  of  driving  shaft  from  floor  is  1ft.  6in.  for 
5in.  lift,  and  1ft.  52in.  for  6in.  lift,  and  the  dia.  is  l^in. 

Speeds.— 5,500  to  7,500  revs,  of  spls.  for  lO's  to  15's 
7,500  to  9,000       „  „  15's  to  20's 

9,000  to  9,500      „  „        24's  upwards 

Strapping,  etc. — 3iin.  is  the  usual  width  for  main 
driving  belt,  but  we  sometimes  use  a  4in.  for  long  frames. 
If  the  frame  is  supplied  with  a  tin  roller  rope  drive,  10ft.  of 
iin.  dia.  rope  will  be  required.  Spindle  band. — 70in. 
long  per  spindle. 

Weights. — Gearing  1,300  lbs.,  to  which  must  be  added 
the  remainder  of  franTe  per  spindle,  as  follows : — 

2fin.  gauge,  17  lbs.  •.  Roller  and  balance 

2|in.  gauge,  17'2  lbs.  '  weight,  577  lbs. 

For  gross  weight  add  32  per  cent. 
Description  of  Gearing,  etc. 

A      Tin  roller 

B      CoHipound  tin  roller  W.,  25Tand40T 


Wheel  on  twist  wheel  I. 
stud  gearing  with  B  i 


60Tor75T 

D      Twist  wheel       20t  to  60t 

E      Draught  wheel 30t  to  60t 

F      Front  roller  pinion    20t 

G  Crown  W.  on  draught  W.  stud  lOOx 

H  Back  roller  wheel... 54t  or  can  change 

J  ,,     driving  middle  roller     ...     30t 

K  ,,     to  middle  roller  carrier...     50t 

L      Middle  roller  wheel 23t 

M     Front  roller  end  wheel    70t 

N  Large  carrier  or  lifter  driving  W135t 


N' 

Carrier  to  F.R 70t 

O 

Lifter  wheel        35t 

P 

Q 

Compound    spur    and    bevel   lifter 
wheel,  spur  50t,  bevel  17t 

R 

Lifter  bevel 40t 

S 

18t 

T 

, 120T 

U 

Spindle  wharve 

V 

Ring 

w 

Front  roller 

X 

Middle  roller 

Y 

Back  roller 

z 

Driving  pulleys 

224 


';?• 


Calculations. 


Production  in      j  ^^^'^-  °f  ^P^^-  P^^  "^^"-  ^  ^^  "^'"^• 
Hanks  per  hour    1 


Turns  per  inch  x  840  3'ds. 


=  hanks. 


Lbs.  per  hour 


Hanks  per  hour 
Counts 


lbs  per  hour. 


.  The  table  on  pages  230  and  231  gives  the  theoretical 
production  of  ring  frames  in  10  hours'  continuous  working. 
The  corresponding  loss  of  time  for  doffing,  cleaning,  etc., 
must  be  deducted. 

Spindle  speed.— In  calculating  the  speed  of  spindles, 
add  the  thickness  of  the  spindle  band  to  the  diameters  of 
the  tin  roller  and  spindle  wharves,  the  result  will  be  very 
approximately  the  actual  speed  of  the  spindles. 

Soeed  of   1       Speed  of  line  shaft  x  drum  x  dia.  of  tin  roller -•- band 
Spindles    j  Pulley  on  the  frame  x  dia.  of  wharve -;- band 

Draft  constant. — Our  usual  arrangement  is  shown 
on  the  plan  of  gearmg,  namely,  20  on  front  roller,  driving 
100  on  change  wheel  stud,  and  54  on  the  back  roller.  If 
/  =  diameter  of  front  roller,  and  6  — that  of  back  roller,  and 
.r==the  change  wheel,  then 

54  X  100  X  /  270  X  / 

X  X  20  X  b  X  X  b 


Draft 


270  draft  constant. 


270  is  therefore  the  draft  constant  if  the  front  and  back 
rollers  are  the  same  diameter,  and  the  following  table  gives 
the  constants  for  other  combinations  of  rollers  : — 


Dia.  front  roller 

, ,    back 
Constant     with    54 

back  roller  wheel 


In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

In. 

if 

if 

if 

if 

i 

1 

i 

^ 

^ 

1 

1^ 

H 

u 

if 

i 

^ 

1 

§ 

^ 

1 

^ 

1 

1 

1 

1 

n 

270 

•261 

234 

219 

270 

252 

236 

270 

253 

270 

287 

304 

270 

Divide  the  constants  by  draft  required  to  get  necessary 
change  wheel, 
constant 


Also 


draft  that  wheel  gives. 


change  wheel  on 

Twist  constants. — On  the  tin  roller  shaft  is  a  com- 
pound   driving    wheel   with    25    and   40   teeth,  which   gear 

226 


respectively  with  75  and  60  on  the  twist  wheel  stud.    Either 
of  these  pairs  may  be  used  as  desired. 
Front  roller    Twist  carrier  Dia.  of  tin 

wheel.  wheel.        roller  in  ^th  ;- band. 

81  1 


70 


75 


=  676"8  constant 


.V  25  8  3  1416 

Twist  Driving  Dia.  of        Circumference 

wheel.  wheel.  wharve  in  Jth    of  lin.  F.  roller. 

-;-  band. 
Constant  divided  by  turns  per  inch  =  twist  wheel. 

twist  wheel  =  turns  per  inch. 

The  following  table  gives  constants  for  both  com- 
binations with  finch,  Jinch,  and  1  inch  spindle  wharves  and 
various  diameters  of  rollers  : — 


Diameter 
Spindle 
Wharve 

of 

Compound 

Combination 

Wheel 

Diameter  of 

Front  Rollers 

filn. 

iin.        if  in. 

lin. 

l^in. 

ijin.  ; 

f  inch 

25/75 
40/60 

953 

4765 

884 
442 

826 
413 

774 
387 

728 
364 

688      ' 
344 

i  inch 

25/75 
40/60 

834 
417 

775 
3875 

723 
3615 

676-8 
339 

638 
319 

602 
301 

1  inch 

25/75 
40/60 

741 
370-5 

688 
344 

642 
321' 

602 
301 

566 
283 

535 
267 -5 

Turns  per 
inch  for 


Twist  whec 

constant 
twist  wheel 


ring  twist  =    ^/  counts  X  4.       |    gq^^re  root  table 
ring  weft   =    ^  counts  x  3'5.   J        on  page  229. 

constant 


Twist 
per  inch 


Twist 
constant 


turns  per  inch  required. 

=  turns  per  inch  given  by  that  wheel. 

on 

Dia.  of  tin  roller  plus  band  x  C  x  M. 

D  X  B  X  Cir  of  F  R  x  dia.  of  wharve  plus  band. 
D  —  Twist  change  wheel. 

Dia.  of  tin  roller  plus  band  x  C  x  M. 


B  X  Cir  of  F  R  X  dia.  of  wharve  plus  band. 
To  find  the  draft. — Counts  -=-  hank  roving  =  draft. 
To  find  the  hank  roving. — Counts  -f-  draft  =  hank  roving. 
To  find  the  counts. — Length  of  yarn  -^  weight  in  grains  =  counts,  or 
8333  -r-  the  grains  per  yard. 

Revs,  of  Z  X  B  X  D. 
Revolutions  of  front  roller  

C  X  M. 


227 


Travellers. 

Below  we  give  an  approximate  list  of  travellers  for 
various  counts  of  yarn.  It  will  be  understood  that  it  is 
impossible  to  fix  these  definitely  as  the  conditions  vary 
considerably,  and  the  list  herewith  is  only  given  as  a  guide  :  — 


Counts  of 

Diameter  of 

Traveller 

Counts  of 

Diameter  of 

Traveller    i 

Yarn 

Ring 

No. 

Yarn 

Ring 

No.          1 

In. 

In. 

! 

6 

2 

8 

30 

IS 

5/0         ' 

8 

2 

•        7 

32 

n 

6/0 

10 

2 

6          1 

34 

Ig 

7/0     : 

12 

11 

5 

36 

If 

8/0 

14 

n 

4 

38 

u 

9/0 

IG 

If 

3 

40 

u 

10/0 

18 

If 

2 

1         '^-^ 

il 

11/0 

20 

i§ 

1 

45 

u 

12/0 

22 

u 

1/0 

!          50 

u 

13/0 

24 

If 

2/0 

55 

ij-ii 

14/0 

26 

11 

3/0 

60 

1^—18 

15/0 

28 

11 

4/0 

70 

li-iS 

16/0 

The  above  list  is  given  for  American  cotton.  Indian 
cotton  requires  4  to  5  sizes  lighter,  and  Egyptian  and  Sea 
Islands  cotton  4  to  5  sizes  heavier. 


228 


Square  Roots. 


t 

1  NO. 

1  '^ 

1 

j  No. 

\/ 

No. 

1          , 

No. 

V~ 

!    t 

1 

51 

7141 

101 

10049 

151 

12-288 

t    2 

liU 

52 

7-211 

102 

10099 

152 

12*328 

1    3 

r732 

53 

7-280 

103 

10-148   I 

153 

12*369 

!    4 

20 

;   54 

7348 

104 

10198 

154 

12  409 

'    5 

2-236 

55 

7*416 

105 

10-246 

155 

12*449 

1    ^ 

2449 

,   56 

7-483 

106 

10-295 

156 

12490 

7 

2645 

57 

7*549 

!   107 

10-344   ' 

157 

12529 

8 

2*828 

58 

7615 

108 

10-392 

158 

12*569 

9 

30 

59 

7*681 

109 

10-440   1 

159 

12*609 

10 

3-162 

'60 

7745 

no 

10*468   i 

160 

12649 

\      11 

3316 

61 

7*810 

111 

10.535   ! 

161 

12*688 

12 

3464 

62 

7.874 

112 

10*583 

162 

12*727 

:    13 

3605 

:   63 

7*937 

113 

10630 

163 

12*767 

1    i-t 

3"741 

64 

8*0 

114 

10  677 

164 

12*806 

15 

3-872 

65 

8-062 

115 

10*723  ' 

165 

12*845 

!   16 

40 

66 

8*124 

116 

10770 

166 

12-884 

17 

4123 

67 

8*185 

117 

10-816   , 

167 

12-922 

'   18 

4*242 

68 

8246 

118 

10-862   1 

168 

12*961 

IQ 

4358 

69 

8306 

119 

10908 

169 

130 

i   20 

4-472 

70 

8*366 

120 

10-954 

170 

13038 

21 

4-582 

71 

8*426 

121 

110 

171 

13076 

1   22 

4  690 

72 

8*4a5 

122 

11-045 

172 

13114 

23 

4-795 

73 

8*544 

123 

11090 

173 

13152 

24 

4-898 

74 

8602 

124 

11135 

174 

13190 

25 

50 

75 

8*660 

125 

11180 

175 

13*228 

26 

5-099 

76 

8-717 

126 

11224 

176 

13*266 

27 

5  196 

77 

8774 

127 

11-269   , 

177 

13*304 

28 

5-291 

78 

8-831 

128 

11313 

178 

13*341 

29 

5-385 

79 

8-888 

129 

11-357 

179 

13-379 

30 

5-477   i 

80 

8-944 

130 

11401 

180 

13*416 

31 

5567 

81 

9*0 

131 

11*445 

181 

13-453 

32 

5-656   1 

82 

9*055 

132 

11-489 

182 

13*490 

33 

5-744 

83 

9110 

133 

11-532 

183 

13  527 

34 

5-830   1 

8t 

9*165 

134 

11*575 

184 

13-564 

35 

5-9I6 

85 

9*219 

1.35 

11*618 

1&5 

13-601 

36 

60 

86 

9*273 

136 

•11*661 

186 

13638 

37 

6-082 

87 

9*327 

137 

11704 

187 

13-674 

3S 

6164 

88 

9*380 

138 

11-747 

188 

13-711 

39 

6-245 

89 

9-433 

139 

11-789 

189 

13-747 

40 

6324 

90 

9-486 

140 

11-832 

190 

13-784 

41 

6-403 

91 

9-539 

141 

11-874 

191 

13  820 

42 

6-48    1 

92 

9591 

142 

11916 

192 

13*856 

43 

6-557  ! 

93 

9*643 

143 

11-958 

193 

13*892 

44 

6-633   ! 

94 

9695 

144 

120 

194 

13*928 

45 

6  708 

95 

9*746 

145 

12041 

195 

13*964 

46 

6782 

'  96 

9*797 

146 

12083 

196 

14*0 

47 

6-855 

97 

9*848 

147 

12124 

197 

14*0.35 

48 

6-928   ' 

98 

9*899 

148 

12  165 

198 

14  071 

49 

7-0 

99 

9-949 

149 

12206 

199 

1   14106 

50 

7071   1 

100 

100 

150 

12-247 

200 

j   14*142 

RING     SPINNING 

Calculated   Production  for   10  Actual 


TWIST 

(turns  =    \ 

'counts  X  4) 

o 

O 

1 

C    0)    4) 

^T3  a 

Revs,  of 
Spindles 
per  Min. 

Hanksper 
Spl.  per 
10  Hours. 

Hi 

0 

Is 

5 

In. 

2 

3 

894 

i| 

203*5 

559*29 

5,000 

11*09 

2*21 

4*23 

2 

3 

244*2 

671*14 

6.000 

13*31 

266 

7 

2 

3 

1058 

1 

189*16 

519*83 

5,500 

10*31 

1*472 

5*92     1 

2 

3 

206*37 

567*107 

6,000 

11*252 

1*607 

2 

3 

223*5 

614*36 

6,500 

12*18 

1*74 

10 

13 

12'64 

172*74 

474-7 

6.000 

9*418 

*9418 

8*47 

1 

194*32 

534  01 

6.750 

io;59 

1*059 

li 

25 

1 

215-92 

593*35 

7,500 

11*77 

1*177 

12 

ji 

2a 

13*85 

■2 

157*64 

433*21 

6,000 

8*595 

•716 

10-16 

21 

s 

183  9 

505*41 

7,000 

10  02 

*835 

22 

]_ 

183*7 

.577*61 

8,000 

11-46 

*955 

14 

il 

2| 

1496 

I 

145*95 

40107 

6,000 

7-9.57 

*.568 

11^86 

: 

1 

148*8 

467*91 

7,000 

9*283 

•663 

2I 

1     1 

170*1 

.5.34*75 

8.000 

10*61 

■758 

16 

i; 

2S 

16 

J  29*26 

406*25 

6.500 

806 

*603 

13*55 

2     i 

149  1 

468*75 

7,.500 

93 

•.581 

1 

2^ 

1 

169 

531*25 

8.500 

10*54 

•658 

18 

i 

16-96 

121*8 

383*25 

6,500 

7604 

•422 

15*25 

2 

]_ 

140*7 

442*21 

7,500 

8*77 

*487 

Is 

2| 

1 

1.59*4 

501*18 

8,.500 

9944 

•.552 

20 

ll 

17'88 

1      ! 

124*5 

391*49 

7,000 

7*765 

'388 

16*94 

li 

■1      1 

142*35 

447*42 

8,000 

8*877 

•443 

U 

2!- 

1      j 

160*15 

503*35 

9.000 

9*985 

•499 

22 

iS 

2g 

1876 

118-72 

373*13 

7.000 

7*403 

•336 

18*63 

li 

25- 

1.35*6 

426*43 

8,000 

8*46 

•384 

1% 

25 

1 

152*64 

479-74 

9.000 

9*518 

*432 

24. 

iS 

25 

19*59 

^       1 

113*69 

357-32 

7,000 

7*09 

•295 

20*33 

12- 

25- 

1      i 

129  92 

408  37 

8,000 

8*102 

•337 

1§ 

25 

1      i 
1 

146*16 

459*41 

9,000 

9*115 

•379 

WEFT 

(turns  =  V 

counts 

X  3-5). 

5 

7*826 

7 

232*49 

638*89 

5.000 

1267 

2.53 

4-23 

6 
3? 

2 

278*9 

766*67 

6.000 

15*2 

3*04 

7 

rt 

9*2.57 

216*2 

59414 

5..500 

11*788 

1*68 

5^92 

S 

235*86 

648*15 

6.000 

12*86 

1837 

hW 

2.55*5 

702  17 

6,.500 

13*931 

1*99 

10 

oq 

11*06 

189*18 

519  89 

5.750 

10  31 

1*03 

8-47 

II 

213  86 

587*7 

6.500 

11*66 

116 

t/i 

■ZC 

238*.52 

655*5 

7,250 

13*0 

13 

12 

2 

1212 

173 

474*42 

5.7.50 

9-41 

*78 

W16 

-s 

'Oi 

202*6 

556  93 

6,7.50 

11*05 

*92 

0 

II 

203*.52 

639*43 

7.750 

12*68 

1*05 

14 

1309 

159*84 

4.39-26 

5.7.50 

8*715 

*622 

11  ^86 

0 

% 

164*13 

515*66 

6,750 

1013 

*73 

0 

3 

188*45 

592*05 

7.750 

11*74 

•8.38 

16 

h 

14 

136*36 

428*57 

6,000 

8*503 

•53 

1.3-55 

I 

u 

159*15 

500 

7,000 

9*92 

•62 

■5; 

a 

181*88 

571*42 

8,000 

11 -.337 

*708 

18 

a 

(2 

14*84 

128*69 

404*.31 

6,000 

.  8*022 

*445 

1525 

"£ 

150*14 

471*7 

7,000 

9-3.59 

*519 

^ 

G 

171*59 

53908 

8,000 

10*69 

•593 

20 

^ 

'3j 

3 

15*65 

1.32*25 

415*33 

6,500 

8*24. 

•412 

16  ^94 

•CC 

152*.54 

479.23 

7.500 

9*.508 

•475 

i 

172*88 

543  13 

8*500 

10*776 

■538 

22 

J- 

16*41 

126*08 

.396  1 

6.500 

7*859 

*3.57 

18^63 

^'X 

IB 

145*46 

457 

7,500 

9^067 

*412 

0 

164*87 

517*97 

8,. 500 

W27 

*466 

24 

s 

1714 

120  7 

379*22 

6,.500 

7*524 

•313 

20  33 

^ 

^ 

13928 

4.37*57 

7.500 

8*681 

•361 

^ 

1.57*84 

495*9 

8.500 

9  839 

•409 

230 


Working   Hours  of  Frame. 


TWIST. 


! 

o 

ii 

0) 

3 
O 

5^ 

Inches 
delivered 
per  Min. 

Revs,  of 
Spindle 
per  Min. 

i&3 

Lbs.  per 
Spl.  per 
10  Hours. 

French 
Nos. 

In. 

In. 

26 

1* 

25 

20"39    1 

117 

367-82 

7,. 500 

7-289 

•28 

22-02 

1§ 

25 

132-7 

416-87 

8.500 

8271 

"318 

15 

25 

148-3 

465-91 

9.. 500 

9-244 

•3.554 

28 

15 

25 

•21- 16    1 

112-7 

354-44 

7,500 

7-032 

-251 

23-72 

IS 

25 

127-6 

401-7 

8.. 500 

7-97 

•284 

15 

25 

1 

142-9 

448-96 

9..500 

8-9 

-317 

30 

il 

25 

21-9    1 

116-2 

365-3 

8.000 

7 '248 

•2416 

25-41 

15 

25 

130-8 

410-9 

9.000 

8-15 

•271 

l§ 

2h 

14.')-2 

4.56-62 

10.000 

906 

-.302 

32 

1r 

21 

2262    1 

112-5 

353-67 

8.000 

7-017 

-219 

27-10 

1h 

2i 

126-6 

397-87 

9,000 

7-894 

-246 

ji 

2^ 

150-6 

442-08 

10,000 

8-771 

-274 

36 

1r 

25 

24      1 

106-1 

333-33 

8,('00 

6  61 

-183 

30-49 

1- 

25 

1 

119-3 

375 

9,000 

7-44 

•206 

Ih 

2^ 

1 

132-5 

416-66 

10,000 

8-26 

•229 

40 

Ih 

2.5"29    1 

100-6 

316-33 

8,000 

6276 

-1569 

33-88 

1^ 

2I 

1 

113-2 

355-87 

9.000 

7-O6 

•1764 

1^ 

i 

125-9 

395-4 

10,000 

7-845 

•1961 

44 

li 

26-.53  j  1 

89-96 

282-7 

7,.500 

5- 609 

-127 

37-27 

2* 

102 

320-39 

8,.500 

6-3.59 

•144 

i§ 

2* 

1  1^ 

107-31 

358-08 

9,.500 

7-104 

-1615 

Ih 

24 

Ir'fi 

1129 

377 

10.000 

7-48 

•17 

48 

l| 

2* 

27-71    1 

86-1 

270-66 

7,500 

5-37 

•1118 

40-66 

if 

2^ 

97-.59 

396-74 

8,500 

6-086 

•1268 

2* 

Ih 

102-7 

342-83 

9..500 

6-802 

•1416 

l| 

24 

U\ 

108-1 

360-89 

10,000 

7-I6 

-1491 

50 

li 

24 

28-28    1 

78-7 

247-.52 

7,000 

4-911 

•098 

42-35 

l| 

2h 

!  1^ 

84*7 

282-8« 

8,(X)0 

5-612 

•1122 

li 

2h 

i  lr\ 

95-3 

318-24 

9,000 

6-314 

•1262 

I5 

2* 

i  1t\ 

105-9 

.353-6 

10,(X¥) 

7-OI6 

•1403 

WEFT. 


: 

1784 

1204 

.378.36 

6.750 

7-507 

-288 

22-02 

6 

1.^-2 

4.34-41 

7,7.50 

8-619 

•331 

3? 

156-1 

490-47 

8,750 

9731 

-374 

28 

18-51 

116 

364-66 

6,7.50 

7-235 

-258 

23-72 

1332 

418-^9 

7,750 

8-307 

-296 

CN 

150-4 

472-71 

8,7.50 

9*379 

•334 

30 

II 

0 

19- 15 

120-4 

378-59 

7,250 

7.511 

*25 

25-41 

c/1 

3 

137 

430-8 

8,2.50 

8-547 

•285 

.s 

-J. 

153-7 

483 '02 

9,250 

9-583 

-317 

32 

^ 

^ 

19-79 

II6-5 

366.34 

7,250 

7-268 

-227 

27-10 

0 

II 

1.326 

416-87 

8.2.50 

8*271 

•2.58 

148-7 

467-4 

9,2.50 

9-273 

-289 

36 

■^ 

<U 

21 

109-8 

345-23 

7,2.50 

6-85 

•19 

30-49 

1 

^ 

125 

392-85 

8.250 

7-794 

-216 

H 

140*2 

440-47 

9,2.50 

8-739 

-242 

40 

tc 

22-13 

104-2 

327-6 

7.250 

6-5 

-162 

33-88 

.2 

S) 

a 

1186 

372  79 

8,2.50 

7-396 

•1849 

3 

1.33 

417-98 

9,250 

8-293 

*2073 

44 

c 

"3* 

23-21 

92-57 

290-82 

6.750 

5-77 

*131 

37*27 

Xi 

a 

1 

106 

333-9 

7,750 

6-624 

15 

? 

-3 

3 
C 

lA 

112-9 

377 

8,7.50 

7-48 

*17 

5 

ix^ 

II8-7 

396-38 

9  200 

7-864 

*178 

48 

2424 

1 

88-6 

278-46 

6,7.50 

5-525 

•115 

40-66 

101-7 

319-72 

7,750 

6^343 

•1.32 

^ 

\t\ 

108-1 

360-97 

8,750 

7-162 

-149 

1- 

c 

It^t 

113^5 

379-53 

9,200 

7-538 

-1.57 

.50 

0 

5 

24-74 

83-6 

262-73 

6,-500 

5-212 

104 

42-35 

5r 

; 

IjL 

90-8 

303-15 

7,.500 

6-014 

•120 

Irs 

102-9 

343-57 

8..500 

6'817 

*136 

llR 

111-4 

.371-86 

9,200 

7-378 

*1475 

231 


RING   SPINNING   FRAME   QUERIES. 

To  be  Answered  when  Ordering  Machines. 

How  many  frames  ? 

Facing  gearinj^  end.  must  Pulley  be  on  right  or  left  hand  ? 

Length  overall  ?     (Gearing  occupies  2ft.  7in.) 

Width  of  frame?     (usually  3ft.)  « 

Number  of  spindles  ? 

Gauge  or  distance  between  spindles  ? 

Length  of  lift? 

Inside  diameter  of  ring  ? 

Improved  "  Phoenix  "  spindle  to  run  twist  or  weft  way  ? 

Diameter  of  spindle  wharve  ?  For  bobbins  or  paper  tubes  ? 

Spindles  to  have  solid  bottom  or  detachable  oil  cup  ? 

Speed  of  spindles  ? 

Diameter  of  tin  rollers  (usually  lOin.)  Single  or  double  tin  rollers  ? 

Counts  to  be  spun  ?  Class  of  cotton  used  ? 

Hank  roving  to  be  used  ?  Single  or  double  ? 

Direction  in  which  roving  comes  off  creel  bobbin  ? 

How  many  revs,  of  spindle  to  one  of  front  roller?  Or  turns  per  inch  ? 

Creel  one  height  ?  Or  two  heights  ?  (See  illustrations.) 

Separators  ? 

Diameters  of  top  rollers:         Front Second Third 

Diameters  of  bottom  rollers:   Front Second Third 

Draft  from  front  to  second Second  to  third Total. 

Shortest  distance  front  to  second To  open  to • 

Front  line  bottom  rollers  case-hardened  ? 

Necks  and  squares  of  second  and  third  lines  case-hardened  ? 

Or  necks  and  squares  only  of  all  three  lines  case-hardened  ? 

Loose  boss  front  top  rollers?  Ordinary  or  self-lubricating  ? 

Front  rollers  dead-weighted  ?  Second  and  third  lines  self-weighted  •■ 

Or  all  three  lines  weighted  by  saddles,  levers,  and  weights  ? 

Angle  or  incline  of  roller  stands  ? 

Total  length  of  skewer  ? 

Length  and  diameter  of  roving  bobbin  ? 

Rope  driving  and  tightening  pulleys  for  tin  rollers  ?  , 

Speed  of  line  shaft  ?  Height  from  floor  ? 

Diameter  of  drum  on  line  shaft  ? 

Diameter  of  pulley  on  frame  ? 

Driven  from  above  or  below  ? 

Are  guide  pulleys  to  be  supplied  ?  If  by  half-crossed  strap  give  sketch. 

Is  hank  indicator  to  be  supplied  ? 

Are  top  rollers  to  be  covered  ? 

Are  clearers  to  be  covered  ? 

Additional  change  wheels,  &c.,  supplied  free  of  charge  :— 

4  draft  wheels.  2  twist  wheels,  and  6  top  rollers  per  frame. 

If  more  required,  particulars  of  same  to  be  given. 

EXTRAS  :  — 

Loose  boss  rollers  ?  Wood  plugs  or  sleeves  for  paper  tubes  \ 

Lubricating  arrangement  for        do.  ?  Creel  for  double  roving  ? 

Case-hardened   rollers   or   necks   and        Birkenhead  type  of  creel  ? 

squares  ?  Rope  driving  and  tightening  pulleys  ? 

Heth  s  patent  separators  ?  Hank  indicators  ? 

Full  cop  stop  motion  for  weft  frames  ?         Guide  pulleys  ? 
Detachable  oil  cup  to  spindle  ?  Coverim^  rollers  and  clearers? 

Above  Snin.  lift? 

Patent  metal  thread  lappets  ? 

232 


GENERAL  VIEW  OF  WET    DOUBLER. 


133 


Doubling  Frames. 


Doubling  frames  are  usually  made  on  the  ring 
principle,  but  if  desired  we  still  make  the  flyer  doubler. 

The  accompanying  illustrations  show  elevations  of  the 
machine  and  gearing,  with  sections  through  the  roller  beam 
for  the  different  systems  of  doubling,  etc. 

The  machine  has  been  carefully  overhauled,  and  many 
improvements  are  embodied  in  it. 

All  parts  are  made  on  the  interchangeable  principle  as 
in  the  ring  spinning  frame,  and  each  part  is  provided  with 
a  letter  or  numeral  so  that  in  case  of  breakdown  the  necessary 
renewals  can  be  ordered  with  the  assurance  that  they  will 
be  sent  according  to  order  and  fit  in  place  correctly. 

The  gearing  ends  are  designed  to  facilitate  the 
necessary  changes  required  for  any  kinds  of  doubling. 

The  wheels  are  all  machine  moulded,  and  the  teeth 
are  cleaned  by  machinery ;  cut  wheels  can  be  supplied  if 
desired. 

The  pedestals  for  the  driving  shaft  rest  on  broad 
ledges,  and  every  convenience  is  provided  for  oiling.  Long 
oil  tubes  are  used,  placed  in  convenient  and  conspicuous 
places  for  such  holes  as  are  not  readily  accessible. 

Panels  enclose  the  gearing  and  off-ends  of  the  frames, 
and  these  form  a  guard  against  accidents. 

Tin  rollers. — We  make  frames  with  either  single  or 
double  tin  rollers,  as  desired.  Double  tin  rollers  are 
sometimes  used  for  dry  doubling,  but  single  rollers  are 
always  preferred  for  wet  doubling.  We  strongly  advise 
single  rollers  in  all  cases,  because  with  the  spindles  all  being 
driven  from  one  cylinder,  there  is  not  the  same  liability  of 
slipping,  and  the  result  is  that  a  more  uniform  twist  is 
obtained.  The  rollers  are  made  in  short  lengths  of  very 
strong  material,  coupled  by  stout  cast-iron  shafts. 

The  roller  bearings. — The  tin  roller  shafts  run  in 
*'  Mohler"  self-adjusting  and  self-lubricating  bearings,  which 
are  cast-iron  on  cast-iron. 

Girder  rails  are  of  a  deep  and  very  strong  section,  with 
planed  surfaces  for  carrying  the  spindles,  etc. 

234 


Ring  rails  are  made  of  wrought-iron  planed  on  the  top 
and  let  into  the  poker  top  where  they  are  also  joined,  so  that 
they  cannot  be  accidentally  displaced;  they  are  consequently 
very  firm. 

Splash  boards  are  usually  supplied  with  the  wet 
doubling  frames  to  prevent  the  water  from  getting  on  to  the 
bands  and  tin  rollers. 

The  lifting  of  the  ring  rail  is  operated  by  a  lever 
arrangement,  with  adjustable  balance  weights.  The  chain 
and  bowl  system  can  be  supplied  if  preferred. 

The  rocking  levers  for  lifting  the  pokers  are  made  in 
halves,  so  that  the  ring  rails  can  easily  be  set  dead  level. 

Frames  are  made  suitable  for  all  classes  of  doubling. 
The  principal  systems  are  known  as  the  English  dry, 
English  wet,  and  the  Scotch  system,  this  latter  being  also  a 
wet  system.  A  description  of  each  system,  with  illustration, 
is  given  below. 


IRON   RODI 


ENGLISH   SYSTEM 
(dry) 


English  system  dry  doubling. — In  this  system  the 
yarn  comes  from  bobbins,  and  passes  under  an  iron  rod,  and 
over  a  glass  slit  guide  through  the  rollers  and  round  the  top 
roller,  afterwards  encircling  a  small  glass  pillar,  and  again 


235 


passing  through  the  rollers,  and  on  to  the  spindles.  The 
bottom  rollers  are  made  of  polished  steel  ifin.  dia.  for  hne 
counts  and  2in.  dia.  for  coarse  work,  and  the  top  rollers  are 
of  polished  cast-iron  2in.  dia.,  but  for  fine  work  ifin.  dia. 
is  more  suitable. 


English  system  wet  doubling — In  this  system  the 
yarn  from  the  bobbins  passes  under  a  glass  rod  in  water  and 
on  to  the  roller,  and  direct  to  the  spindles.  The  water 
troughs  are  placed  behind  and  independent  of  the  rollers, 
and  may  be  in  short  lengths  of  copper,  wood,  zinc,  or  por- 
celain. We  can,  however,  make  the  metal  and  wood  troughs 
in  one  continuous  length,  with  taps  at  the  ends  for  filling 
and  running  the  water  off. 

There  is  an  arrangement  at  the  end  of  the  frame  to  lift 
the  glass  rod  out  of  the  trough  for  cleaning,  etc. 

The  rollers  are  brass  covered,  if  in.  or  2in.  dia.  according 
to  the  counts  of  yarn  and  number  of  ends  up  being  doubled. 

Scotch  doubling. — In  the  Scotch  system  the  water 
trough  is  continuous,  and  is  carried  on  a  beam  with  frequent 
supports.  Inside  the  trough  and  in  the  water  runs  a  22in. 
hollow  brass  roller  which  can  be  raised  out  of  the  water  by 
means  of  a  handle  and  worm  gear  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
frame.  The  top  rollers  are  solid  and  brass  covered,  and 
Ifin.  in  diameter.  Copper  troughs  are  usually  made  in  long 
lengths  and  supplied  with  a  tap  or  other  means  for  drawing 
off  the  water  for  cleaning,  etc.  A  traverse  motion  is  also 
provided  for  these  frames. 

236 


We  recommend  that  the  bottom  rollers  run  inwards 
except  for  dry  doubling  and  fine  work;  when  we  then  arrange 
for  them  to  run  outwards,  if  not  specified  otherwise. 

Thread  boards  can  be  made  on  the  single  flap  board 

principle,  one  flap 
to  each  spindle  for 
dry  work.  For 
wet  work  the  flap 
board  is  usually 
hinged  in  half 
boxes,  wnth  glass 
rods  and  brass 
thread  guides ;  or 
made  in  one  contin- 
uous length  fixed 
I  to  the  beam,  and 
1  is  slightly  tilted  to 
allow  the  bobbins 
to  be  lifted  clear 
^  when  doffing.  In 
the  Scotch  sys- 
tem the  yarn 
usually  passes  over 
a  glass  rod  which 
is  grooved  for  each 
spindle,  and  this 
groove  acts  as  a 
guide,  seeing  that 
it  comes  directly 
over  the  centre  of  the  spindle,  and  therefore  no  thread 
boards  are  required. 

Spindles. — Sections  are  shown  of  the  "improved 
Phoenix"  and  also  of  the  ''Acme"  doubling  spindles. 

No.  1  shows  in  section  our  "Acme"  spindle  with  oil 
chamber  under  the  wharve.  No.  2  is  the  "  Improved 
Phoenix"  elastic  spindle  fitted  with  a  multiple  screw  oil 
cup.  This  spindle  can  be  made  with  or  without  oil  cup  if 
desired. 

Both  the  spindles  are  strongly  made.  They  can  be 
supplied  either  with  or  without  detachable  oil  cup,  and  they 
will  run  at  any  reasonable  speed.  Special  care  has  been 
taken  to  make  them  suitable  for  all  the  varied  requirements 
of  the  doubling  trade. 


SCOTCH    SYSTEM 


237 


1 


DOUBLING    SPINDLES. 

238 


Knee  brake.— An  exceedingly  simple  and  convenient 
brake,  which  also  acts  as  a  holding  down  catch,  can  be 
supplied  when   required.      When   large   heavy  spindles  are 

used  it  greatly  assists 
the  operati^'e  by  keeping 
the  spindles  from  revolv- 
ing while  piecing  up.  By 
simply  tilting  the  casting 
(which  rests  loose  on  the 
spindle  rail)  the  spindle 
can  be  removed,  and 
when  used  as  a  brake  it 
is  worked  by  pressing 
the  knee  against  the  pro- 
jecting part  in  front  of 
the  beam. 

Building  or  copp- 
ing motions.^ — Various 
kinds  of  lifts  or  copping 
motions  are  applied  to 
doublers.  With  flanged 
bobbins  the  ring  rail 
traverses  continually 
from  one  end  of  the 
bobbin  to  the  other.  If 
the  bobbin  be  made 
without  flanges  the 
ring  rail  commences  by 
travelling  the  full  length 
and  gradually  shortens  so  as  to  give  taper  ends  By  this 
means  each  layer  of  yarn  is  quickly  covered  up,  does  not  get 
dirty,  and  is  easily  reeled  or  wound  off.  Finally  the  cop 
may  be  built  exactly  like  the  spinning  frame  bobbin  by  the 
application  of  a  special  builder  motion. 

For  hard  twisted  or  wet  yarn  double-flanged  bobbins 
are  used,  and  the  straight  lift  motion  is  usually  adopted ; 
this  prevents  waste  in  the  handling  of  the  bobbins,  and  lends 
itself  to  a  very  easy  system  of  doffing. 

Creels  are  made  to  receive  cops,  ring  frame  bobbins, 
or  bobbins  with  double  flanges,  or  spools  or  cheeses  made 
on  the  Winding  Frame. 

The  creel  we  recommend  for  coarse  or  medium  counts 
is  the  one  known  as  the  porcupine  creel.     This  consists 


239 


of  wooden  rails  running  lengthway  of  the  frame,  to  which 
are  secured  steel  skewers  slightly  tilted  to  carry  flanged 
bobbins  or  Winding  frame  cheeses.  When  required,  we 
can  arrange  the  creel  so  that  the  yarn  is  drawn  vertically 
from  the  mule  or  ring  cop.  For  the  finer  yarns  we  can 
supply  a  2-height  vertical  creel,  so  that  the  bobbins  can 
be  carried  on  revolvmg  skewers.  By  this  arrangement 
there  is  less  strain  on  the  yarn  than  if  carried  by  the 
stationary  skewers  of  the  Porcupine  creel. 


Doubling  Frame  with  3-Height  Vertical  Creel. 


For  economical  doubling  of  two •  or  more  ends  into  one, 
we  strongly  advise  winding  the  yarn  with  the  required 
number  of  ends  together,  and  then  twist  them  on  the  doubler. 
By  this  arrangement  a  more  even  and  perfect  twist  is  pro- 
duced, and  there  is  considerably  less  waste. 


240 


Creels  for  winding  frame  bobbins  or  cheeses, 

say  5in.  dia.  per  spindle  requires  a  2-height  creel,  and  for 
every  additional  bobbin  per  spindle  2-heights  of  creel  extra 
will  be  required. 

Guards. —  We  supply  guards  to  all  wheels  and  moving 
parts,  and  all  dangerous  parts  are  cased  to  meet  the  views 
of  the  Factory  Inspector. 

Length  of  machine. — To  find  the  number  of  spindles 
that  will  stand  in  a  given  length,  deduct  the  proper  amount 
for  the  gearing  as  given  below,  and  divide  the  remainder  by 
the  gauge,  The  result  multiplied  by  two  will  be  the  number 
of  spindles.  The  number  of  spindles  must  be  divisible 
by  two. 

/Scotch  System  with  ordinary  driving...  2ft.  Siin. 

I  ,,  rollers  driven  in  the  middle  3ft.  42in. 

p         •    rf  -  "  driven  at  both  ends         ...  4ft.  llin. 

English  System  with  ordinary  driving. . .  2ft.  51  in. 

1  ,,  driven  in  the  middle        ...  3ft.  lOin. 

V  ,,  driven  at  both  ends         ...4ft.  7iin. 

Width  of  frames  are  3ft.  Oin.  wide  for  double  tin 
rollers,  and  3ft.  6in.  for  single  tin  roller  frames. 


Counts,  Gauge  and   Diameter  of  Rings,  etc. 


Gauge     

2i" 

2^ 

21" 

8" 

Si" 

3*" 

4" 

Dia.  of  Ring 

1^" 

ir 

2" 

n" 

n" 

21" 

3" 

Spindle    f 

Wharve ( 

1" 

1" 

U" 

ir 

U" 

H" 

ir 

Counts  When           I 

30s 

16s 

10s 

5s 

3s 

2s 

Doubled          ...  j 

to 
60s 

to 
30s 

to 
20s 

to 
10s 

to 
6s 

to 
3s 

Lift  4in.,  4iin.,  Sin.  or  6in. 

Hand  of  machine. — To  determine  the  hand  of  the 
machine  (for  doublers  with  double  cylinders)  stand  facing 
the  gearing  and  note  if  the  pulleys  must  be  on  the  right  or 
left  hand. 

Strapping. — The  main  driving  belt  is  usually  3iin. 
wnde,  but  for  long  or  heavy  frames  we  sometimes  use  a 
4in.  belt. 

Driving  pulleys. — These  are  usually  12in.  dia.,  but 
we  can  supply  up  to  16in.  if  required.  Width  32in.  or  4in. 
wide  according  to  the  length,  gauge  and  lift  of  frame. 


241 


DRY   DOUBLING   FRAME  WITH    PORCUPINE  CREEL. 


242 


Height  of  driving  shaft.—  From  the  floor  is  1ft.  4|in. 
for  double  tin  rollers,  and  1ft.  lOfin.  for  sinlge  tin  rollers. 
The  diameter  of  the  shaft  is  l^in. 

Below  is  a  list  of  approximate  speeds  of  spindles  for  the 
various  finished  counts  produced  on  Doubling  Frames  : — 


Revs,  of             Counts  when 
Spindles                  Double 

Revs,  of              Counts  when 
Spindles                    Double 

4,000                    2s  to  3s           !     6,000  to  7,000     \       10s  to  20s 
4,500                    3s  to  6s           [     7,000  to  7,500            16s  to  30s 
5,000                    5s  to  10s        11     7,500  to  8,000            30s  to  60s 

Power. — Spindles  per  l.H.P.  on  Counts  when  doubled: — 

75   Spindles  for  Counts  60s  50  Spindles  for  Counts   10s 

65  ,,  '  ,,        40s         45  ,,  ,,  5s 

55  „  „         20s         40  „  „  2s 

Weight    of    doubleps.— Net   weight    of   the   gearing 
is  l,176lbs.,  to  which  must  be  added  the  remainder  of  the 
frame  in  lbs.  per  spindle  as  follows  :  — 
Gauge  2iin.  ...  20flbs.) 

,,         2iin.  ...  22ilbs.  r   Balance  weights  included. 

Sin.  ...  23flbs.) 

To  obtain  the  approximate  gross  weight  add    33    per 
cent,  to  the  total  weight  obtained  from  the  above  data. 

Reference  to  Gearing. 


A      Bottom  change  wheel  20  to  50  teeth 
B      Top  .,  ,,      20  to  50      ,, 

C      Roller  wheel       50      ,, 

Q   '  Wheel  on  end  of  F.R.  I 

I      driving  lifter  motion  )  '"■     " 
E      Large    wheel    on   top   change 

stud    50 

F      Large  wheel  on  bottom  change 

stud    90 

G      Carrier  v\  heel  to  rollers   .. 

H  ,,  70       ,. 


J      Carrier    wheel    to    rollers.  70  teeth 
K  L  M  N  Lifter  motion  wheels  driven 

from  D. 
0      Bevel  for  hand  winding  of  lifter 
P      Worm  on  lifter  motion 
Q  ,.      wheel  of 

R     Tin  roller 
S      Driving  Pulleys 
T      Single  tin  roller  wheel,  20  teeth 
U      Diameter  of  bottom  rollers 
Y  ,.  spindle  wharve 


Calculations. 

Spindle  speed. — In  calculating  the  speed  of  spindles, 
add  the  thickness  of  the  spindle  band  to  the  diameters  of 
the  tin  roller  and  spindle  wharves,  the  result  will  be  very 
approximately  the  actual  speed. 

Speed      I  speed  of  line  shaft  x  drum  x  dia.  of  tin  roller  plus  band 

of  r     = 

Spindles  )  pulley  on  the  frame  x  dia.  of  wharve  plus  band 


243 


244 


Constant  for  Twist  for  Ring  Doubler. 

(Scotch  System). 


Bottom  roller 

wheel 

50 

> 

20 
Twist  wheel 


Compound 

wheel 

50 


Twist  wheel 


Twist  carrier 

wheel 

90 

20 
Driving 


Dia.  of  tin  roller 

in  gth  +  band 

81 


(Top  change)   (Bottom  change)  wheel 


10  3"1416x2iin. 

Dia  of  spl.  wharve    Cir.  of  25in. 
in|th  +  band        delivery  roller 


580 


In  all  our  make  of  ring  doublers  we  have  two  change 
places,  by  means  of  which  we  can  get  any  twist  required. 
The  above  constant  is  taken  with  20s  twist  wheel  on  top 
change.      lOin.  tin  roller+li  spindle  wharve. 

Constant  with  50s  twist  wheel  on  top  change,  with  all 
conditions  the  same  =  232. 

Constant  divided  by  turns  per  inch  =  twist  wheel. 

The  two  change  places  for  the  twist  mentioned  above 
are  one  on  the  wheel  gearing  with  the  tin  roller  wheel  and 
the  other  one  gearing  with  the  wheel  on  the  delivery  roller. 

Calling  the  first  X  and  the  second  Y — 

_  .       ,  Constant 

Turns  per  inch  =  -T^ —   ,.   ,.    .  , -^7- 

X  multiplied  by  Y 

y  _  Constant 

Y  multiplied  by  the  required  turns  per  inch 
Constant 


Y  = 


X  multiplied  by  the  required  turns  per  inch 

Or,  in  words,  assuming  any  suitable  value  for  one  wheel 
and  multiplying  it  by  the  required  turns  per  inch,  the  constant 
divided  by  the  product  thus  obtained  will  give  the  other  wheel. 

The  result  will  be  more  exact  if  5  to  10  per  cent,  be 
added  to  the  required  turns  to  allow  for  slip  as  the  constants 
below  are  based  on  the  calculated  speed  of  the  spindle. 

Constants  for  different  diameters  of  Spindle 
Wharves  and   Bottom   Rollers. 


Diameter  of           Diameter  of  Roller 

Spindle 

Wharve   1  l^in. 

1 

Ifin. 

2in.  . 

2|in. 

2^in. 

In.       .        ,                   1  • 
i            i  24150  1  20700    18100  |  16150 
1        21500  1  18400    16100    14320 
li       19350    16600    14520  !  12900 
li                17600    15100    13200    11720 

14500 
12670 
11600 
10550 

245 


Speed  of  Spindles  Inches 

Production =  delivered 

y/  of  counts  when  doubled  x  twist  constant  pgp  minute 


Inches  delivered 
per  minute 


w  ^r>      •       ..  actual    workmg 

X  60  mm.  x  ,  .  r        ^ 

hours  ot  frame 


hanks 
pep    week 


36in.  X  840  yards 

Constant  numbers  of  twist. — This  varies  accord- 
ins^  to  the  class  of  work  being  produced.  It  would  be 
impossible  to  give  a  definite  list  of  constants.  We  give 
below  a  list  that  could  be  taken  as  a  guide  : — 


2  and  3  fold  Sewing  yarns 

6,  9  fold  Sewing  yarns,  preparing 

6,  9  ,,  ,,         finishing 

Hosiery  (very  soft) 

Ordinary  Knitting  cotton 

,,  Bradford 

,,  Coarse  yarn 

Nottingham  Lace  yarn 
Crochet  preparing 

,,        finishing 


V  counts  X 
X 
X 
X 
X 


S 

4-5 

8 

4 

7 

X  eh 

X  6^ 

X 
X 
X 


5 
7 
5'6 


Trave 

175s 

3'5s 

5s 

5*5s 

6s 

7s 

8s 

10s 


lePS  foP  Wet  Doubling. — Counts  when  doubled 

No. 


9s  traveller 
10s 
lis 
12s 
13s 
14s 
15s 
d6s 


15s  ... 
20s-25s 

30s  ... 

40s  ... 

50s  ... 

60s  ... 

70s  ... 

80s  ... 


No.  17s  traveller 
18s 
19s 
20s 
22s 
23s 
24s 
25s 


«s 
10s 


For  Dry  Doubling. 

.     No.  12s  traveller 
.       „     10s 


-Counts  when  doubled. 

traveller 


15s 
20s 


No.  8s 
,,     6s 


There  is  no  fixed  rule  for  travellers  required  for  any 
given  Counts,  as  they  vary  according  to  the  speed  of  spindles, 
diameter  of  ring  used,  twist,  put  in  number  of  ends  up,  and 
the  class  of  yarn  being  doubled.  Therefore  the  list  given 
herewith  must  only  be  taken  as  a  guide  for  arriving  at  the 
number  of  the  traveller  required. 


246 


RING   DOUBLERS   QUERIES. 

To  be  answered  when  ordering'  Machines. 


How  nian>  Frames? 

For  Dry  or  Wet  Doubling  ? 

Scotch  or  English  Syt-tem  ? 

Facing  gearing  end,  must  pulley  be  on  right  or  left ;  show  direction  of  rotation. 

Driven  from  above  or  below  ? 

Driven  over  gallows  pulleys  or  by  half-twisted  strap  ? 

If  half-twisted  strap,  give  height  cf  line  shaft  from  tloor  and  direction  of  rotation. 

Diameter  of  pulley  on  frame  ? 

Diameter  of  pulley  on  line  shaft  ?  Speed  of  line  shaft '! 

Length  of  frame  overall? 

Width  of  frame  ?  Standard  3ft.  6in.  with  single  and  3ft.  with  double  tin  rollers. 

Number  of  spindles? 

Gauge  ? 

Length  of  lift? 

Inside  diameter  of  rings  ?  If  spinning  or  doubling  pattern  ? 

Bobbins  with  or  without  heads?  If  tapering  or  copping  motion  ? 

Diameter  of  Bobbin  heads  ?  Diameter  of  hole  in  bobbin  ? 

Improved  "  Phoenix  "  or  "Acme"  spindles? 

Diameter  of  spindle  wharve  ? 

With  or  without  detachable  oil  cup  ? 

Knee  brake  to  each  spindle  or  not  ? 

Speed  of  spindles  ?  To  run  twist  or  weft  way  ? 

Diameter  of  tin  roller  ? 

Single  or  double  tin  roller  ? 

Rollers  to  run  outwards  or  inwards  ? 

Diameter  of  bottom  roller  ?  Solid  or  hollow  ? 

Diameter  of  top  roller  ?  Solid  or  hollow  ? 

Must  rollers  be  brass  covered  or  not  ? 

Kevs.  of  spindle  for  one  of  front  roller? 

Turns  per  inch  ? 

Counts  to  be  doubled,  single  yarn  ?  double  yarn  ? 

Number  of  ends  into  one  ? 

From  winding  frame  spools  with ends  on  one  spool. 

'  Fi;om  cops  or  bobbins  ? 
Extreme  length  and  diameter  of  full  creel  bobbins  ? 
If  from  bobbins,  must  creel  be  upright  or  porcupine  or  for  horizontal 

skewers  ?  How  many  heights  ? 

Sketch  of  creel  to  be  given  unless  left  to  us  ? 

Thread  boards,  single  flap  or  half  boxes  ?  , 

Thread  boards  with  glass  rod  and  brass  guide  ? 
Thread  boards  slightly  tilted  and  fixed  to  beam  ? 
Troughs  to  be  of  zinc  or  copper,  in  long  or  short  lengths  ? 
Rope  driving  and  tightening  motions  for  tin  rollers? 
Hank  Indicators?  Specify  change  wheels  required. 

EXTRAS  — 

Detachable  oil  cup  to  spindles  ? 

Knee  brake  to  each  spindle? 

Above  Sin.  lift  ? 

Creels  for  more  than  two  ends  into  one  ? 

Builder  motion  for  cops  ? 

Rope  driving  and  tightening  motion  for  connecting  tin  rollers 

Indicators? 

247 


Flyer  Doublers. 


These  machines  are  mostly  used  for  doubhng  very 
coarse  yarns;  such  as  heald,  netting,  etc. 

They  are  usually  made  on  the  English  system  with  the 
water  troughs  behind  the  rollers,  but  can  be  made  on  the 
dry  system  if  desired. 

The  gearing  ends,  pedestals,  and  the  tin  roller 
bearings  are  similar  in  design  and  construction  to  those 
used  on  the  ring  doubler  or  spinning  frames. 

The  rollers  for  dry  work  are  usually  2in.  dia.,  the 
bottom  roller  is  made  of  polished  steel  and  the  tops  of 
polished  cast-iron.  For  Wet  doubling  these  rollers  are 
brass  covered. 

Troughs  are  made  of  copper  in  one  length  with  a  tap 
at  one  end  for  drawing  off  the  water  for  cleanmg,  etc.  We 
also  supply  an  arrangement  at  the  end  of  the  frame  for 
raising  the  glass  rods  out  of  the  trough. 

Creels  are  made  suitable  for  2-headed  bobbins,  similar 
in  design  to  those  of  the  ring  doubler. 

Single  tin  rollers  are  mostly  employed  on  these  frames, 
and  arranged  for  either  band  or  tape  drive  for  the  spindles. 
Double  tin  rollers  can  be  supplied  if  desired.  They  are 
miade  in  short  lengths  of  strong  material,  coupled  by  stout 
cast-iron  shafts,  running  in  self-adjusting  and  self-lubricating 
bearings  of  the  "  Mohler  "  type. 

Spindles.— The  ordinary  flyer  or  the  self-contained 
spindles  are  used  on  these  frames,  and  can  be  either  driven 
by  bands  or  tapes  as  desired.  The  spindles,  when  doubling 
fine  counts  and  of  a  small  lift,  the  self-contained  are  often 
adopted  on  account  of  the  higher  speed  obtainable,  steady 
running,  and  reduced  power  required. 

The  ordinary  flyer  spindles  are  fitted  with  footsteps, 
made  on  self-lubricating  principle  w4th  loose  covers  to 
facilitate  oiling,  and  for  keeping  out  dirt,  fluff,  etc. 

Rails. — The  travelling  rails  are  of  a  good  section  and 
fitted  with  brass  bolsters. 

Drag.— Suitable  arrangements  are  employed  for  getting 
any  amount  of  drag  that  may  be  required. 

248 


Thread  boards  are  made  of  polished  hard  wood  fitted 
with  brass  guides  and  the  usual  glass  rod. 

Building  motion.— The  usual  motion  employed  on  the 
heavy  doublers  is  the  chain  and  bowl  lifting  motion,  with 
heart  and  levers  for  giving  motion  to  the  rails.  By  this 
arrangement  each  spindle  rail  assists  in  balancing  the  rail 
on  the  opposite  side. 

The  bobbins  usually  employed  on  those  frames  are  the 
straight  2-headed  kind. 

Driving  pulleys  are  usually  12in.  to  16in.  dia.  X  3iin. 
to  4in  wide,  according  to  length  of  frame. 

Power  varies  considerably  according  to  the  kind  of 
spindle  used,  lift,  thie  actual  finished  counts,  and  the  amount 
of  twist  put  in.     Approximate  power  is : — 
Siin.  gauge  frame,  3,500  revs,  of  spl.,  50  to  55  spls.  for  I.H.P. 
4in.         „         „       3,200     „  „     42  to  46     „ 

4iin.       „         „       2,800     „  „     38  to  41     „ 

5in.         ,,         „       2,250     „  „     33  to  36     ,, 

6in.         „         „        1,750     „  „     26  to  30     „ 

Gearing  occupies  2ft.  6oin.  and  width  of  the  machine 
is  3ft.  6in.  if  single  tin  rollers,  and  3ft.  Oin.  for  double  tin 
rollers. 


249 


250 


Winding  Frames. 


Knowles'  winding  frames.  —We  are  the  sole  makers 
of  this  quick  traverse  winding  frame,  for  winding  either 
single  or  up  to  6  ends,  upon  paper  or  wood  tubes  of  small 
diameter  without  heads ;  parallel  or  conical  bobbins  can 
be  made  on  the  same  machine  without  any  alteration. 

The  traverse  motion  is  actuated  by  a  cam  at  one 
end  of  the  machine,  and  a  motion  can  be  supplied  that  will 
give  any  length  of  traverse  from  ifin  to  5 in.  The  usual 
length  of  traverse  is  5in. 

We  supply  when  desired  a  shortening  motion  for 
making  bobbins  with  tapered  ends. 

The  bobbins  are  driven  by  friction  by  means  of  an 
iron  roller  l^in.  dia.,  usually  running  at  700  revolutions 
per  minute,  placed  on  each  side  of  the  frame;  for  single 
winding  this  drives  the, bobbin. 

Stop  motions. — Where  several  ends  are  to  be  wound 
upon  one  bobbin  there  is  a  self-acting  stop  motion  to  each 
end.  On  the  loin,  roller  an  intermediate  roller  of  cast-iron 
is  introduced,  usually  covered  with  leather,  and  when  one 
end  breaks  this  intermediate  roller  is  at  once  lifted  out  of 
contact,  and  by  pressing  the  bobbin  against  a  brake  instantly 
stops  the  winding,  and  at  the  same  time  lifts  the  remaining 
threads  out  of  the  guide  on  the  traverse,  thus  preventing 
waste. 

Creels  are  made  to  order  suitable  for  the  required  class 
of  winding  and  the  requirements  of  the  trade.  They  are 
made  for  either  Mule  Cops,  Ring  Frame  Bobbins,  Double- 
headed  Bobbins,  or  spools  from  Winding  Frames  to  wind 
off  lengthways,  or  when  flanged  bobbins  are  to  be  used  we 
supply  an  adjustable  rail  to  receive  revolving  spindles. 
For  hank  winding  we  supply  brackets  for  supporting  the 
swifts  on  which  the  hanks  are  placed.  When  winding  from 
cops  we  can,  if  desired,  supply  a  clearing  arrangement. 

Pressure  roller. — These  frames  are  usually  supplied 
with  an  automatic  i)ressure  roller.  This  roller  is  the  heaviest 
at  the  beginning  of  the  bobbin,  and  gradually  decreases  in 
weight  as  the  diameter  of  the  bobbin  increases.  By  this 
device  a  much  firmer  bobbin,  with  perfect  ends,  is  produced. 

251 


The  drag  board  runs  the  whole  length  of  the  frame, 
covered  with  cloth,  and  is  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  put  in 
a  suitable  position  to  give  the  required  amount  of  drag  or 
tension  for  the  class  of  yarn  being  wound. 

Space. — Width  of  frame  4ft.  Space  occupied  by 
gearing  4ft.  (but  if  driven  over  gallows  pulleys  3ft.  8in.), 
with  shortening  motion  for  5in.  traverse.  Distance  from 
centre  to  centre  of  drum  is  7in. 

Length  overall  (with  or  without  stop  motions) : — 


No.  of 
Drums 

40 — 20  each  side 

50—25 

60—30 

70—35 

80—40 

Power.— 

8in  dia.  X  2in. 


25in.  5in. 

Traverse  Traverse 
ft.     in. 

8 


ft. 
10 
11 
13 
15 
16 


15 
18 
21 
24 
27 


No.  of 
Drums 

95—45  each  side  18 
100—50 
110—55 
120—60 


aiin. 

"raverse 
ft.      in. 

5in. 

Traverse 

ft.     in. 

18 

4 

30     3 

20 

0 

33     2 

21 

8 

36     1 

23 

4 

39     0 

120    drums    to    I.H.P.       Pulleys. — Usually 
wide.     Speeds. — 700  revs,  per  min. 


Weights  and   Measurements. 

(Approximate). 


G 

ross 

Net 

Cubic  ft. 

60  drums 

2in. 

traverse      

40 

cwt. 

32 

cwt. 

126 

100       ,, 

2in. 

56 

45 

,, 

165 

70       ,, 

5iii. 



53 

,, 

44 

, , 

165 

70       ,, 

5iu. 

,,  (stop  motion) 

57 

, , 

45 

, , 

179 

100 

5in. 



72 

M 

60 

'• 

191 

252 


RNOWLES'    PATENT   WINDING   FRAME 
SPECIFICATION. 


How  many  Frames  ?  How  many  Drums  in  each  Frame  ? 

Diameter  of  Driving  Pulleys  ?  (Usually  Sin.) 

Speed  of  Driving  Pulleys?  (Usually  700  revs,  per  minute). 

How  many  ends  to  wind  into  one  ?  (Usually  three). 

Extra  if  with  four  ends,  five  ends,  or  six  ends  into  one. 

We  apply  a  Self-acting  Stop  Motion  to  each  end  when  more  than 
one  is  wound. 

If  to  have  shortening  motion  ?  Length  of  traverse  ? 

Creel  to  wind  from  cops  or  bobbins 

Description  of  bobbins  ?  On  Spindle  or  Skewer  ? 

We  make  these  Frames  to  wind  on  paper  tubes  |in.  or  fin.  diameter, 
or  on  plain  wooden  tubes  l^in.  diameter,  which  will  you  have  ? 

Stop  INIotion  with  plain  rod  or  knuckle  joint  ? 

When  must  the  Frame  be  delivered  ? 

Please  state  whether  the  Machine  will  stand   at  right  angles  to  the 
Driving  Shaft,  or  parallel  to  it  ? 


253 


254 


^ 


The  Camless  Quick-traverse 
Cross  Winding  Frame. 


This  machine  is  the  only  Cross  Winding  frame  made 
without  cam,  eccentric,  spHt  drum,  or  other  cam  substitute. 
There  is  no  reciprocating  thread,  guide  or  rail  employed. 

Cotton,  wool,  worsted,  mohair,  jute,  silk,  or  any 
other  material,  can  be  wound,  and  the  enormous  production 
in  single  winding  either  on  cones  and  cheeses  will  recommend 
It  strongly  to  the  hosiery  yarn  industry. 

The  adjustment  from  cones  to  parallel  cheeses,  or 
vice- versa,  is  simply  and  quickly  made. 

Solid,  firmly  wound  spools  for  doubling  purposes,  tran- 
sport, etc.,  are  produced,  but  if  intended  for  dyeing  in  the 
spool,  they  can  be  wound  as  soft  as  desired,  and  particularly 
so  at  the  extremities  (which  is  not  possible  in  machines 
actuated  by  cams)  in  order  to  permit  the  easy  access  of  the 
dyeing  liquor  to  all  parts  of  the  spool. 

Traverse  motion. — The  movement  of  every  part  of 
the  traverse  motion  is  continuously  circular,  smooth 
and  silent,  and  there  is  no  strain  or  friction  beyond 
the  drag  required  on  the  yarn. 

An  illustration  of  the  traverse  motion  is  given,  from 
which  may  be  seen  that  it  consists  essentially  of  two  pro- 
jecting fingers  suitably  shaped,  revolving  in  one  direction 
and  driving  two  similarly  shaped  fingers  in  the  opposite 
direction,  by  means  of  small  pinions  in  the  centre  of  each 
pair.  The  yarn  is  carried  by  one  finger  along  a  stationary 
guide  rail  and  brought  back  again  by  a  finger  revolving  in 
the  opposite  direction.  The  second  finger  of  each  pair 
merely  repeats  the  action  of  the  first  one,  so  that  the  four 
traverses  of  the  yarn  are  obtained  by  one  revolution  of  the 
fingers,  which  admits  of  the  latter  being  run  at  a  com- 
paratively low  speed,  thus  making  wear  and  tear  in  the 
perfectly  balanced  traverse  motion  practically  non-existent. 

The  driving  pairs  of  fingers  are  driven  by  means  of 
bevels  from  a  shaft  running  the  whole  length  of  the  machine, 
through  clutches  which  are  disengaged  when  the  spool  stops, 
so  that  the  fingers  stop  at  the  same  time.     They  are  restarted 

255 


simultaneously  with  the  spools,  by  means  of  a  slight  pressure 
on  the  handle  of  the  stop  lever. 

The  absence  of  vibration  or  strain  on  any  portion  of 
this  machine  means  a  life  far  in  excess  of  that  attainable  in 
any  machine  in  which  cams  or  reciprocating  motions  are 
employed. 

Stop  motion, — The  improved  instantaneous  stop 
motion  ensures  the  stopping  of  the  spool  well  before  the 
broken  end  runs  on,  provided  the  break  occurs,  as  it  generally 
does,  somewhere  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  detector  wire. 
The  ends  are  laid  in  the  form  of  a  perfect  ribbon  without 
twisting  or  overlapping. 

Creels  are  made  to  order  suitable  for  the  required  class 
of  winding  and  requirements  of  the  trade.  They  are  made 
for  either  Mule  Cops,  Ring  Frame  Bobbins,  Double-headed 
Bobbins,  or  spools  from  Winding  Frames  to  wind  off  length- 
ways, or  when  flanged  bobbins  are  to  be  used  we  supply  a 
rail  to  receive  revolving  spindles.  For  hank  winding  we 
supply  brackets  for  supporting  the  swifts  on  which  the  hanks 
are  placed.  When  winding  from  cops  we  can,  if  desired, 
supply  a  clearing  arrangement. 

The  drag  board  runs  the  whole  length  of  the  frame, 
covered  with  cloth,  and  is  so  arranged  that  it  can  be  put  in 
a  suitable  position  to  give  the  required  amount  of  drag  or 
tension  for  the  class  of  yarn  being  wound. 

Pulleys. — Usually  Sin.  dia.  X  2in.  wide.  Speed. — 
1,000  revs,  per  min. 

Power — 120  drums  to  i.H.p.  Space. — Width  of 
frame  3ft.  6in.  Space  occupied  by  gearing  1ft.  Gfin. 
Centre  to  centre  of  drums  lOoin. 

Production. — For  multiple  winding,  with  instanta- 
neous stop  motion  to  each  end,  10,000  to  12,000  inches  per 
minute  (1,000  to  1,200  hanks  per  week,  allowing  ample  time 
for  cleaning,  etc.),  can  be  easily  wound. 

For  single  winding  a  production  of  12,000  to  15,000 
inches  or  even  more,  per  minute  (1,200  to  1,500  hanks  per 
week)  can  be  achieved  without  difficulty. 


256 


\ 


257 


QUERY  SHEET. 
PATENT  CAMLESS  CROSS  WINDER. 


How  many  machines  ? 

Number  of  drums  per  machine  ? 

or  Extreme  length  ? 

Parallel  bobbins  ? 

or  Conical  bobbins  ?  Cone  spindles  e-itra 

Traverse  ? 

Diameter  of  full  bobbin  ? 

To  wind  on  paper  or  wood  tubes  ?  Special  spindles  extra 

To  wind  cotton,  wool,  worsted,  mohair,  or  what? 

Counts  in  creel  ?  Scale  ? 

To  be  arranged  for  doubling  winding  ? 

How  many  ends  ? 

Automatic  stop  motion  to  each  end  ? 

Automatic  stop  motion  for  full  bobbins  ? 

Creel  for  cops,  ring  bobbins,  or  what  ? 

Special  requirements  regarding  the  cresl  ? 

Special  requirements  regarding  drag  on  yarn  ? 


5  or  6  ends  per  spool  extra 


from  hanks  extra 


Observations  : — 

Where  special  paper  or  wooden  tubes  are  to  be  used,  or  special 
cop-skewers,  samples  must  be  sent,  so  that  we  can  supply  suitable 
spindles  and  skewer-brackets  (we  do  not  supply  skewers). 


Date 


Signature 


258 


JiiJL  I, 


259 


Cop  and  Bobbin  Reels, 


We  have  patterns  for  the  single  cop  reels  for  hand 
or  power  and  the  double  bobbin  reel  for  power  only. 
These  machines  are  very  simple,  well  made,  and  very  light 
running,  and  are  arranged  for  reeling  plain  or  cross  hanks 
from  ring  spinning,  ring  doubler,  or  flyer  doubler  bobbins, 
or  from  mule  cops  on  either  the  English  or  French 
system  of  reeling. 

Bobbin  reels  are  usually. made  double  40  hank,  Siin. 
gauge,  and  fitted  with  7-lea,  crossing  and  patent 
"bridge"  doffing  motion.  Double  30  hank  reels  can 
be  supplied  if  desired. 

Cop  reels  are  made  single,  that  is,  with  one  swift  only, 
and  fitted  with  7-lea  or  measuring  motion,  which  auto- 
matically stops  the  machine  on  the  completion  of  the  hank 
or  given  length  delivered. 

The  swifts  are  built  up  of  tin  rollers  and  wood  swivels 
for  the  cop  reels  or  machines  for  very  light  work,  and  for 
the  heavier  work  steel  tubes  are  substituted  for  the  tin 
rollers,  and  the  swivels  are  made  of  iron  in  place  of  wood. 

A  swift  brake  is  applied  to  the  single  cop  reel;  it 
consists  of  a  leather  brake  carried  on  the  strap  fork  rod, 
which  comes  in  contact  with  the  fast  pulley  as  the  driving 
strap  moves  on  to  the  loose  pulley,  thus  automatically 
stopping  the  machine  in  half  a  revolution  when  running  at 
the  highest  speed.  A  brake  can  be  applied  to  the  double 
reel  if  specially  ordered. 

Drop  motions. — For  the  purpose  of  doffing  on  the 
cop  or  light  reels  we  arrange  that  the  swift  can  be  closed 
up,  but  for  reels  working  the  heavier  or  hard  twisted 
yarns  we  supply  a  drop  motion  to  two  of  the  swivels.  This 
consists  of  a  hinge  with  special  locking  or  fastening  arrange- 
ment, which  when  unlocked  allows  the  swivel  to  drop  and 
thus  release  the  hank,  which  can  then  be  easily  removed. 

Doffing. — We  usually  supply  the  bridge  motion,  the 
simplest  yet  invented.  There  is  nothing  to  get  out  of  order, 
and  it  is,  impossible  for  the  hanks  to  get  soiled  when  doffing. 
The  end  of  swift  shaft  is  enclosed  in  a  lubricating  loose 
bush ;  this  bush  when  the  swift  is  running  rests  on  a  ledge 

260 


cast  on  the  frame  end ;  on  the  other  arm  is  placed  a  bracket 
so  shaped  to  overlap  this  ledge.  When  the  swift  is  dropped 
it  is  pushed  on  to  the  bracket  (clearly  shown  in  Fig.  l). 
The  hanks  are  then  pulled  off  and  placed  in  the  recess  be- 
tween the  two  arms,  the  swift  is  then  put  back  into  its 
working  position,  and  the  hanks  can  be  lifted  out. 


Fig.   1.— SINGLE  COP   REEL. 

We  can  supply  the  gate  or  the  wheel  doffing  motion 
if  desired. 

Traverse  motion. — By  a  simple  arrangement  this 
machine  can  be  changed  from  7-lea  to  cross  reeling  or 
vice-versa. 

The  7-lea  motion  is  worked  from  the  swift  by  means 
of  a  worm  and  wheel  giving  motion  to  a  cross  shaft  on  which 
is  a  projection  working  into  a  step-down  rack. 

Cross  winding  motion  is  also  worked  from  the  swift 
shaft  by  a  pair  of  bevel  wheels  giving  motion  to  a  shaft ;  on 
the  end  of  this  shaft  is  placed  a  disc  to  which  is  secured  an 
adjustable  bracket  and  stud  connected  up  to  the  traverse 
rail,  clearly  seen  in  Fig.  2. 

Creels  for  the  single  cop  reel  consist  of  a  wood  rail 
placed  in  front  of  the  swift,  and  arranged  to  take  either 
skewers  for  mule  cops  or  split  plugs  for  ring  frame  bobbins. 
For  the  double  reel  the  creels  are  provided  for  split  plugs 
for  cop-built  bobbins,  or  for  revolving  steel  spindles  for 
double-flanged  bobbins.     The  spindles  are  carried  in  cast- 

261 


iron  rails  with  a  suitable  drag  motion  provided  to  prevent 
the  bobbins  over-running  the  swift. 

We  supply  also  a  self-acting  knocking-off  motion 
which  automatically  stops  the  machme  on  the  completion 
of  the  hank.  A  skeining  motion  can  also  be  supplied 
when  desired. 

The  back  of  the  machine  is  supplied  with  pegs,  sockets, 
back  laps,  etc.,  to  enable  any  classes  of  cops,  pirns,  or 
bobbins  to  be  reeled,  and  the  machine  is  in  every  way  made 
adaptable  for  a  wide  range  of  work. 


Fig.  2 

Dimensions  and  Weights  of  Reels. 


Length     Width 

Gross            Net     1  Cubic 
tee. 

Ft.      in.      Ft.      in.  i  Cwts.  qrs.  lbs.  |     Cvvts.     1 
Double  40                                                                          ' 

Hank  Reel          ...'   13      4       4      0         9       1     12           6             95 
Single  40 

Hank  Reel         ...j  12      9       3      2    i     8       1       8  1        5             78 

Speed. — Double  bobbin  reel    ... 
Single  cop  reel 

Pulleys. — Double  reel  ... 
Single  reel     ... 

Power. — 10  double  bobbin  reels 
20  single  cop  reels    ... 

262 


150  revs. 
90      „ 

Sin.  X  l^in. 
6in.  X  Uin. 

=  1  H.P. 
=  1  H.P. 


COP  AND  BOTTOM  REEL  SPECIFICATION. 


No.  of  ^lachines  ?  Single  or  Double  ?  No.  of  Hanks? 

Gauge?  in.  Circumference  of  Swift  ? 

Swifts  to  be  of  Steel  or  Tin  ?  Wood  or  Iron  Swivels  ? 

Crossing  Motion  ?  Seven-Lea  Motion  ? 

Kind  of  Doffing  Motion  required  ?  Drop  Motion  ? 

Skeining  Motion  ?  Keel  to  be  fitted  with  Brushes  ? 

Diameter  of  Driving  Pulleys?  in. 

Speed  of  Driving  Pulley  ?  revs. 

Kind  of  Creel?  Split  Plugs,  Skewers,  or  Spindles? 

EXTRAS  :— 

Cross    Motion,     Drop     Motion,     Skeining     Motion,     Brushes,. 
Automatic  Brake  for  Swifts. 


263 


IMPROVED   BUNDLING    PRESS. 

264 


Yarn  Bundling  Press. 


These  machines  are  made  exceptionally  strong,  with 
all  facings  for  stretches  and  yarn  box  machined. 

•The  yarn  box  is  12in.  long  and  8iin.  wide  for  101b. 
bundles,  and  usually  made  for  four  or  five  strings.  The 
box,  however,  can  be  made  any  special  size  and  for  any 
number  of  strings.  Loose  wood  lininp^s  and  block  are 
supplied  when  required  to  make  51b.  bundles.  Special 
attention  has  been  given  to  the  top  bars  and  locking 
levers  to  ensure  perfect-fitting  hinges  and  joints. 

Knocking-off  motion.— A  self-acting  atid  adjustable 
knocking-off"  motion  is  applied,  which  brtngs  a  brake  into 
action  directly  the  machine  is  stopped. 

Lifting  motion. — The  pressure  on  the  yarn  is  got  by 
two  eccentrics  placed  on  either  side  of  the  lifting  wheel ;  an 
arm  from  each  of  these  is  connected  to  the  underside  of  the 
box,  thus  giving  a  very  uniform  pressure.  The  press  can 
be  worked  by  hand  by  removing  the  hand  wheel  (seen  in 
the  illustration)  and  putting  thereon  a  specially-formed 
hand  wheel. 

Diameter   of   pulleys  24in.  x  3in. 

Speed  ...  ...  ...  ...        60  revs,  per  min. 

Power  ...       *tof  H.p. 

Weights  and   Dimensions. 

Floor  space  required                 ...  ...          3ft.  0.  X  2ft.  Oin. 

Gross  weight     ...          ...          ...  13  cwts.  0  qrs.  12  lbs. 

Net  weight         10       „     3     „    19     „ 

Cubic  measurement      ...          ...  ...          ...  45  cubic  feet. 

Production.— 9, OOOlbs.  to  10,0001bs.  per  week  in  101b. 
bundles,  and  8, OOOlbs.  to  9, OOOlbs.  when  working  51b. 
bundles. 


265 


Winding  and  Twisting 
Machinery. 


Fop  Cotton,  Silk,  Hemp,  Jute,   Flax,  Worsted, 
Woollen,  China-Grass,  Twines,  &c. 


We  also  make  a  positive  stop  motion  winding 
doubling  machine. — This  machine  is  made  to  wind  up  to 
20  threads  on  a  bobbin,  with  postive  stop  motion  to  each, 
it  has  double  drums,  and  there  is  no  friction  when  thread 
stops — all  levers  ^are  done  away  with.  The  simplest 
machine  on  the  market  to  work. 


The  ''B"  machine  is  built  very  strong,  making  Sin.   by 
Sin.  bobbins  for  jute,  hemp  and  twine. 

266 


Twine  laying  machine. — This  is  the  only  machine 
that  will  lay  hemp,  jute  and  flax  twine  to  advantage,  and 
it  does  the  work  perfectly  at  a  very  small  cost.  One  girl 
can  mind  tw^o  machines,  and  of  one  lea  laid  twine  in  56  hours 
she  turns  out  2,400  lbs.  per  week.  This  machine  is  a  strong 
and  heavy  Sin.  lift,  or  can  be  made  6in.  lift  for  medium  and 
light  twines. 

Cable  thread  and  crochet  cotton  machine. — 
This  machine  puts  in  the  right  and  left  hand  twist  at  one 
operation,  thus  saving  a  second  machine  in  making  cable 
threads  or  cords,  and  also  saves  the  re-winding  between  the 
ordinary  two-twistings.  It  is  in  use  for  six  'cord  sewings, 
crochet  cottons,  fishing  net  twines,  etc. 

Up  twisting  machine. — This  machine  is  used  for 
Hemp,  Jute,  Cotton,  Worsted,  Woollen,  Knittings,  and  all 
classes  of  Dry  Twistings. 

The  advantages  are  :  — 

1st. — Half  the  space  saved. 

2nd. — A  large  bobbin  is  used,  consequently  a  long 
length  without  a  knot. 

3rd. — A  great  speed  is  got  wdth  this  large  bobbin. 

4th. — The  warp  winding  is  done  by  this  machine 
in  twisting,  thus  saving  the  warp  winding 
machine. 

5th. — The  twist  is  more  perfect  and  rounder. 

6th — Production  very  great. 


267 


Spindle  Banding  Machines. 


These  machines  are  used  for  making  spindle  banding 
from  spoiled  cops,  or  perfect  cops,  by  which  a  great  saving 
is  made,  as  the  banding  can  be  made  for  fd.  per  lb.  from 


the  cops,  and  it  is  well  stretched  in  the  process  of  making, 
both  in  the  strands  and  the  complete  cord,  consequently  it 
does  not  get  slack  in  working. 

These  machines  are  in  work  in  almost  every  country 
in  Europe  and  in  America,  and  give  great  satisfaction. 

268 


Balling  Machine. 


Below  we  give  a  view  of  this  machine.  The  bobbins 
from  the  spindle  banding  machine  are  placed  in  a  creel  or 
stand,  and  the  banding  passes  through  an  eyelet  and  flyer 
on  to  a  spindle.  This  spindle,  having  a  horizontal  radial 
movement,  makes  the  balls  any  desired  shape  and  size  up 


to  Sin.  dia.  There  is  an  arrangement  to  run  the  spindle  at 
various  speeds  to  suit  the  different  shapes  of  balls  being 
wound.  ■ 

This  machine  can  be  worked  by  hand  or  power. 

The  machines  are  built  upon  a  table  as  shown,  and 
stands  can  be  supplied  to  carry  same  if  required. 

269 


MACHINES   MOST   ADAPTED    FOR 

SPINNING   YARNS    FROM    WASTE   OR 
SHORT   STAPLE   COTTONS. 


HARD    WASTE,    COP    BOTTOMS,    etc. 
For  Fine   Shoddy  Yarns. 

Hard  waste  breaking  machine,  made  with  any 
nut7iber  of  cylinders,  for  breaking  up  cop  bottoms  and 
other  hard  waste. 

Automatic  feeder  arranged  to  feed  on  to  the  lattice  of 
a  single  scutcher,  fitted  w4th  fans  for  down-draft, 
Lord's  pedal  feed  motion  with  cone  regulator,  and  lap 
arrangement  for  making  laps  for  48in.  cards. 

Breaker  carding  engine,  48in.  on  the  wnre,  with 
extended  lattice  feed  table  for  two  scutcher  laps,  wnth  tw^o 
2in.  feed  rollers  covered  with  inserted  wire,  one  2in.  roller 
over  same  covered  with  leather  fillet,  9in.  taker-in  with 
inserted  wire,  50in.  cylinder,  seven  rollers,  six  clearers,  and 
one  clearer  over  taker-in,  one  wood  fancy  with  draft  or 
bright  roller  under  same,  with  30in.  doffer.  Supplied  with 
draw  box  and  coiler  delivery. 

Derby  doubiers,  with  V  table  for  96  cans  for  48in. 
cards,  provided  with  stop  motion  and  arranged  to  make  laps 
from  sliver  of  breaker  card.  Two  or  three  of  these  laps  are 
placed  on  the  feed  table  of  the  finisher  card. 

Finishing  carding  engine,  which  is  usually  made 
48in.  on  the  wire,  with  extended  lattice  for  two  Derby 
doubler  laps  placed  one  behind  the  other,  two  feed  rollers 
covered  with  inserted  wire,  one  roller  for  leather  fillet,  9in. 
taker-in  covered  with  inserted  wire,  50in.  cylmder,  seven 
rollers,  six  clearers,  and  one  clearer  over  taker-in,  one  wood 
fancy  with  draft  or  bright  roller  under  same,  24in.  ring 
doflfer  fitted  with  single  rubber  wood  divider,  fly-comb 
condenser  to  take  off  from  18  to  36  ends  on  the  one  bobbin, 
according  to  the  counts  to  be  spun.  Sometimes  a  tape 
condenser  is  used  to  take  off  from  36  to  80  ends. 

''The  bobbins  made  on  the  condensers  are  afterwards 
put  into  the  stands  of  the  self-acting  mule  or  ring  frame. 

270 


Self-acting  mules,  for  spinning  all  kinds  of  waste, 
made  with  rim  shaft  parallel  to  carriage  or  headstock, 
as  desired,  and  the  creels  can  be  arranged  for  either 
condenser  or  roving  bobbins. 

Ring  spinning  frames  arranged  with  surface  drums 
to  receive  the  condenser  bobbins  or  creels  to  take  cheeses 
direct  from  the  carding  engine  or  roving  frame  bobbins. 

MACHINES   FOR   SOFT   WASTE 


Bump  Yarn   Strippings,   Roller  Waste,  Scutcher 
Droppings,   etc. 

Self-acting  willow  or  cotton  opening  and  clean- 
ing machine,  supplied  with  feeding  and  deliver}'  lattice  and 
intermittent  motion  feed  rollers. 

Waste  shaker,  for  cleaning  opener  and  scutcher 
droppings. 

Single  Crighton  opener,  with  vertical  beater,  arranged 
for  hand  feeding  and  with  delivery  lattice.  A  small  sized 
machine  is  sometimes  used  with  a  30in.  vertical  beater, 
which  produces  about  35,0001bs.  per  week. 

A  self-acting  willow  may  be  used  for  very  dirty 
cotton  w^aste  instead  of  a  Crighton  opener. 

Automatic  feeder,  arranged  to  feed  on  the  lattice 
of  a  single  scutcher,  fitted  with  fans-  for  down  draft, 
Lord's  pedal  feed  motion  with  cone  regulator,  and  lap 
arrangement  for  making  laps  for  48in  cards. 

Breaker  carding  engine,  48in.  on  the  wire,  with  ex- 
tended lattice  feed  table  for  two  scutcher  laps,  two  2in.  feed 
rollers  covered  with  inserted  wire,  one  2in.  roller  over  same 
covered  with  leather  fillet,  9in.  taker-in  W'ith  inserted  wire, 
50in.  cylinder,  seven  rollers,  six  clearers,  and  one  clearer  over 
taker-in,  one  wood  fancy  with  draft  or  bright  roller  under 
same,  with  30in  doffer,  fitted  with  side  drawing  for  Scotch 
feed. 

Finishing  carding  engine,  which  is  usually  made 
48in.  on  the  wire,  with  Scotch  feed,  two  feed  rollers  covered 
with  inserted  wire,  one  roller  for  leather  fillet,  9in.  taker-in 
covered  with  inserted  wire,  50in.  cylinder,  seven  rollers,  six 


271 


clearers,  and  one  clearer  over  taker-in,  one  wood  fancy  with 
ring  draft  or  bright  roller  under  same,  24in.  ring  doffer  fitted 
with  single  rubber  wood  divider,  fly-comb  condenser  to  take 
off  from  14  to  22  ends  on  to  one  bobbin,  according  to  the 
counts  to  be  spun. 

The  bobbins  made  on  the  condensers  are  afterwards 
put  into  the  stands  of  the  self-acting  mule  or  ring  frame. 

Self-acting  mules,  for  spinning  all  kinds  of  waste, 
made  with  rim  shaft  parallel  to  carriage  or  headstock,  as 
desired,  and  the  creels  can  be  arranged  for  either  condenser 
or  roving  bobbins. 

Ring  spinning  frames,  arranged  with  surface  drums 
to  receive  the  condenser  bobbins  or  with  creels  to  take 
cheeses  direct  from  the  carding  engine  or  roving  frame 
bobbins. 


ALSO   MAKERS  OF  ALL  KINDS 

OF 

Woollen  Machinery,  Scribblers  and  Carders  (Wood  or 
Iron)  with  STEEL  SHAFTS  and  CASE-HARDENED 
Necks.  Blamire's  and  Scotch  Feeds.  Single  Doffer, 
Double  Doffer  and  Tape  Condensers  with  Two,  Four, 
or  Six  Tiers  of  Single  or  Tandem  Rubbers.  Grinding 
Frames,  Patent  Self-acting  Mules  for  Woollen,  Worsted, 
Silk,  and  Cotton  Waste.  Worsted  Carding  Engines. 
Burr  Crushers. 


272 


3    ETEE    DDE31    DM3    fl 


77^ 


SPEC. COLL  TS  1583  .J63  1921 
John  Hetherington  &  Sons. 
Illustrated  catalogue  of 
textile  machinery  made  by 


7 


V 


C^%)^1 


'^^t%: 


m